Home

pilot User`s Manual

1. X 0 4 center lines of the thread 0 25 jau x Lo N oO H H D 0 4A o gt ite iz 5 Sep a oct I Sri N N A A S l Sop 08 BF Ike 98 8 f 6 Q I 1 A aly i z o Q lo O i l to the length of the housing center lines of the sensor gt reference plane tolerance to the center of the lens mount optical axis gt front module reference plane tolerance to the reference planes Photosensitive surface of the 0 02 This is the sensor tilt tolerance It applies to every point on the sensor photosensitive surface and is relative to the center of the die D Maximum Sensor Tilt Angle Degrees O r P Camera Tilt X Tilt Y N S piA640 210gm gc 0 48 0 63 piA1000 48 gm gc 0 31 0 31 E h 2 1 piA1000 60 gm gc 0 31 0 31 piA1600 35 gm gc 0 19 0 26 PSV piA1900 32 gm gc 0 16 0 29 O piA2400 17 gm gc 0 27 0 32 7 G 3 0 175 i i i i This tolerance is for the dis
2. Vr immar 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 a BEE EEE a an a ae lar i ior kan E Jarre Jame AW00015119000 Auto Function AOI Image AOI a Auto Function AOI Image AOI b Auto Function AOI Image AOI c Auto Function AOI Image AOI d Fig 72 Various Degrees of Overlap Between the Auto Function AOI and the Image AOI 274 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Setting an Auto Function AOI Setting an Auto Function AOI is as follows 1 Select an Auto Function AOI 2 Select the Auto Function s that you want to use with this Auto Function AOI 3 Set the size and the position of the Auto Function AOI By default an Auto Function AOI is set to the full resolution of the camera s sensor You can change the size and the position of an Auto Function AOI by changing the value of the Auto Function AOl s X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters The value of the X Offset parameter determin
3. ELEL mort ra Fig 66 Horizontal Binning The availability of binning differs between the camera models Basler pilot 257 Features AW00015119000 Camera Model Vertical Binning Horizontal Binning piA640 210gm by 2 3 or 4 by 2 3 or 4 piA1000 48gm by 2 3 or 4 by 2 3 or 4 piA1000 60gm by 2 3 or 4 by 2 3 or 4 piA1600 35gm by 2 3 or 4 by 2 3 or 4 piA1900 32gm by 2 by 2 piA2400 17gm by 2 3 or 4 by 2 3 or 4 You can combine vertical and horizontal binning This however may cause objects to appear dis torted in the image For more information on possible image distortion due to combined vertical and horizontal binning see the following section Setting Binning You can enable vertical binning by setting the Binning Vertical parameter Setting the parameter s value to 2 3 or 4 enables vertical binning by 2 vertical binning by 3 or vertical binning by 4 respec tively Setting the parameter s value to 1 disables vertical binning You can enable horizontal binning by setting the Binning Horizontal parameter Setting the param eter s value to 2 3 or 4 enables horizontal binning by 2 horizontal binning by 3 or horizontal bin ning by 4 respectively Setting the parameter s value to 1 disables horizontal binning You can set the Binning Vertical or the Binning Horizontal parameter va
4. This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 e e 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 196 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 6 Bayer BG 12 Packed Format When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 12 Packed pixel data format it outputs 12 bits of data per pixel Every three bytes transmitted by the camera contain data for two pixels With the Bayer BG 12 Packed coding the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens in the sensor s Bayer filter you get 12 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens in the filter you get 12 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens in the filter you get 12 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The tables below describe how the data for the even rows and for the odd rows of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer BG12 Packed output The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a row P the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a row Bo the first byte of data for a row Bm the last byte of data for a row Even Rows Byte Data Bo Blue value for Po bits 11 4
5. Maximum Sensor Tilt Angle Degrees Camera Tilt X Tilt Y Camera Tilt X Tilt Y piA640 210gm gc 0 48 0 63 piA1900 32gm gc 0 16 0 29 piA1000 48 gm gc 0 31 0 31 piA2400 17 gm gc 0 27 0 32 piA1000 60 gm gc 0 31 0 31 piA1600 35 gm gc 0 19 0 26 Fig 12 Sensor Positioning Accuracy in mm Unless Otherwise Noted 16 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 2 90 Head Housing The camera housing conforms to protection class IP30 assuming that the lens mount is covered by a lens or by the cap that is shipped with the camera 1 5 2 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points In pilot cameras with the 90 head housing the camera s direction of view is at right angle to the direction of view of standard pilot cameras The cameras are manufactured with high precision Planar parallel and angular sides guarantee precise mounting with high repeatability The dimensions in millimeters for cameras with 90 head housing are as shown in Figure 13 Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the top and four mounting holes on the bottom as shown in the drawings In addition there are four mounting holes in the front module 4x M3 4 5 mm deep recommend using the front module reference plane see the figure in the Sensor For optimum accuracy in the positioning of the camera s optical axis we Positioning Accuracy section as mounting surface
6. ceeeeeeeee 296 FOSCUS Manta tetas ail titel te tas be 297 frame period 0 0 eeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeees 47 144 frame rate and averaging c e 154 controlling with an external trigger signal 112 125 maximum allowed l a 154 frame readout time ssnneeeeeeee eneee 151 frame retention parameter 0006 34 frame start trigger ceeee 94 225 detalls nia et e aaa Aine 106 frame start trigger delay standard Mode c ccesccceeeeeeseeeeees 115 frame start trigger mode parameter dire Heyl A E tutes Ha AARE 107 119 frame transmission delay parameter 46 frame transmission time 0 151 TREC rU iienaa Hag Ee EEE EEE EnEn 135 free selection sequence set advance mode seeeseerseerressresrresrrere 251 front module ee cee ceeceecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 17 functional description 0 cceeeeeee 59 G gain explained ao eera r 207 Basler pilot Index SS LATO D 207 gai k 1010 iine au i aaiae iaa 277 gain raw all esenee 207 gain raw tap 1 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseree 207 gain raw tap 2 eeeeeeeeeeerresereserne 207 gamma correction eeens 166 gray value adjustment damping 0 281 H hardware trigger acquisition start cc00 104 125 frame Start cccceceteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 112 heartbeat timeout parameter 00 43 heartbeat timer 43 heat dissipation cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 24 high ga
7. 2 0 00000 ee 251 12 531 Operatia e end Se hei ak od eon eed Meee 251 12 5 3 2 Configuration oes cceann ie ae a e E p ee 255 12 6 BINMING es isis dled vets heh ena E A a nar AEE aa a aa aha A AE E a iaai E E EA 257 12 6 1 Considerations When Using Binning 000000 eee eee 259 12 7 Reverse X ii eee e ne a a eee 261 128 Average resser inet eee a a e a E e 5 E EE e RE wad te 264 12 9 Luminance Lookup Table 0000 cee eae 267 12 10 Auto Functions sisii en ee hele Re a eed eee eh ee 270 12 10 1 Common Characteristics 00 0 0000 ee 270 12 10 1 1 Modes of Operation 00 000 cee 271 12 10 1 2 Auto Function AOI 0 00000 cee 272 12 10 1 3 Using an Auto Function 00 0000 ee ee 276 12 10 2 Gain Auto rea aon SS Ne aa et ee PE ees Se PR ee ee 277 12 10 3 Exposure Auto 2 anaana 279 12 10 4 Gray Value Adjustment Damping 00 00 e eee eee 281 12 10 5 Auto Function Profile 0 000 eee eee 282 12 10 6 Balance White Auto 0 0 00000 ae 283 12 11 Disable Parameter Limits nunnana annann nnana eee 285 12 12 DEDOUNCES 4 fuschia Rae laden done data te wed E ave ed Spd aes d A a a eh aes 286 12 13 Minimum Output Pulse Width 0 00 000 ccc eee 288 12 14 Trigger Delay 2 ee eee 290 12 15 Acquisition Status 2 0 0 00 tees 292 12 16 Chunk Features 34 het cree oun Gud Rete ota dda MEL Re eee E KE RENDA E
8. Basler pilot 17 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW000151 19000 2 x M2 4 5 deep 2x M3 4 8 deep s21 2 x M3 4 5 deep 3 75 15 6 64 15 E ees O jA o IEN P ON SZ Ny TOR Ne sain arr aei L lo J JALIL N N 3 i Bottom o f oo a Re O ca 15 4 2 x M3 4 deep satel 110 20 6 1 104 65 2 x M3 4 5 deep 4 BASLER Q E et z Be ee 5 x Lf Jl S pilot n jo a 5 N 2 i Nie S i I a 85 65 Photosensitive 28 5 surface of the gt 29 z sensor 3 25 99 3 T 2 x M3 4 5 deep x a on a ss x S a _ N Top 2 x M3 3 5 deep Fig 13 Mechanical Dimensions in mm for Cameras With 90 Head Housing 18 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 2 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy The sensor positioning accuracy for cameras equipped with 90 head housing is as shown in Figure 14
9. Bm 3 Low byte of blue value for P Bm 3 Low byte of green value for P 1 Bm 2 High byte of blue value for P _ Bm 2 High byte of green value for Pp Bm 1 Low byte of green value for P Bm 1 Low byte of red value for Ph Bm High byte of green value for Ph Bm High byte of red value for Ph When the camera is set for Bayer BG 16 the pixel data output is 16 bit data of the unsigned short little endian type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below Note that for 16 bit data you might expect a value range from 0x0000 to OxFFFF However with the camera set for Bayer BG 16 only 12 bits of the 16 bits transmitted are effective Therefore the highest data value you will see is OxOFFF indicating a signal level of 4095 This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 When a camera that is set for Bayer BG 16 has only 12 bits effective the leader of transmitted frames will indicate Bayer BG 12 as the pixel format 194 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 5 Bayer GB 12 Packed Format When a color camera is set for the Bayer GB 12 Packed pixel dataformat it outputs 12 bits of data per pixel Every three bytes transmitted by the camera contain data for two pixels With the Bayer GB 12 Packed cod
10. 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 1000 1001 1003 10047 1005 1006 in gt Time Fig 16 Example of a Receive Window with Resend Request Threshold amp Resend Request Batching Threshold 1 Front end of the receive window Missing packets are detected here 2 Stream of packets Gray indicates that the status was checked as the packet entered the receive window White indicates that the status has not yet been checked 3 Receive window of the performance driver 4 Threshold for sending resend requests resend request threshold 5 A separate resend request is sent for each packets 997 998 and 999 6 Threshold for batching resend requests for consecutive missing packets resend request batching threshold Only one resend request will be sent for the consecutive missing packets 36 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters Resend Request Threshold This parameter determines the location of the resend request threshold within the receive window as shown in Figure 16 The parameter value is in per cent of the width of the receive window In Figure 16 the resend request threshold is set at 33 33 of the width of the receive window A stream of packets advances packet by packet beyond the resend request threshold i e to the left of the resend request threshold in
11. AW00015119000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification piA640 210gm gc piA1000 48gm gc piA1000 60gm gc Size L x W x H standard housing 90 head housing 86 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 98 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 104 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without front module or connectors 110 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with front module and connectors Weight standard housing 90 head housing 220 g typical 240 g typical Conformity CE FCC RoHS GenlCam GigE Vision IP30 Table 1 General Specifications Basler pilot Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00015119000 Specification piA1600 35gm gc piA1900 32gm gc Sensor Size gm 1608 x 1208 gm 1928 x 1084 H x V pixels gc 1604x1204 gc 1926 x 1082 Sensor Type Kodak KAI 2020M CM Kodak KAI 2093M CM Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 1 Pixel Size 7 4 um x 7 4 um Max Frame Rate 35 fps 32 fps at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit s or Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbit s Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Color Models Mono 8 equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 equivalent to DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Mono
12. AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventTimestamp FrameStart FrameStartEventData FrameStartEventStreamChannellndex FrameStartEventTimestamp Frame Start FrameStartOvertriggerEventData FrameStartOvertriggerEventStreamChannellndex Overtrigger FrameStartOvertriggerEventTimestamp Exposure End ExposureEndEventData ExposureEndEventFramelD ExposureEndEventStreamChannellndex ExposureEndEventTimestamp Event Overrun EventOverrunEventData EventOverrunEventStreamChannellndex EventOverrunEventTimestamp Table 18 Parameter Names of Events and Supplementary Information You can enable event reporting and make the additional settings from within your application software by using the pylon API For more information see the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit For more detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference 310 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 18 Test Images All cameras include the ability to generate test images Test images are used to check the camera s basic functionality and its ability to transmit an image to the host PC Test images can be used for service purposes and for failure diagnostics For test images the image is generated internally by the camera s logic and does not use the optics the imaging sensor or the ADC Six test images are available The Effec
13. Bm 5 Green value for Ph 3 bits 11 4 Bm 4 Blue value for P bits 3 0 Green value for P 3 bits 3 0 Bm 3 Blue value for Ph 2 bits 11 4 Bm 2 Green value for P bits 11 4 Bm 1 Blue value for P bits 3 0 Green value for P bits 3 0 Bm Blue value for Pp bits 11 4 Basler pilot 195 Pixel Data Formats AW00015119000 Odd Lines Byte Data Bo Red value for Pg bits 11 4 B Green value for P bits 3 0 Red value for Pg bits 3 0 Bo Green value for P4 bits 11 4 B3 Red value for P3 bits 11 4 By Green value for P3 bits 3 0 Red value for P3 bits 3 0 Bs Green value for P3 bits 11 4 Be Red value for P4 bits 11 4 B7 Green value for Ps bits 3 0 Red value for P bits 3 0 Bg Green value for Ps bits 11 4 e e e e e e e e e Bm 5 Red value for P 3 bits 11 4 Bm 4 Green value for P _9 bits 3 0 Red value for P 3 bits 3 0 Bm 3 Green value for P 2 bits 11 4 Bm 2 Red value for Ph 1 bits 11 4 Bm 1 Green value for P bits 3 0 Red value for P bits 3 0 Bm Green value for P bits 11 4 When a color camera is set for Bayer GB 12 Packed the pixel data output is 12 bit data of the unsigned type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below
14. Itis not possible to monitor the status of the Acquisition Start command Therefore camera is ready to be triggered for an image acquisition Note the different applicability of the acquisition status feature depending on the image acquisition control mode Standard mode The acquisition status can be determined for the frame start trigger Legacy mode The acquisition status can be determined for the acquisition start trigger To determine the acquisition status of the camera Use the Acquisition Status Selector to select the Frame Trigger Wait status The Frame Trigger Wait parameter also applies when operating the camera in legacy mode where actually the status of the acquisition start trigger is determined Read the value of the AcquisitionStatus parameter Standard mode If the value is set to false the camera is not ready to receive a frame start trigger if the value is set to true the camera is ready to receive a frame start trigger Legacy mode If the value is set to false the camera is not ready to receive an acquisition start trigger if the value is set to true the camera is ready to receive an acquisition start trigger You can set the Acquisition Status Selector and read the AcquisitionStatus parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set and read the parameter values Set the Acquisition Status Selector
15. For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 12 10 1 3 Using an Auto Function To use an auto function carry out the following steps MNOaA PF WON gt Select an Auto Function AOI Assign the auto function you want to use to the selected Auto Function AOI Unassign the auto function you want to use from the other Auto Function AOI Set the position and size of the Auto Function AOI If necessary set the lower and upper limits for the auto functions s parameter value If necessary set the target value Set the GrayValueAdjustmentDampingAbs parameter If necessary set the auto function profile to define priorities between auto functions Enable the auto function by setting it to once or continuous For more information about the individual settings see the next sections that describe the individual auto functions 276 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 10 2 Gain Auto Gain Auto is an auto function and the automatic counterpart of the manual gain feature The gain auto function automatically carries out a Gain Raw All adjustment When the gain auto function is operational the Gain Raw All parameter value is automatically adjusted within set limits until a target average gray value for the pixel data from Auto Function AOI1 is reached Au
16. Perform the required functions to parameterize the frame start trigger to trigger 5 frame starts and to retrieve 5 frames here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to Acquisition Start executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 9 4 5 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode 9 4 5 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to line 1 an externally generated electrical signal injected into physical input line 1 on the camera will act as the acquisition start trigger signal for the camera This type of trigger signal is generally referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExASTrig signal can be used to trigger acquisition start The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on the camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status It cannot react to frame start trigger signals when in this acquisition status When the appropr
17. Set position and size of the auto function AOI Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOIL Camera AutoFunctionAOlOffsetX SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOlOffsetY SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Set exposure time limits for luminance control Camera AutoExposureTimeAbsLowerLimit SetValue 1000 Camera AutoExposureTimeAbsUpperLimit SetValue 1 0E6 Set target value for luminance control This is always expressed by an 8 bit value regardless of the current pixel format i e 0 gt black 255 gt white Camera AutoTargetValue SetValue 128 Set mode of operation for exposure auto function Camera ExposureAuto SetValue ExposureAuto Continuous For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For general information about auto functions see Section 12 10 on page 270 For information about Auto Function AOls and how to set them see Section 12 10 1 2 on page 272 For information about minimum allowed and maximum possible exposure time see Table 10 in Section 9 7 on page 131 280 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 10 4 Gray Value A
18. 86 Basler pilot AW00015119000 1 O Control 8 2 4 3 Setting a Timer Duration Time There are two ways to set the duration time for a timer by setting raw values or by setting an absolute value You can use whichever method you prefer to set the duration time Setting the Duration with Raw Values When the duration time for a timer is set using raw values the duration time will be determined by a combination of two elements The first element is the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter and the second element is the Timer Duration Time Base The duration time is the product of these two elements Duration Time Timer Duration Raw Parameter Value x Timer Duration Time Base By default the Timer Duration Time Base is fixed at 1 us Typically the duration time is adjusted by setting only the Timer Duration Raw parameter value The Timer Duration Raw parameter value can range from 1 to 4095 So if the value is set to 100 for example the timer duration will be 100 x 1 us or 100 us To set the duration for a timer Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Duration Raw parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl Camera TimerD
19. Camera AcquisitionStatusSelector SetValue AcquisitionStatusSelector FrameTriggerWait Read the acquisition status bool IsWaitingForFrameTrigger Camera AcquisitionStatus GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the Acquisition Status Selector For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 9 1 on page 91 292 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 16 Chunk Features This section provides detailed information about the chunk features available on each camera 12 16 1 What Are Chunk Features In most cases enabling a camera feature will simply change the behavior of the camera The Test Image feature is a good example of this type of camera feature When the Test Image feature is enabled the camera outputs a test image rather than a captured image This type of feature is referred to as a standard feature When certain camera features are enabled the camera actually develops some sort of information about each image that it acquires In these cases the information is added to each image as a trailing data chunk when the image is transferred to the host PC Examples of this type of camera feature are the Frame Counter feature and the Time Stamp feature When the Frame Counter feature is enabled for example
20. G Gain20 Gain21 Gain22 B B 170 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Color Creation and Enhancement Where Gain0O Gain01 etc are settable values Each GainXY position can be populated with a floating point value ranging from 8 0 to 7 96875 by using the Color Transformation Value Selector to select one of the GainXY positions in the matrix and using the Color transformation Value parameter to enter a value for that position As an alternative the Gain XY values can each be entered as an integer value on a scale ranging from 256 to 255 This integer range maps linearly to the floating point range with 256 being equivalent to 8 0 32 being equivalent to 1 0 and 255 being equivalent to 7 96875 The integer values can be entered using the Color transformation Value Raw parameter A reference article that explains the basics of color matrix transformation for video data can be found at http www its bldrdoc gov pub ntia rpt 04 406 index php Setting Custom Matrix Values You can set the Color Transformation Value Selector Color Transformation Value and Color Transformation Value Raw parameters from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the values in the matrix Note that the values in this example are just randomly selected numbers and do not represent values that you should actually use Set the light source selector for custom Camera LightS
21. 4 Bm 2 Green value for P 4 bits 11 4 Bm 1 Red value for P bits 3 0 Green value for P bits 3 0 Bm Red value for Ph bits 11 4 When a color camera is set for Bayer BG 12 Packed the pixel data output is 12 bit data of the unsigned type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 e e 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 198 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 7 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 When a color camera is set for the YUV 422 Packed pixel data format each pixel in the captured image goes through a two step conversion process as it exits the sensor and passes through the camera s electronics This process yields Y U and V color information for each pixel In the first step of the process an interpolation algorithm is performed to get full RGB data for each pixel This is required because color cameras use a Bayer filter on the sensor and each individual pixel gathers information for only one color For more information on the Bayer filter see Section 10 1 1 on page 160 The second step of the process is to convert the RGB information to the YUV color model The conversion algorithm uses the following formulas Y 0 30R 0 59G 0 11B U 0 17 R
22. AW00015119000 Features Test Image 4 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient Feature Test 8 bit The basic appearance of test image 4 is similar to test image 2 the 8 bit moving diagonal gray gradient image The difference between test image 4 and test image 2 is this if a camera feature that involves digital processing is enabled test image 4 will show the effects of the feature while test image 2 will not This makes test image 4 useful for checking the effects of digital features such as the luminance lookup table Test Image 5 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient Feature Test 12 bit The basic appearance of test image 5 is similar to test image 3 the 12 bit moving diagonal gray gradient image The difference between test image 5 and test image 3 is this if a camera feature that involves digital processing is enabled test image 5 will show the effects of the feature while test image 3 will not This makes test image 5 useful for checking the effects of digital features such as the luminance lookup table Test Image 6 Moving Diagonal Color Gradient The moving diagonal color gradient test image is available on color cameras only and is designed for use when the camera is set for YUV output As shown in Figure 78 test image six consists of diagonal color gradients The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever you signal the camera to capture a new image To display this test pattern on a monitor you must convert the YUV output from
23. OxFF 255 OxFE 254 e 0x01 1 0x00 0 The interpolation and conversion algorithms are applied to the averaged pixel values when the averaging feature is used For each captured image pixel data is transmitted from the camera in the following sequence 204 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Row g Col o Row 4 Col o Row 9 Col o Row p 2 Col o Row 4 Col o Row Col o Row 9 Col 4 Row 4 Col 4 Row 9 Col 4 Row j 2 Col 4 Row 1 Col 4 Row Col 4 Row g Col 2 Row 4 Col 2 Row 9 Col 2 Row 2 Col 2 Row 4 Col 2 Row Col 2 Row 9 Col m 2 Row 4 Col m 2 Row 9 Col m 2 Row p 2 Col m2 Row 4 Col m2 Row p Col m2 Where Row Col g is the upper left corner of the sensor Pixel Data Formats Row g Col m 1 Row 4 Col m 1 Row 9 Col m 1 Row p 2 Col m4 Row 4 Col m1 Row p Col m_ 1 Row 9 Col m Row 4 Col m Row 9 Col m Row p 2 Col m Row y 4 Col m Row p Col m The columns are numbered 0 through m from the left side to the right side of the sensor The rows are numbered 0 through n from the top to the bottom of the sensor Basler pilot The sequence assumes that the camera is set for full resolution 205 Pixel Data Formats AW00015119000 206 Basler pilot 12 Features This chapter provides detailed information about the standard features available on each camera It also includes an explanation of their operati
24. This buffering technique avoids the need to exactly synchronize the clock used for sensor readout with the data transmission over your Ethernet network The camera will begin transmitting data when it has determined that it can safely do so without over running or under running the buffer This buffering technique is also an important element in achieving the highest possible frame rate with the best image quality The exposure start delay is the amount of time between the point where the trigger signal transitions and the point where exposure actually begins The frame readout time is the amount of time it takes to read out the data for an acquired image from the sensor into the image buffer The frame transmission time is the amount of time it takes to transmit the acquired image from the buffer in the camera to the host PC via the network The transmission start delay is the amount of time between the point where the camera begins reading out the acquired image data from the sensor to the point where it begins transmitting the data for the acquired image from the buffer to the host PC Note that if the averaging feature is used the concept of the transmission start delay as described above does not apply In this case the acquired images are not transmitted individually but will be used for creating an averaged image which is transmitted The exposure start delay varies from camera model to camera model The table below shows the expos
25. e e e Bm 7 Low byte of green value for P 3 Bm 7 Low byte of red value for P 3 Bm 6 High byte of green value for Ph 3 Bm 6 High byte of red value for Ph 3 Basler pilot 191 Pixel Data Formats AW00015119000 Bm 5 Low byte of blue value for P 2 Bm 5 Low byte of green value for P 2 Bm 4 High byte of blue value for Ph 2 Bm 4 High byte of green value for P 2 Bm 3 Low byte of green value for P Bm 3 Low byte of red value for Ph 1 Bm 2 High byte of green value for P Bm 2 High byte of red value for P _ Bm 1 Low byte of blue value for Ph Bm 1 Low byte of green value for P Bm High byte of blue value for Ph Bm High byte of green value for Ph When the camera is set for Bayer GB 16 the pixel data output is 16 bit data of the unsigned short little endian type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below Note that for 16 bit data you might expect a value range from 0x0000 to OxFFFF However with the camera set for Bayer GB 16 only 12 bits of the 16 bits transmitted are effective Therefore the highest data value you will see is OxOFFF indicating a signal level of 4095 This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 e 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 When a camera that is set f
26. e e e e e Bm 5 Green value for Ph 5 Bm 5 Red value for Ph 5 Bm 4 Blue value for P 4 Bm 4 Green value for Ph 4 Basler pilot 187 Pixel Data Formats Red value for Ph 3 Green value for P _9 Red value for Ph 1 Bm 3 Green value for P 3 Bm 3 Bm 2 Blue value for P 2 Bm 2 Bm 1 Green value for P Bm 1 Bm Blue value for Ph Bm Green value for Ph AW00015119000 With the camera set for Bayer GB 8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Hexadecimal Indicates This Signal Level Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 0x01 1 0x00 0 188 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 2 Bayer BG 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 8 pixel data format it outputs 8 bits of data per pixel and the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens you get 8 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens you get 8 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens you get 8 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The BG in the name Bayer BG 8 refers to the alignment of the col
27. 13 Troubleshooting and Support This chapter outlines the resources available to you if you need help working with your camera 13 1 Technical Support Resources If you need advice about your camera or if you need assistance troubleshooting a problem with your camera you can contact the Basler technical support team for your area Basler technical support contact information is located in the front pages of this manual You will also find helpful information such as frequently asked questions downloads and application notes in the Downloads and the Support sections of our website www baslerweb com If you do decide to contact Basler technical support please take a look at the form that appears on the last two pages of this section before you call Filling out this form will help make sure that you have all of the information the Basler technical support team needs to help you with your problem Whenever you want to return material to Basler you must request a Return Material Authorization RMA number before sending it back The RMA number must be stated in your delivery documents when you ship your material to us Please be aware that if you return material without an RMA number we reserve the right to reject the material You can find detailed information about how to obtain an RMA number in the Support section of our website www baslerweb com Basler pilot 323 Troubleshooting and Support AW00015119000 13 2 Before Contacting Bas
28. 272 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Relative Positioning of an Auto Function AOI The size and position of an Auto Function AOI can be but need not be identical to the size and position of the Image AOI Note that the overlap between Auto Function AOI and Image AOI determines whether and to what extent the auto function will control the related image property Only the pixel data from the areas of overlap will be used by the auto function to control the image property of the entire image Different degrees of overlap are illustrated in Figure 72 The hatched areas in the figure indicate areas of overlap If the Auto Function AOI is completely included in the Image AOI see a in Figure 72 the pixel data from the Auto Function AOI will be used to control the image property If the Image AOI is completely included in the Auto Function AOI see b in Figure 72 only the pixel data from the Image AOI will be used to control the image property If the Image AOI only partially overlaps the Auto Function AOI see c in Figure 72 only the pixel data from the area of partial overlap will be used to control the image property If the Auto Function AOI does not overlap the Image AOI see d in Figure 72 the Auto Function will not or only to a limited degree control the image property For details see the sections below describing the individual auto functions Image AOI or depending on your needs choosing identical positions
29. Bayer GBB araia ano i 187 Basler pilot AW00015119000 mono 12 packed 184 mono To orrea N 182 MONO Oa a aa 181 203 YUV 422 YUYV packed 201 YUV 422 packed cccccceceeeereees 199 DIKE SIZE a a cletannencs 2 4 6 pixel transmission sequence 204 PLC power and I O cable 67 69 voltage requirements 70 72 PFECAUTONS hesassa aa 25 protection class neeeee ereere 14 17 PYON AP oeiee esa en eaae aian 32 pylon VIeWwer ssesssesssserreesssesrrerrrerrrens 31 R read timeout parameter cece 43 receive descriptors c cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 53 receive WINKOW ccceececceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 35 receive window size parameter 36 reduced resolution eceeeeeeeeeeeees 259 resend request batching parameter 37 resend request response timeout parameter eee eee aa na a eraai 39 resend request threshold parameter 37 resend timeout parameter c ceeee 39 response to light seeeeeeeeeeeeeees 259 restart ASYNCHIONOUG 0eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 SYNCHRONOUS eeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 resulting frame rate parameter 50 return material authorization 323 reverse X explained ee eeeeeeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 261 RMA NUMDE cece r a ain a 323 S saturation no a aT 173 saturation adjustment 174 saving
30. Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 1 for sequence set 3 this sequence set is only used once and therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 4 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 1 for sequence set 4 this sequence set is only used once and therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 5 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 2 for sequence set 5 this sequence set is used a second time The parameter values of sequence set 5 are used for the image acquisition The camera has cycled once through the complete sequence set cycle When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 2 for sequence set 5 this sequence set can not after two uses be used again in the current sequence set cycle Therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition Another sequence set cycle has started The
31. Enabling the acquisition frame rate parameter allows the camera to control the frame vate internally Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue true Basler pilot 121 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Camera AcquisitionFrameRateAbs SetValue 60 0 Start frame capture Camera AcquisitionStart Execute For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 9 6 2 Using a Software Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 9 6 2 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to begin each frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status frame exposure will start when the software acquisition start trigger signal is received by the camera Figure 33 illustrates frame acquisition with a software acquisition start trigger signal When the came
32. If the timer times out at any time before the last packet is received the buffer for the frame will be released and will be indicated as an unsuccessful grab You can set the filer driver parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read and write the parameter values Enable Resend Camera_t StreamGrabber t StreamGrabber Camera GetStreamGrabber 0 StreamGrabber EnableResend SetValue false disable resends Packet Timeout FrameRetention Camera_t StreamGrabber t StreamGrabber Camera GetStreamGrabber 0 StreamGrabber PacketTimeout SetValue 40 StreamGrabber FrameRetention SetValue 200 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 34 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters 4 2 The Basler Performance Driver The Basler performance driver is a hardware specific GigE Vision network driver compatible with network adapters that use specific Intel chipsets The main advantage of the performance driver is that it significantly lowers the CPU load needed to service the network traffic between the PC and the camera s It also has a more robust packet res
33. LineSource SetValue LineSource ExposureActive You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 8 2 1 on page 81 For more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera s output lines see Section 7 7 2 on page 75 9 10 2 Acquisition Status Indicator When controlling image acquisition with a software trigger you can use the acquisition status feature to determine when the camera is ready to be triggered for an image acquisition For more information about the acquisition status feature see Section 12 15 on page 292 9 10 3 Trigger Ready Signal As described in the previous section the cameras can operate in an overlapped acquisition fashion When the camera is operated in this manner it is especially important that the exposure time of a new image acquisition not start until exposure of the previously acquired image is complete and the exposure time of a new image acquisition not end until readout of the previously acquired image is complete The camera supplies a Trigger Ready TrigRdy output signal you can use to ensure that these conditions are met when you are using a hardware trigger signal to trigger image acquisition The trigger ready signal relates to different trigger signals depending on the image acquisition control mode In stan
34. To avoid EMI the cables must be shielded Use of category 6 or category 7 cables with S STP shielding is strongly recommended As a general rule applications with longer cables or applications in harsh EMI conditions require higher category cables Either a straight through patch or a cross over Ethernet cable can be used to connect the camera directly to a GigE network adapter in a PC or to a GigE network switch Close proximity to strong magnetic fields should be avoided 7 4 2 Standard Power and I O Cable connected to a PLC device If the camera is connected to a PLC device we recommend using a PLC power and I O cable rather than the standard power and I O cable You can use a PLC power and I O cable when the camera is not connected to a PLC device if power for the I O input is supplied with 24 VDC See the following section for more information on PLC power and I O cables The standard power and I O cable is intended for use if the camera is not A single cable is used to connect power to the camera and to connect to the camera s I O lines as shown in Figure 24 The end of the standard power and I O cable that connects to the camera must be terminated with a Hirose micro plug part number HR10A 10P 12S or the equivalent The cable must be wired to conform with the pin assignments shown in the pin assignment tables The maximum length of the standard power and I O cable is at least 10 meters The cable must
35. User Set3 The active set contains the camera s current parameter settings and thus determines the camera s performance that is what your image currently looks ase like When you change parameter settings using the pylon API or direct register access you are making changes to the active set The active set is located in 1 the camera s volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off Standard Factory Setup ee High Gain The Default Set _ Factory Setup Auto Functions When a camera is manufactured numerous tests are _ Factory Setup performed on the camera and four factory optimized Color a i Factory Setup setups are determined The four factory optimized Se eee setups are Fig 79 Configuration Sets The Standard Factory Setup is optimized for average conditions and will provide good camera performance in many common applications In the standard factory setup the gain is set to a low value and all auto functions are set to off The High Gain Factory Setup is similar to the standard factory setup but the gain is set to 6 cB The Auto Functions Factory Setup is similar to the standard factory setup but the Gain Auto and the Exposure Auto auto functions are both enabled and are set to the continuous mode of operation During automatic parameter adjustment gain will be kept to a minimum The Color Factory Setup is optimized to yield the best color fidel
36. Vert Vert Vert Vert Vert Vert Vert Vert Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Shift Pixels Reg Reg Reg Reg Reg Reg Reg Reg Line l Line s Line si si n a EA pm i E f oo o a e i a i i F al ake e ee aH oe a F si aa i 2 i a i ee i Line i si Line i Line a i ee ee et P Left Horizontal Shift Register Right Horizontal Shift Register gt gt f ADC Fig 20 CCD Sensor Architecture 60 gt H Oo Basler pilot AW00015119000 24 MB Image Buffer ExpActive TrigRdy Ethernet Sensor Controller 4 gt Image Data and Control Data Control Micro Controller Control Data Control AOI Gain Black Level Fig 21 Camera Block Diagram Basler pilot Camera Functional Description Ethernet Network 61 Camera Functional Description AW00015119000 62 Basler pilot 7 Physical Interface This chapter provides detailed information such as pinouts and voltage requirements for the physical interface on the camera This information will be especially useful during your initial design in process 7 1 General Description of the Connections The camera is interfaced to external circuity via connectors located on the back of the housing An 8 pin RJ 45 jack used to provide a 100 1000 Mbit s Ethernet connection to the camera This jack includes a green LED and a ye
37. also set the Trigger Source parameter The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger to on and the Trigger Source to input line 1 Select the frame start trigger m Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger m Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode to continuous the Trigger Mode to off and the Acquisition Frame Rate to 60 Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the frame start trigger it Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Set th xposure tim Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Enable the acquisition frame rate parameter and set the frame rat Enabling the acquisition frame rate parameter allows the camera to control the frame vate internally Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue true Camera AcquisitionFrameRateAbs SetValue 60 0 Start frame capture Camera AcquisitionStart Execute You can also use
38. bandwidth reserve accumulation paramole sutetscszssagesteeihtstindutuladeieieents ett 47 bandwidth reserve parameter 46 bandwidth managing 52 Bayer BG 12 packed pixel format 197 Bayer BG 16 pixel format 25 193 Bayer BG 8 pixel format 6 189 Bayer filte irinse ot areren 159 Bayer GB 12 packed pixel format 195 Bayer GB 16 pixel format 0 0 191 Bayer GB 8 pixel format 8 187 DINNING eet eiae cere ai dave ceen 257 AOI settings cececeeeeeeeeeteeeees 259 image distortion cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 259 reduced resolution cceeeeeeeeeee 259 response to light aeee 259 SOtUNG 25253 Scns Hind ae 258 bit depth icki ae ea 2 4 6 black level explained esse ceeeeeeseseeeneeeeeeeeeees 211 SOtUNG i ciehs hae e an a eaea 211 black level raw all 211 black level raw tap 1 neccen 211 black level raw tap 2 cecce 211 block diagram cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaes 61 C cables Ethernet cccccscccceceseeceeeeeeeeeeees 67 power and I O PLC 006 67 69 335 Index power and I O standard 00 67 camera description file eeee 29 camera feature Set ccceeeeeeeees 321 camera power requirements 2 4 6 70 chunk dynamic range max parameter 295 chunk dynamic range min parameter 295 chunk enable parameter EEE T 296 299 300
39. channel Increasing the inter packet delay will decrease the camera s effective data transmission rate and will thus decrease the network bandwidth used by the camera In the current camera implementation one tick 8 ns To check the tick frequency you can read the Gev Timestamp Tick Frequency parameter value This value indicates the number of clock ticks per second When setting the time interval for the inter packet delay make sure that the time interval for the packet timeout is set to a higher value Frame Transmission Delay read write Sets a delay in ticks one tick 8 ns between when a camera would normally begin transmitting an acquired frame and when it actually begins transmission This parameter should be set to zero in most normal situations If you have many cameras in your network and you will be simultaneously triggering image acquisition on all of them you may find that your network switch or network adapter is overwhelmed if all of the cameras simultaneously begin to transmit image data at once The frame transmission delay parameter can be used to stagger the start of image data transmission from each camera Bandwidth Assigned read only Indicates the bandwidth in bytes per second that will be used by the camera to transmit image and chunk feature data and to handle resends and control data transmissions The value of this parameter is a result of the packet size and the inter packet delay parameter settings
40. executed 9 4 4 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software acquisition start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and to execute the commands related to software acquisition start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Basler pilot 103 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Set the acquisition frame count Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a trigger software command to apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera Camera TriggerSoftware Execute
41. it is helpful to refer to Figure 32 on page 95 and to the use case diagrams in Section 9 8 on page 134 These diagrams present the material related to the acquisition start and stop commands the acquisition mode the acquisition start trigger and the frame start trigger in a graphical format Basler pilot 93 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Acquisition Start and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode The Acquisition Start command prepares the camera to acquire frames The camera cannot acquire frames unless an Acquisition Start command has first been executed A parameter called the Acquisition Mode has a direct bearing on how the Acquisition Start command operates If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to single frame you can only acquire one frame after executing an Acquisition Start command When one frame has been acquired the Acquisition Start command will expire Before attempting to acquire another frame you must execute a new Acquisition Start command If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame an Acquisition Start command does not expire after a single frame is captured Once an Acquisition Start command has been executed you can acquire as many frames as you like The Acquisition Start command will remain in effect until you execute an Acquisition Stop command Once an Acquisition Stop command has been executed the camera will not be able to acquire frames until a new Acquisition Start comman
42. software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Enable the inverter on line 1 Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Linel Camera LineInverter SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 80 Basler pilot AW00015119000 I O Control 8 2 Configuring Output Lines 8 2 1 Assigning a Camera Output Signal to a Physical Output Line You can use the camera s output signal assignment capability to assign one of the camera s standard output signals as the source signal for a physical output line The camera has a variety of standard output signals available including Acquisition Trigger Wait only available when the image acquisition control is set to standard mode Trigger Ready Exposure Active Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4 You can also designate an output line as user settable If an output line is designated as user settable you can use the camera s API to set the state of the line as desired To assign an output signal to an output line or to designate the line as user settable Use the Line Selector to select Output Line 1 Output Line 2 Output Line 3 or Output Line 4 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to one of the available o
43. waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 93 and Section 9 4 on page 99 By default input line 1 is selected as the source signal for the frame start trigger Exposure Time Control with the Frame Start Trigger On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s exposure time parameters 108 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to one of the input lines the exposure time for each frame acquisition can be controlled with the exposure time parameters or it can be controlled by manipulating the hardware trigger signal For more information about controlling exposure time when using a software trigger see Section 9 4 4 on page 103 For more information about controlling exposure time when using a hardware trigger see Section 9 4 5 on page 104 For more information about exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 131 9 5 1 3 Setting the Frame Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters You can set the Trigger Mode and related parameter values for the frame start trigger from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API If your settings make it necessary you can
44. 0 33G 0 50 B V 0 50R 0 41G 0 09B Once the conversion to a YUV color model is complete the pixel data is transmitted to the host PC transfers U values and V values with unsigned integers 128 is added to each U value and to each V value before the values are transferred from the camera This process allows the values to be transferred on a scale that ranges from 0 to 255 The values for U and for V normally range from 128 to 127 Because the camera The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed output The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bo the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo U value for Po B4 Y value for Po B2 V Value for Po B3 Y value for P4 Basler pilot 199 Pixel Data Formats B4 U value for P2 Bs Y value for Pz Be V Value for P2 B7 Y value for P3 Bg U value for P4 Bo Y value for P4 Bio V Value for P4 B114 Y value for P5 e e e e Bm 7 U value for P _3 Bm 6 Y value for P 3 Bm 5 V Value for Ph 3 Bm 4 Y value for Ph 2 Bm 3 U value for Ph 1 Bm 2 Y value for Ph 1 Bm 1 V Value for Ph 14 Bm Y value for Ph AW00015119000 When the camera
45. 1 not set for invert with two synchronous restarts controlled by input line 2 Setting Sequence Set Total Number 6 Line 2 not set for invert is selected as the source for controlling restart camera is waiting for a frame start trigger v camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set 0 current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated E frame exposure and readout 5 frame transmission Sequencer Enabled Signal Applied to Input Line 2 Restart Signal Applied to Input Line 1 Advance Sequence Set Cycle Starts Again z Sequence Set Cycle Starts Again zz Frame Start Trigger Signal v M v v v v 2 o 1 2 10 a v Oo v h h Time Fig 62 Sequencer in Controlled Sequence Advance Mode with Line 1 as the Sequence Control Source and Syn chronous Restart Controlled by Line 2 12 5 2 3 Operation with the Disabled Sequence Control Source Operating the Sequencer Basler pilot 243 Features AW00015119000 When the Disabled sequence control source is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next proceeds in ascending sequence set index numbers and is only possible by asynchronous advance Similarly sequence set restart is only possible by asynchronous restart command and it becoming effective will depend on the specific installation and the current
46. 25 and a transistor to Figure 26 in Section 7 7 on page 72 Replaced max input voltage by voltage range in Figure 25 in sect 7 7 1 2 Removed abs max voltages from Section 1 2 on page 2 Section 1 9 on page 25 Section 7 5 on page 70 and Section 7 7 on page 72 Corrected tory to toff10 On page 78 Inserted note in Section 9 5 3 2 on page 113 that ExFSTrig signal must be gt to than the exposure time Change the Exposure Time Raw parameter value range 1 4095 to 1 to 10000000 in Section 9 7 1 on page 132 Updated Section 9 7 2 on page 133 Added the Camera Events Section 9 10 5 on page 150 Updated the balance ratio value in Section 10 3 1 on page 164 Updated the gamma correction value range 0 to 3 99998 in Section 10 3 2 on page 166 Updated Section 10 3 5 on page 177 loading of Color factory setup Light Source Selector to On Updated Black Level Section 12 2 on page 211 Updated the Balance White Auto Section 12 10 6 on page 283 Added Section 12 13 on page 288 describing the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature Modified and extended the description of the sequencer feature in Section 12 5 on page 222 Removed sentence Some auto functions use their own individual Auto Function AOI and some auto functions share a single Auto Function AOI in Section 12 10 1 on page 270 Updated Section 12 10 1 3 on page 276 inserted step concerning GrayValueAdjustmentDampingAbs parameter Added Section Gray Value Adju
47. 303 305 307 chunk frame counter parameter 296 chunk height parameter aaeeea 295 chunk line status all parameter 303 CHUNK Modes a aee cbentedeteesetesebeeeeastianel 294 chunk mode active parameter 294 chunk offset x parameter 0 0068 295 chunk offset y parameter 0 008 295 chunk parser sefedli hates 295 296 299 300 303 305 307 chunk pixel format parameter 295 chunk selector 296 299 300 303 305 chunk sequence set index parameter 307 chunk time stamp parameter 299 chunk trigger input counter parameter 300 chunk width parameter 295 cleaning the camera and sensor 26 code snippets programming language 08 26 PIFOPEF US Eliisi ti aain a 26 color adjustment 172 color adjustment enable parameter 175 color adjustment hue parameter 175 color adjustment saturation parameter 175 Color cube sesdinctis csevieievicnseisecidinweseeesses 172 color enhancement setting procedure 177 color factory Setup 316 318 color filter ee 159 color hexagon n sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerna 172 COlOr MIXING iessen adiis 172 color transformation mode parameter 169 configuration set loaded at startup 320 configuration Sets 316 320 COnformity oo ceeccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 3 5 7 CONNECHOr tYPOS ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 66 CONNECIOMNS snc Aten AAAs
48. 600 700 800 900 1000 Wave Length nm Fig 9 piA1900 32gc Spectral Response 1 0 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 Relative Response 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 10 piA2400 17gc Spectral Response Basler pilot Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW000151 19000 1 5 Mechanical Specifications 1 5 1 Standard Housing The camera housing conforms to protection class IP30 assuming that the lens mount is covered by a lens or by the cap that is shipped with the camera 1 5 1 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points The cameras are manufactured with high precision Planar parallel and angular sides guarantee precise mounting with high repeatability The camera s dimensions in millimeters are as shown in the drawings below Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the top and four mounting holes on the bottom as shown in the drawings 14 Basler pilot AW00015119000 2 x M3 4 5 deep Specifications Requirements and Precautions 2 x M3 4 deep 2x M2 4 5 deep D UL _ Bottom Side A es N 9 7 80 2 6 45 Lee O ZEO
49. 63 continuous acquisition mode 0 97 controlled sequence set advance MOE eee cece cece cece ee eeeteeteeeeetees 233 CPU interrupts cccceceeeeeeseeeeeeetees 53 CRC checksum chunk ceeeeeee 305 current Sobari Sada itis 223 336 AW00015119000 D damping gray value adjustment 281 debouncer and exposure start delay 152 explained eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee aes 286 Setting searen 287 288 default configuration set 06 316 device current throughput parameter 50 device firmware version parameter 314 device ID parameter ccececeeeeeeees 314 device manufacturer info parameter 314 device max throughput parameter 49 device model name parameter 314 device scan type parameter 314 device user ID parameter 08 314 device vendor name parameter 314 device version parameter 06 314 digital Shift eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 213 CIMENSIONS eecceeeeeeee ee ees 3 5 7 14 17 disable parameter limits explained ica rn erernu ieee pattiin 285 drivers NEtWOFK ccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 33 dustane a aia a Sesh sadeledan teers 25 E electromagnetic interference 23 electrostatic discharge 23 EMI saci hones 23 enable resend parameter 34 36 environmental requi
50. 8 2 3 Setting an Output Line for Invert 0 0000 c eee eee 83 8 2 4 Working with Timers 000 ccc tee 84 8 2 4 1 Setting the Trigger Source fora Timer 84 8 2 4 2 Setting a Timer Delay Time 000 0c 85 8 2 4 3 Setting a Timer Duration Time 0 2 0000 87 8 3 Checking the State of the I O Lines 0 0000 89 8 3 1 Checking the State of a Single Output Line 89 8 3 2 Checking the State of All Lines 0 000002 cece 89 9 Image Acquisition Control 0 000 ee 91 9 1 Image Acquisition Control Modes Legacy and Standard 91 9 2 Means for Controlling Image Acquisition in Standard Mode 93 9 3 Acquisition Start and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode Legacy and Standard Mode 0 ccc eee eee eee 97 9 4 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Standard Mode 000000e eee eee 99 ii Basler pilot AW00015119000 Table of Contents 9 4 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode 0005 100 9 4 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off 100 9 4 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On 2005 100 9 4 2 Acquisition Frame Count Standard Mode 0 0000 ce eee 101 9 4 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters Standard Mode sses cece he sdbadaed wae bene be ven Pes loes
51. Bm Red value for Ph Basler pilot 189 Pixel Data Formats AW00015119000 With the camera set for Bayer BG 8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Hexadecimal Indicates This Signal Level Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 0x01 1 0x00 0 190 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 3 Bayer GB 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 When a color camera is set for the Bayer GB 16 pixel data format it outputs 16 bits of data per pixel with 12 bits effective The 12 bits of effective pixel data fill from the least significant bit The four unused most significant bits are filled with zeros With the Bayer GB 16 the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens you get 12 effective bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens you get 12 effective bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens you get 12 effective bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The GB in the name Bayer GB 16 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images For even lines in the images pixel zero will be green pixel one will be blu
52. CameraFeatureSet parameter value at the Basic factory setting This will make If you will only use the smaller feature set we recommend to leave the the camera features sooner available after camera restart or camera reset Basler pilot 321 Features AW00015119000 To activate a camera description file 1 Select the camera description file by setting the CameraFeatureSet parameter value to either Full or Basic as desired 2 Restart the camera by switching camera power off and on again The feature set relating to the selected camera description file is available after some period Setting the Parameter Value You can select a camera description file by setting the CameraFeatureSet parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value in the example the camera description file providing the complete feature set is chosen Select the camera description file providing all camera features CEnumerationPtr ptrFeatureSet Camera GetNodeMap GetNode FeatureSet ptrFeatureSet gt FromString Full For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameter For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 322 Basler pilot
53. Cameras Share a Single Network Path If you are using a single camera on a GigE network the problem of managing bandwidth is simple The network can easily handle the bandwidth needs of a single camera and no intervention is required A more complicated situation arises if you have multiple cameras connected to a single network adapter as shown in Figure 19 1 Port GigE Adapter Single Path GigE Network Switch Fig 19 Multiple Cameras on a Network One way to manage the situation where multiple cameras are sharing a single network path is to make sure that only one of the cameras is acquiring and transmitting images at any given time The data output from a single camera is well within the bandwidth capacity of the single path and you should have no problem with bandwidth in this case If you want to acquire and transmit images from several cameras simultaneously however you must determine the total data output rate for all the cameras that will be operating simultaneously and you must make sure that this total does not exceed the bandwidth of the single path 125 MByte s An easy way to make a quick check of the total data output from the cameras that will operate simultaneously is to read the value of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter for each camera This parameter indicates the camera s gross data output rate in bytes per second with its current settings If the sum of the bandwidth assigned values is less than 125 MByte s
54. Fig 51 Exposure Start Controlled with an ExTrig Signal You can calculate the frame readout time by using this formula Frame Readout Time AOI Height 1 x C4 us Co us Where the values for the constants C4 and C are from the table in Section 9 12 on page 154 and AOI height is the height of the acquired frames as determined by the AOI settings 152 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control For more information about the AOI height see Section 12 4 on page 219 For more information about the averaging feature see Section 12 8 on page 264 You can calculate an approximate frame transmission time by using this formula fas Payload Size Parameter Value Frame Transmission Time 2a vize t arameter vate ___ ve Device Current Throughput Parameter Value Note that this is an approximate frame transmission time Due to the nature of the Ethernet network the transmission time could vary Also note that the frame transmission cannot be less than the frame readout time So if the frame transmission time formula returns a value that is less than the readout time the approximate frame transmission time will be equal to the readout time Due to the nature of the Ethernet network the transmission start delay can vary from frame to frame The transmission start delay however is of very low significance when compared to the transmission time For more information about the Payload Size and Device Current Through
55. Figure 16 As soon as the position where a packet is missing advances beyond the resend request threshold a resend request is sent for the missing packet In the example shown in Figure 16 packets 987 to 1005 are within the receive window and packets 997 to 999 and 1002 were detected as missing In the situation shown a resend request is sent to the camera for each of the missing consecutive packets 997 to 999 The resend requests are sent after packet 996 the last packet of the intact sequence of packets has advanced beyond the resend request threshold and before packet 1000 the next packet in the stream of packets can advance beyond the resend request threshold Similarly a resend request will be sent for missing packet 1002 after packet 1001 has advanced beyond the resend request threshold and before packet 1003 can advance beyond the resend request threshold Resend Request Batching This parameter determines the location of the resend request batching threshold in the receive window Figure 16 The parameter value is in per cent of a span that starts with the resend request threshold and ends with the front end of the receive window The maximum allowed parameter value is 100 In Figure 16 the resend request batching threshold is set at 80 of the span The resend request batching threshold relates to consecutive missing packets i e to a continuous sequence of missing packets Resend request batching allows grouping of consecutive
56. In essence the bandwidth assigned is calculated this way X Packets Y Bytes Frame Packet xX Packets Y Byles 8 ns 1T X Packets 1 non a0 pl Arac ES Frame Packet Byte Frame 1 x IPD x 8 ns Bandwidth Assigned Where X number of packets needed to transmit the frame Y number of bytes in each packet IPD Inter packet Delay setting in ticks with a tick set to the 8 ns standard When considering this formula you should know that on a Gigabit network it takes one tick to transmit one byte Also be aware that the formula has been simplified for easier understanding Bandwidth Reserve read write Used to reserve a portion of the assigned bandwidth for packet resends and for the transmission of control data between the camera and the host PC The setting is expressed as a percentage of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter For example if the Bandwidth Assigned parameter indicates that 46 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth 30 MByte s have been assigned to the camera and the Bandwidth Reserve parameter is set to 5 then the bandwidth reserve will be 1 5 MByte s Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation read write A software device called the bandwidth reserve accumulator is designed to handle unusual situations such as a sudden EMI burst that interrupts an image transmission If this happens a larger than normal number of packet resends may be needed to properly transmit
57. Linel Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Basler pilot 97 Image Acquisi Camera l tion Control AW00015119000 ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Camera AcquisitionStart Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame the maximum possible acquisition frame rate for a given AOI cannot be achieved This is true because the camera performs a complete internal setup cycle for each single frame and because it cannot be operated with overlapped exposure To achieve the maximum possible acquisition frame rate set the camera for the continuous acquisition mode and use overlapped exposure For more information about overlapped exposure see Section 9 9 on page 143 98 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 4 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Standard Mode This section only applies if the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not
58. Load command Load command is associated with a delay between sending the software command and it becoming effective The delay will depend on the specific installation and the current load on the network Accordingly the number of image acquisitions that may occur between sending the command and it becoming effective can not be predicted The Sequence Set Load command is therefore not suitable for real time applications it may however be useful for testing purposes Replacing the sequence parameter values in the active set via the Sequence Set 226 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features The following code snippet illustrates using the API to load the sequence parameter values from sequence set 0 into the active set Select sequence set with index number 0 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 0 Load the sequence parameter values from the sequence set into the active set Camera SequenceSetLoad Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Use Case Diagrams Illustrating Sequencer Operation The sections below explain the sequence advance modes in detail Use case descriptions and diagrams are designed to illustrate how the sequence advance modes work in some common situations and with some common combinations of parameter settings These use cases do not represent every possible combination of the parameters associated with sequence advance mode
59. Read the value of the Chunk Pixel Format parameter Read the value of the Chunk Dynamic Range Min Read the value of the Chunk Dynamic Range Max The following code snippet illustrates using the pylon API to run the parser and retrieve the extended image data retrieve date from th xtended image data chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64 t offsetX Camera ChunkOffsetX GetValue int64 t offsetY Camera ChunkOffsetY GetValue int64 t width Camera ChunkWidth GetValue int64 t height Camera ChunkHeight GetValue int64 _ Gb Gk Seb ach dynamicRangeMin Camera ChunkDynamicRangeMin GetValue int64 t dynamicRangeMax Camera ChunkDynamicRangeMax GetValue ChunkPixelFormatEnums pixelFormat Camera ChunkPixelFormat GetValue For more information about using the chunk parser see the sample code that is included with the Basler pylon Software Development Kit SDK Basler pilot 295 Features AW00015119000 12 16 3 Frame Counter The Frame Counter feature numbers frames sequentially as they are acquired When the feature is enabled a chunk is added to each frame containing the value of the counter The frame counter is a 32 bit value The counter starts at 0 and increments by 1 for each acquired fram
60. SetValue PixelFormat_BayerBG8 II Because the camera is set for a Bayer output format the Processed Raw Enabled parameter must be set to enabled Camera ProcessedRawEnable SetValue true Basler pilot 175 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00015119000 Enable the Color Adjustment feature Camera ColorAdjustmentEnable SetValue true II Select red as the color to adjust Camera ColorAdjustmentSelector SetValue ColorAdjustmentSelector_Red II Set the red hue as a floating point value Camera ColorAdjustmentHue SetValue 1 125 II Set the red saturation as a floating point value Camera ColorAdjustmentSaturation SetValue 1 375 II Select cyan as the color to adjust Camera ColorAdjustmentSelector SetValue ColorAdjustmentSelector_Cyan II Set the cyan hue as an integer value Camera ColorAdjustmentHueRaw SetValue 36 II Set the cyan saturation as an integer value Camera ColorAdjustmentSaturationRaw SetValue 176 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 31 Color Adjustment Reset The camera includes a Color Adjustment Reset command that can be used to reset the color adjustments This feature is especially useful if you have badly misadjusted the colors and you want to quickly return to reasonable settings When the reset command is used it will return the camera to the settings
61. Setting a Timer Delay Time There are two ways to set the delay time for a timer by setting raw values or by setting an absolute value You can use whichever method you prefer to set the delay time Setting the Delay with Raw Values When the delay time for a timer is set using raw values the delay time will be determined by a combination of two elements The first element is the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter and the second element is the Timer Delay Time Base The delay time is the product of these two elements Delay Time Timer Delay Raw Parameter Value x Timer Delay Time Base By default the Timer Delay Time Base is fixed at 1 us Typically the delay time is adjusted by setting the Timer Delay Raw parameter value The Timer Delay Raw parameter value can range from 0 to 4095 So if the value is set to 100 for example the timer delay will be 100 x 1 us or 100 us To set the delay for a timer Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Delay Raw parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl Camera TimerDelayRaw SetValue 100 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guid
62. Use Case Diagrams 00 000 134 9 9 Overlapping Exposure and Sensor Readout 000 c eee eee 143 9 9 1 Guidelines for Overlapped Operation 000 0 eee eee ee 144 9 10 Acquisition Monitoring Tools 0 0600 eee 145 9 10 1 Exposure Active Signal aaae eee 145 9 10 2 Acquisition Status Indicator 00 000 146 9 10 3 Trigger Ready Signal 00000 eee 146 9 10 4 Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal Standard Mode Only 148 9 10 5 Camera Events 0 00000 a a E EE aB ia EOE Ea a 150 9 11 Acquisition Timing Chart nasasa aaea eaea 151 9 12 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate uauaa auauna 154 10 Color Creation and Enhancement 0 000 e cece eee 159 10 1 Color Creationist 909 4284 8k we oe eee re Lda de ea the ae wehbe wee eed 159 10 1 1 Bayer Color Filter Alignment 2 00000 eee eee 160 10 1 2 Pixel Data Formats Available on Cameras with a Bayer Filter 161 10 2 Integrated IR Cut Filter All Color Models 02000 eee ee eee 163 10 3 Color Enhancement Features 0 000 eee 164 10 3 1 White Balance 20 0002 cee 164 10 3 2 Gamma Correction 00 0 000 c eee 166 10 3 3 Matrix Color Transformation 0000 cece eee 168 10 3 3 1 The Custom Light Source Setting 2 0 170 10 3 4 Color Adjustment 40 0 0 6 drei weed aes pe Eh Veo
63. above formula is replaced by the related acquisition frame rate For the related formula when the averaging feature is used see Section 12 8 on page 264 Basler pilot 157 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Example Assume that you are using a piA640 210gm camera set for an exposure time of 2000 us and for 600 x 400 resolution Also assume that you have checked the value of the Device Current Throughput parameter the Payload Size parameters and found them to be 110000000 and 240000 respectively and the averaging feature is not used Formula 1 1 Max F 400 1 x 8 76 us 511 57 US ax Frames s 400 1 x 8 76 us 511 57 us Max Frames s 248 4 frames s Formula 2 1 Max F ls ax Frames s 2000 us 30 S Max Frames s 492 6 frames s Formula 3 110000000 240000 Max Frames s 458 3 frames s Max Frames s Formula one returns the lowest value So in this case the limiting factor is the sensor readout time and the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate would be 248 4 frames per second 158 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 Color Creation and Enhancement This chapter provides information about how color images are created on color camera models and about the features available for adjusting the appearance of the colors 10 1 Color Creation The sensors used in these cameras are equipped with an additive color separation filter known as a Bayer fil
64. all input and output lines with a single operation To check the state of all lines Read the value of the Line Status All parameter You can read the Line Status All parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read the parameter value int64 t lineState Camera LineStatusAll GetValue The Line Status All parameter is a 32 bit value As shown in Figure 31 certain bits in the value are associated with each line and the bits will indicate the state of the lines If a bit is 0 it indicates that Basler pilot 89 O Control AW00015119000 the state of the associated line is currently low If a bit is 1 it indicates that the state of the associated line is currently high Indicates output line 4 state Indicates output line 3 state Indicates output line 2 state Indicates input line 2 state Indicates output line 1 state Indicates input line 1 state 34 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 14 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 o Fig 31 Line Status All Parameter Bits 90 Basler pilot 9 Image Acquisition Control This section provides detailed information about controlling image acquisition You will find details about choosing between image acquisition control modes triggering image acquisition setting the exposure time for each acquired image and about how the camera s maximum allowed acquisition frame rate
65. and Advance Control Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for configuring sequence sets from within your application software and make settings for their selection when images are acquired The following code snippet gives example settings It illustrates using the API to set the free selection sequence advance mode with line 1 as the control source for bit 0 and line 2 as the control source for bit 1 of the sequence set address set the total number of sequence sets to 3 and populate sequence sets 0 through 2 by storing the sequence parameter values from the active set in the sequence sets Disable the sequencer featur Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false Basler pilot 255 Features AW00015119000 Set the Fr Selection sequence advance mode Camera SequenceAdvanceMode SetValue SequenceAdvanceMode FreeSelection Set the total number of sequence sets Camera SequenceSetTotalNumber SetValue 3 Set line 1 as the control source for setting sequence set address bit 0 Camera SequenceAddressBitSelector SetValue SequenceAddressBitSelector Bit0O Camera SequenceAddressBitSource SetValue SequenceAddressBitSource Linel Set line 2 as the control source for setting sequence set address bit 1 Camera SequenceAddressBitSelector SetValue SequenceAddressBitSelector Bitl Camera SequenceAddressBitSource SetValue SequenceAddressBitSource Line
66. and sizes We strongly recommend completely including the Auto Function AOI within the for Auto Function AOI and Image AOI about the behavior and roles of Auto Function AOI and Image AOI when also You can use auto functions when also using the reverse X feature For information using the reverse X feature see the Reverse X section Basler pilot 273 Features 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3 IER EERE mmnnene 7 18 19 20 21 22 23 234567 8 4 25 26 27 28 29 30 o 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 01234567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Imm Jammer
67. application software by using the Basler pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the time stamp chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Sequence Set Index chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector SequenceSetIndex Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true retrieve data from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64 t timeStamp Camera ChunkSequenceSetIndex GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler pilot 307 Features AW00015119000 12 17 Event Reporting Event reporting is available on the camera With event reporting the camera can generate an event and after some intermediate steps transmit a related event message to the PC whenever a specific situation has occurred The camera can generate and transmit events for these types of situations An acquisition start trigger has occurred AcquisitionStartEventData Overtriggering of the acquisition start trigger has occurred AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventData A frame start trigger ha
68. as an Example Some general tendencies can be seen from the figure toft19 Increases as the voltage increases and as the load current decreases tongo increases as the voltage and the load current increase The effects due to different voltages and load currents are more pronounced on toff10 than on tongo 78 Basler pilot 8 I O Control This section describes how to configure the camera s two physical input lines and four physical output lines It also provides information about monitoring the state of the input and output lines For more detailed information about the physical and electrical characteristics of the input and output lines see Section 7 7 on page 72 8 1 Configuring Input Lines 8 1 1 Assigning an Input Line to Receive a Hardware Trigger Signal You can assign the camera s input lines to receive external hardware trigger ExTrig signals The incoming ExTrig signals can then be used to control image acquisition Section 9 4 5 2 on page 105 Section 9 5 3 4 on page 116 and Section 9 6 3 4 on page 129 explain how to configure the camera to react to a hardware trigger signal and how to assign an input line to receive the hardware trigger signal The default line assignments depend on the image acquisition control mode Standard mode By default physical input line 1 is assigned to receive an ExTrig signal to serve as the frame start trigger By default physical input line 2 is assigned to receive an ExTrig
69. be shielded and must be constructed with twisted pair wire Use of twisted pair wire is essential to ensure that input signals are correctly received Close proximity to strong magnetic fields should be avoided Basler pilot 67 Physical Interface AW00015119000 The required 12 pin Hirose plug is available from Basler Basler also offers a cable assembly that is terminated with a 12 pin Hirose plug on one end and unterminated on the other Contact your Basler sales representative to order connectors or cables An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the 12 pin Connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 12 pin connector must have 12 pins Use of a smaller plug such as one with 10 pins or 8 pins can CAUTION damage the pins in the camera s 12 pin connector Hirose HR10A 10P 12S 12 pin Plug In Pwr Gnd AC In 12 TER V Standard Power and I O Cable Fig 24 Standard Power and I O Cable camera power VCC through two separate wires between the power supply and the To avoid a voltage drop with long power wires we recommend that you supply camera as shown in the figure above We also recommend that you supply camera power ground through two separate wires between the power supply and the camera as shown in the figure 68 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Physical Interface 7 4 3 PLC Power and I O Cable As with the standard power and I O cable described in the previous section the
70. bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens you get 8 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The GB in the name Bayer GB 8 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images For even lines in the images pixel zero will be green pixel one will be blue pixel two will be green pixel three will be blue etc For odd lines in the images pixel zero will be red pixel one will be green pixel two will be red pixel three will be green etc For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 10 1 1 on page 160 The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer GB 8 output The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line P the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line Bo the first byte of data for a line Bm the last byte of data for a line Even Lines Odd Lines Byte Data Byte Data Bo Green value for Po Bo Red value for Po B Blue value for P4 B4 Green value for P4 B2 Green value for Pz B2 Red value for P3 B3 Blue value for P3 B3 Green value for P3 B4 Green value for P4 B4 Red value for P4 Bs Blue value for Ps Bs Green value for Ps e e e
71. defined by your current Light Source Selector parameter setting You can execute the Color Adjustment Reset command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to execute the command II Reset the color adjustments Camera ColorAdjustmentReset Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily execute the command For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 31 176 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 3 5 A Procedure for Setting the Color Enhancements When setting the color enhancements on the camera we recommend using the procedure outlined below Since it makes changing camera parameters quick and easy we also recommend using the Basler pylon Viewer software when you are making adjustments 1 Arrange your camera so that it is viewing a scene similar to what it will view during actual oper ation Make sure that the lighting for the scene is as close as possible to the actual lighting you will be using during normal operation Using lighting that represents your normal operating conditions is extremely important We recommend including a standard color chart within your camera s field of view when you are adjusting the color enhancements This will make it much easier to know when the colors are properly adjusted One widely used chart is the ColorChecker chart also
72. feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger is received the camera automatically advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are loaded into the active set and are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 3 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received input line 1 is found to be high Accordingly another sequence set cycle is started and the parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition Note that the synchronous restart has priority here over the automatic sequence set advance that results from the Always Active sequence control source Without the priority rule sequence set 1 would be used Note that the state of input line 1 went high well ahead of the frame start trigger least one microsecond between setting the state of the input line and the rise To ensure reliable synchronous sequence set restart allow the elapse of at of the fram
73. featuring the standard mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 9 1 on page 91 The acquisition start trigger is used in conjunction with the frame start trigger to control the acquisition of frames In essence the acquisition start trigger is used as an enabler for the frame start trigger Acquisition start trigger signals can be generated within the camera or may be applied externally as software or hardware acquisition start trigger signals When the acquisition start trigger is enabled the camera s initial acquisition status is waiting for acquisition start trigger When the camera is in this acquisition status it will ignore any frame start trigger signals it receives If an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status In this acquisition status the camera can react to frame start trigger signals and will begin to expose a frame each time a proper frame start trigger signal is applied A primary feature of the acquisition start trigger is that after an acquisition start trigger signal has been applied to the camera and the camera has entered the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status once a specified number of frame st
74. fly changes are only allowed for the parameters that determine the position of the AOI i e the Offset X and Offset Y parameters Changes to the AOI size are not allowed on the fly Basler pilot 221 Features AW00015119000 12 5 Sequencer The sequencer feature will not work if the averaging feature or the auto functions feature is enabled For more information about the averaging feature see Section 12 8 on page 264 For more information about the auto functions feature see Section 12 10 on page 270 This section assumes that the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control We strongly recommend to use the standard mode when using the sequencer feature and avoid using the legacy mode For more information about the standard mode see Section 9 on page 91 If the sequencer feature is not available activate the Full camera description file For more information see Section 12 21 on page 321 The sequencer feature allows to apply specific sets of configuration parameter settings called sequence sets to a sequence of image acquisitions As the images are acquired one sequence set after the other is applied This makes it possible to respond to different imaging requirements and conditions that may for example result from changing illumination while a sequence of images is acquired Three sequence advance modes provide different schemes for advancing from one sequen
75. for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value Set the target average gray value If necessary set the auto function profile NOarwhnd gt Enable the exposure auto function by setting it to once or continuous You must choose the continuous setting when using the auto function profile The settable limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value are limited by the minimum allowed and maximum possible exposure time of the camera model Basler pilot 279 Features AW00015119000 The target average gray value may range from 0 black to 255 white Note that this range of numbers applies to 8 bit and to 16 bit 12 bit effective output modes Accordingly also for 16 bit output modes black is represented by 0 and white by 255 You can carry out steps 1 to 7 from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI1 See the Auto Function AOI section above Setting the limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value the set parameter values serve as examples Setting the target average gray value A medium gray value is selected as an example Enabling the exposure auto function and selecting for example the continuous mode of operation Select the appropriate auto function AOI for luminance statistics Currently AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 is predefined to gather luminance statistics
76. found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 4 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 5 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be low and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 5 are used for the image acquisition The camera has cycled once through the complete sequence set cycle When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition Another sequence set cycle has started After frame exposure and readout are completed the sequencer feature is disabled The cycling through sequence sets is terminated The sequencer parameter values in the active set return to the values that existed before the sequencer feature was enabled Basler pilot 239 Features AW00015119000 Use
77. frame rate can not be achieved with the acquisition mode parameter set to single frame in Section 9 3 on page 97 and Section 9 12 on page 154 Updated the exposure start delay for the piA2400 12 in Section 9 11 on page 151 Updated the C4 C5 and C3 constants and the calculated example and modified formula 1 in Section 9 12 on page 154 Modified Section 12 14 on page 290 and Section 12 15 on page 292 to take account of standard and legacy mode in image acquisition control Added events and parameter names in Section 12 17 on page 308 and removed some descriptions for transfer to the Camera Events code sample Rearranged sequence of sections 8 through 11 Removed the feedback page Basler pilot 331 Revision History AW00015119000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00015118000 19 Aug 2011 Added AC In lines and Gnd to the power supply and cable shield in Figure 24 in Section 7 4 2 on page 67 Simplified the definition of response times removed ranges of response time values included a measured example indicated general dependences of response times and removed the I O Line Schematic figure in Section 7 7 3 on page 77 Added inversion of the input lines in Section 8 1 3 on page 80 Updated the formula for the frame readout time in Section 9 11 on page 151 Included the Color Creation and Enhancement section 10 on page 159 Transferred the following sections to Section 10 on page 159 The Ba
78. hardware acquisition start triggering with line 1 as the trigger source Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the activation mode for the selected trigger to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set the acquisition frame count Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Apply a rising edge of th xternally generated electrical signal BxASTrig signal to input line 1 on the camera Perform the required functions to parameterize the frame start trigger to trigger 5 frame starts and to retrieve 5 frames here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 105 Image Acquisition Contro
79. have its maximum effect As an alternative the Color Transformation Matrix Factor parameter value can be entered as an integer value on a scale ranging from 0 to 65536 This integer range maps linearly to the floating point range with 0 being equivalent to 0 and 65536 being equivalent to 1 The integer values can be entered using the Color transformation Matrix Factor Raw parameter When the Light Source Selector parameter is set to off or custom the Color Transformation Matrix Factor parameter will not be available Setting Matrix Color Transformation You can set the Processed Raw Enable Color Transformation Selector and Light Source Selector parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API In this example we assume that you want to set your camera for Bayer BG 8 output and therefore you must set the Processed Raw Enable parameter value to enabled The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values II Set the camera for Bayer BG8 pixel data output format Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat_BayerBG8 II Because the camera is set for a Bayer output format the Processed Raw Basler pilot 169 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00015119000 Enabled parameter must be set to enabled Camera ProcessedRawEnable SetValue true II Select the matrix color transformation type Camera ColorTransformationSelector SetValue ColorTransformationSelector
80. image acquisition control Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode Otherwise we most strongly recommend enabling the standard mode When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will be in legacy mode The acquisition start trigger of the legacy mode is called frame start trigger in the standard mode The acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 9 1 on page 91 The acquistion start trigger is used to begin frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for acquistion start trigger acquisition status it will begin a frame acquisition each time it receives an acquistion start trigger signal Note that in order for the camera to be in a waiting for acquistion start trigger acquisition status The Acquisition Mode parameter must be set correctly A proper Acquisition Start command must be applied to the camera For more information about the Acquisition Mode parameter and about Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands see Section 9 2 on page 93 and Section 9 3 on page 97 Referring to the use case diagrams that appear in Section 9 8 on page 134 can help you understand the explanations of the acquistion start trigger
81. in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 9 1 on page 91 The following pages contain a series of use case descriptions and diagrams The descriptions and diagrams are designed to illustrate how acquisition start triggering and frame start triggering work in some common situations and with some common combinations of parameter settings These use cases do not represent every possible combination of the parameters associated with acquisition start and frame start triggering They are simply intended to aid you in developing an initial understanding of how these two triggers interact In each use case diagram the black box in the upper left corner indicates how the parameters are set The use case diagrams are representational They are not drawn to scale and are not designed to accurately describe precise camera timings 134 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 1 Acquisition and Frame Start Triggers Both Off Free Run Use case one is illustrated on page 136 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger are both set to off The camera will genera
82. in mind about the table is that location 4088 is the last location that will have a defined 12 bit value associated with it Locations 4089 through 4095 are not used If the sensor reports a value above 4088 the camera will not be able to perform an interpolation In cases where the sensor reports a value above 4088 the camera simply transmits the 12 bit value from location 4088 in the table The advantage of the luminance lookup table feature is that it allows a user to customize the response curve of the camera The graphs below represent the contents of two typical lookup tables The first graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the output of the camera increases linearly as the sensor output increases The second graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the camera output increases quickly as the sensor output moves from 0 through 2048 and increases gradually as the sensor output moves from 2049 through 4096 Basler pilot 267 Features 4095 3072 12 Bit Camera Output 2048 1024 0 0 1024 2048 3072 4095 12 Bit Sensor Reading Fig 69 Lookup Table with Values Mapped in a Linear Fashion 4095 3072 12 Bit Camera Output 2048 1024 0 0 1024 2048 3072 4095 12 Bit Sensor Reading Fig 70 Lookup Table with Values Mapped for Higher Camera Output at Low Sensor Readings 268 AW00015119000 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Using the Luminance Lookup Table to Get 8 Bit Ou
83. is not ready to receive them will be ignored Section 9 5 2 2 on page 111 includes more detailed information about applying a software acquisition start trigger to the camera using Basler pylon For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 9 12 on page 154 For more information about exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 131 9 6 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software acquisition start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and to execute the commands related to software acquisition start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with software frame start trigger signals Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera Tr
84. is set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed output the pixel data output for the Y component is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The range of data values for the Y component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 e e e e e e 0x01 1 0x00 0 The pixel data output for the U component or the V component is 8 bit data of the straight binary type The range of data values for a U or a V component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below 200 Basler pilot AW00015119000 This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 127 OxFE 126 e e e e e e 0x81 1 0x80 0 Ox7F 1 e e e e e e 0x01 127 0x00 128 Pixel Data Formats The signal level of a U component or a V component can range from 128 to 127 decimal Notice that the data values have been arranged to represent the full signal level range The interpolation and conversion algorithms are applied to the averaged pixel values when the averaging feature is used 11 3 8 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format On color cameras the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV packed pixel data format is similar to the YUV 4 2 2 pixel format described in the previous section The only difference is the order of the bytes transmit
85. it is reordered so that the pixel data for each line will be transmitted from the camera in ascending order from pixel 1 through pixel n All shifting is clocked according to the camera s internal data rate Shifting continues in a line by line fashion until all image data has been read out of the sensor The pixel data leaves the image buffer and passes back through the FPGA to an Ethernet controller where it is assembled into data packets The packets are then transmitted via an Ethernet network to a network adapter in the host PC The Ethernet controller also handles transmission and receipt of control data such as changes to the camera s parameters Basler pilot 59 Camera Functional Description AW00015119000 The image buffer between the sensor and the Ethernet controller allows data to be read out of the sensor at a rate that is independent of the data transmission rate between the camera and the host computer This ensures that the data transmission rate has no influence on image quality Sensor a Sensor Center Line Column Column Column Column Column Column s a Column Column
86. level setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the pixel values output from the camera For normal operation we recommend that you set the value of Black Level Raw Tap 1 and Black Level Raw Tap 2 to zero and that you simply use Black Level Raw All to set the black level Typically the tap black level settings are only used if you want to adjust the black level balance between the left half and the right half of the sensor Basler pilot 211 Features AW00015119000 The sum of the Black Level Raw All setting plus the Black Level Raw Tap 1 setting must be less than or equal to 1023 The sum of the Black Level Raw All setting plus the Black Level Raw Tap 2 setting must also be less than or equal to 1023 Setting the Black Level To set the Black Level Raw All value Set the Black Level Selector to All Set the Black Level Raw parameter to your desired value To set the Black Level Raw Tap 1 value Set the Black Level Selector to Tap 1 Set the Black Level Raw parameter to your desired value To set the Black Level Raw Tap 2 value Set the Black Level Selector to Tap 2 Set the Black Level Raw parameter to your desired value You can set the Black Level Selector and the Black Level Raw parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Set Black Level Raw All Camera BlackLevelSelect
87. line 1 The user must apply a frame start trigger signal to input line 1 to start each frame exposure Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger On Trigger Source for the acquisition start trigger Software Acquisition Frame Count 3 Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Source for the frame start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge a trigger signal applied by the user RA camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal frame exposure and readout frame transmission a a frame start trigger signal that will be ignored because the camera is not in a waiting for frame start trigger status Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed KXXXXXXXXXXI REEE SST Acquisition Start PEEKS BERR RRR RSA Trigger Software Command Executed ZA Ba B2 Frame Start Trigger Signal applied to line 1 Time Fig 45 Use Case 4 Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger On 142 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 9 Overlapping Exposure and Sensor Readout The image acquisition process on the camera includes two distinct parts The first part is the exposure of the pixels in the imaging sensor Once exposure is complete the second part of the process readout of the pi
88. line status equals zero and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be high the line status equals one and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition Note that the state of input line 1 went high well ahead of the frame start trigger microsecond between setting the states of the input lines and the rise of the To ensure reliable selection of a sequence set allow the elapse of at least one frame start trigger signal Also maintain the states of the input lines at least for one microsecond after the frame start trigger signal has risen Note also that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while an input line changes its state This happened when input line 1 changed its state before the second frame start trigger was received see also Figure 61 238 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features state During this period the camera will not wait for a frame start trigger and Make sure not to send a frame start trigger while the input line changes its any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when t
89. manually set gain feature are disabled The target average gray value may range from 0 black to 255 white Note that this range of numbers applies to 8 bit and to 16 bit 12 bit effective output modes So for 16 bit output modes black is also represented by 0 and white by 255 You can carry out steps 1 to 6 from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI1 Setting the limits for the Auto Gain Raw parameter value The currently accessible minimum and maximum parameter values are chosen as examples Setting the target average gray value A medium gray value is chosen as an example Enabling the gain auto function and selecting for example the once mode of operation Basler pilot 277 Features AW00015119000 Select the appropriate auto function AOI for luminance statistics Currently AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 is predefined to gather luminance statistics Set position and size of the auto function AOI Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOIL Camera AutoFunctionAOlOffsetX SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIlOffsetY SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Select gain for automatic luminance control Set gain
90. missing packets for a single resend request rather than sending a sequence of resend requests where each resend request relates to just one missing packet The location of the resend request batching threshold determines the maximum number of consecutive missing packets that can be grouped together for a single resend request The maximum number corresponds to the number of packets that fit into the span between the resend request threshold and the resend request batching threshold plus one If the Resend Request Batching parameter is set to 0 no batching will occur and a resend request will be sent for each single missing packet For other settings consider an example Suppose the Resend Request Batching parameter is set to 80 referring to a span between the resend request threshold and the front end of the receive window that can hold five packets Figure 16 In this case 4 packets 5 x 80 will fit into the span between the resend request threshold and the resend request batching threshold Accordingly the maximum number of consecutive missing packets that can be batched is 5 4 1 Basler pilot 37 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AW00015119000 Timeout Resend Mechanism Parameters The timeout resend mechanism is illustrated in Figure 17 where the following assumptions are made The frame includes 3000 packets Packet 1002 is missing within the stream of packets and has not been recovered Packets 2999 and 3000 are missing at
91. next in ascending sequence set index numbers The advance is also subject to the Sequence Set Executions parameter settings After one sequence set cycle is complete another one starts In this use case the Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the available sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 1 for sequence sets 0 2 3 and 4 to 2 for sequence set 5 and to 3 for sequence set 1 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger is received sequence set 0 is used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 1 for sequence set 0 this sequence set is only used once and therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are loaded into the active set and are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter
92. non volatile memory you can load the saved set from the camera s non volatile memory into the camera s active set When you do this the loaded set overwrites the parameters in the active set Since the settings in the active set control the current operation of the camera the settings from the loaded set will now be controlling the camera You can also load the default set into the camera s active set To load a saved configuration set or the default set from the camera s non volatile memory into the active set Set the User Set Selector to User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 or Default Execute a User Set Load command to load the selected set into the active set You can set the User Set Selector and execute the User Set Load command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and execute the command Camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector UserSet2 Camera UserSetLoad Execute camera is idle i e when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not have Loading a user set or the default set into the active set is only allowed when the a single image acquisition pending Loading the Default Set with the Standard Factory Setup selected into the active set is a good course of action if you have grossly misadjusted the settings in the camera and you are not sure how to recover The standard factory setup is o
93. not yet been reached another resend request will be sent In this case the parameter defines the time separation between consecutive resend requests for a missing packet Packet Timeout The Packet Timeout parameter defines how long in milliseconds the performance driver will wait for the next expected packet before it sends a resend request to the camera This parameter ensures that resend requests are sent for missing packets near to the end of a frame In the event of a major interruption in the stream of packets the parameter will also ensure that resend requests are sent for missing packets that were detected to be missing immediately before the interruption Make sure the Packet Timeout parameter is set to a longer time interval than the time interval set for the inter packet delay Basler pilot 39 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AW00015119000 Threshold and Timeout Resend Mechanisms Combined Figure 18 illustrates the combined action of the threshold and the timeout resend mechanisms where the following assumptions are made All parameters set to default The frame includes 3000 packets Packet 1002 is missing within the stream of packets and has not been recovered Packets 2999 and 3000 are missing at the end of the stream of packets end of the frame The default values for the performance driver parameters will cause the threshold resend mechanism to become operative before the timeout resend mechanism This ensures ma
94. of the previously acquired image is still taking place the camera will automatically continue the exposure until readout of the previous image is complete This situation is illustrated in Figure 41 for rising edge operation On the first cycle of the ExASTrig signal shown in the figure the signal rises and falls while readout is taking place Normally you would expect exposure to take place only when the ExASTrig signal is high But since the signal falls while the previous frame is still reading out the camera automatically extends exposure until the readout is complete On the second cycle of the ExASTrig signal shown in the figure the signal rises during previous frame readout but falls after the readout is complete This is a normal situation and exposure would be determined by the high time of the ExASTrig signal as you would expect Basler pilot 127 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 TrigRdy Signal Exposure o ExASTrig Signal oo oe L Frame Readout o remem Frame Fig 41 Trigger Width Exposure Mode with Overlapped Exposure You can set the exposure time parameter value and select an exposure mode from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the exposure time parameter and select the exposure mode set for the timed exposure mode set exposure time to 3000 us Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Camera Exp
95. operation They are simply intended to aid you in developing an initial understanding of how the sequence advance modes work In each use case diagram the black box in the upper left corner indicates how the parameters are set The use case diagrams are representational They are not drawn to scale and are not designed to accurately describe precise camera timings Basler pilot 227 Features AW00015119000 12 5 1 Auto Sequence Advance Mode When the auto sequence advance mode is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next occurs automatically as frame triggers are received The advance proceeds in ascending sequence set index numbers and subject to the Sequence Set Executions parameter value It specifies how many times each sequence set is consecutively used After the sequence set with the highest index number was used as many times as specified by the Sequence Set Executions parameter value the sequence set cycle starts again with sequence set 0 The Sequence Set Total Number parameter specifies the total number of different sequence sets that are available and included within a sequence set cycle The maximum number is 64 12 5 1 1 Operation Operating the Sequencer The following use case see also Figure 58 illustrates the operation of the sequencer in auto sequence advance mode As images are captured continuously the camera advances automatically with no action by the user from one sequence set to the
96. or disable the digital shift feature by setting the value of the Digital Shift parameter When the parameter is set to zero digital shift will be disabled When the parameter is set to 1 2 3 or 4 digital shift will be set to shift by 1 shift by 2 shift by 3 or shift by 4 respectively You can set the Digital Shift parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Disable digital shift Camera DigitalShift SetValue 0 Enable digital shift by 2 Camera DigitalShift SetValue 2 Basler pilot 217 Features AW00015119000 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 218 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 4 Area of Interest AOI The area of interest AOI feature lets you specify a portion of the imaging sensor array and after each image is acquired only the pixel information from the specified portion of the array is transmitted to the host PC The area of interest is referenced to the top left corner of the array The top left corner is designated as column 0 and line 0 as shown in Figure 56 The location and size of the area of interest is defined by declaring an
97. output for the Y component is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The range of data values for the Y component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below This Data Value Hexadecimal Indicates This Signal Level Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 0x01 1 0x00 0 202 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats The pixel data output for the U component or the V component is 8 bit data of the straight binary type The range of data values for a U or a V component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 127 OxFE 126 e e e e e e 0x81 1 0x80 0 Ox7F 1 e e e e e e 0x01 127 0x00 128 The signal level of a U component or a V component can range from 128 to 127 decimal Notice that the data values have been arranged to represent the full signal level range The interpolation and conversion algorithms are applied to the averaged pixel values when the averaging feature is used 11 3 9 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 When a color camera is set for the Mono 8 pixel data format the pixel values in each captured image are first interpolated and converted to the YUV color model as described for the YUV 4 2 2 Packed format The camera then transmits the
98. parameter to your desired value To set the Gain Raw Tap 2 parameter value Set the Gain Selector to Tap 2 Set the Gain Raw parameter to your desired value You can set the Gain Selector and the Gain Raw parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Set Gain Raw All Camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector All Camera GainRaw SetValue 100 Set Gain Raw Tap 1 Camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector Tapl Camera GainRaw SetValue 0 Set Gain Raw Tap 2 Camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector Tap2 Camera GainRaw SetValue 0 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 210 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 2 Black Level Adjusting the camera s black level will result in an offset to the pixel values output from the camera For readout purposes the sensor used in the camera is divided into two halves As a result of this design there are three black level adjustments available Black Level Raw All Black Level Raw Tap 1 and Black Level Raw Tap 2 Black Level Raw All is a global adjustment i e its setting affects
99. parameter values and to execute the commands related to software frame start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode In this example the trigger mode for the acquisition start trigger will be set to off Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with software frame start trigger signals within the limits imposed by other parameter settings Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger a Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Set for the timed exposure mod Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Set th xposure tim Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera
100. pilot AW00015119000 Table of Contents 12 POAtures oo 52 8 Bie oe Sate oe Gia oe Suite es ee oe eee Graces eels Ale 207 TAT GAIA iaa a hoo eee Rte aa et ei Bad aa tea ORS vs ale alae EE ake a en et 207 12 2 Black Levels aruanus 0 cc cette eee 211 12 3 Digital SANG Avo e 4 WE ae eee aS ais oe ay clowis aaa a be Reread ores nba Eaa 213 12 3 1 Digital Shift with 12 Bit Pixel Formats 200000 eee eee 213 12 3 2 Digital Shift with 8 Bit Pixel Formats 000000 eee eeee 215 12 3 3 Precautions When Using Digital Shift 0005 217 12 3 4 Enabling and Setting Digital Shift 0 00 2 0000005 217 12 4 Area of Interest AOI 2 0 0 0 006 teens 219 12 4 1 Changing AOI Parameters On the Fly 000000 eee eee 221 12 5 Seguente csc ee dase eae one deh od Oo dae ee 222 12 5 1 Auto Sequence Advance Mode 0 000 0c eee eee eee eee 228 12 514 Operations snc cutie eek wes eee eae ELE ee 228 12 5 1 2 Configuration 0 0 0 ee 231 12 5 2 Controlled Sequence Advance Mode 0 000 e eee eeeee 233 12 5 2 1 Operation with the Always Active Sequence Control Source 233 12 5 2 2 Operation with an Input Line as Sequence Control Source 237 12 5 2 3 Operation with the Disabled Sequence Control Source 243 12 5 2 4 Configuration isse cS eb eh dae ge b EAE Py a La 248 12 5 3 Free Selection Sequence Advance Mode
101. pixel transmitted by the camera Bo the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Byte Data Bo Brightness value for Po B4 Brightness value for P4 B2 Brightness value for P3 Bm 4 Brightness value for Ph 4 B3 Brightness value for P3 Bm 3 Brightness value for Ph 3 B4 Brightness value for P4 Bm 2 Brightness value for Ph 2 Bm 1 Brightness value for P _4 Bm Brightness value for Ph With the camera set for Mono 8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 e e e 0x01 1 0x00 0 Basler pilot 181 Pixel Data Formats 11 2 2 Mono 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 16 AW00015119000 When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono16 pixel data format it outputs 16 bits of brightness data per pixel with 12 bits effective The 12 bits of effective pixel data fill from the least significant bit The four unused most significant bits are filled with zeros The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Mono16 output Note that the data is placed in the image buffer in little endian for
102. request is sent to the camera via the transport layer this parameter designates the time out in milliseconds within which an acknowledge must be received Heartbeat Timeout The GigE Vision standard requires implementation of a heartbeat routine to monitor the connection between the camera and the host PC This parameter sets the heartbeat timeout in milliseconds If a timeout occurs the camera releases the network connection and enters a state that allows reconnection GigE implementation and changing this parameter is not required for normal camera operation However if you are debugging an application and you stop at a break point you will have a problem with the heartbeat timer The timer will time out when you stop at a break point and the connection to the camera will be lost When debugging you should increase the heartbeat timeout to a high value to avoid heartbeat timeouts at break points When debugging is complete you should return the timeout to its normal setting Management of the heartbeat time is normally handled by the Basler s basic You can set the driver related transport layer parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read and write the parameter values Read Write Timeout Camera_t TlParams t TlParams Camera GetTLNodeMap TlParams ReadTimeout SetValue 500 500 milliseconds TlParams WriteTimeout Set
103. synchronous sequence set advance Note that the same source will apply to all sequence sets available at the same time in the camera The following sources are available Always Active Line 1 Line 2 Disabled Set the Sequence Control Selector parameter to Restart to configure sequence set cycle restart Set the Sequence Control Source parameter to specify the source for restart 248 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Never choose the same source for sequence set advance and sequence set cycle restart with one exception If you want to only use asynchronous advance and restart choose Disabled as the source for advance and restart The following sources are available Line 1 Line 2 Disabled Select a sequence set index number by setting the Sequence Set Index parameter The available numbers range from 0 to 63 When selecting index numbers for configuring make sure to always start a sequence with 0 and to only set a continuous series of index numbers For example specifying a sequence of sets only with index numbers 5 6 and 8 is therefore not allowed If you did nonetheless the not ex plicitly configured sequence sets would within the scope of the sequence set total number be populated by default parameter values Set up your first acquisition scenario i e lighting object positioning etc Adjust the camera parameters to get the best image quality with this scenario you are adjusting the
104. tees 2 1 3 Spectral Response for Mono Cameras 0 000 c eee eens 8 1 4 Spectral Response for Color Cameras 00 00 cee 11 1 5 Mechanical Specifications 0 0 00000 ccc eee 14 1 5 1 Standard Housing o o A E a EE eee 14 1 5 1 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points 14 1 5 1 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy 000 0c cece eee 16 1 5 2 90 Head HOUSING c 0 5k ates eee a eee Ga Eee he ee ak 17 1 5 2 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points 17 1 5 2 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy 0000 cee eee eee 19 1 5 3 Maximum Thread Length on Color Cameras 00000000 eee 20 1 5 4 Mechanical Stress Test Results 00000 cece eee 21 1 6 Software Licensing Information 0 00 ccc eee 22 1 7 Avoiding EMI and ESD Problems 000 0 cece eee 23 1 8 Environmental Requirements 000 000 cee eee 24 1 8 1 Temperature and Humidity 0 000060 cee ee 24 1 8 2 Heat Dissipation 3202 peed eke a ee PRA Ree ieee a ee es 24 1 9 gt Precautions aeea 26 Mt a se Ie AGS Ra Ain ood a ded oe Pa ee es 25 Software and Hardware Installation 000 eee 29 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters 222000 eee ee eeeee 31 S21 gt The pylon VIEWER sis 2c2 ss nya we eee Ora seeded ans eee poe eee pada d eee 4 31 3 2 The IP Configuration Tool r se roesten aaea a e n E E A EE a a e NN 31 g9
105. the cameras should be able to operate simultaneously without problems If it is greater you must lower the data output rate of one or more of the cameras 52 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth You can lower the data output rate on a camera by using the Inter packet Delay parameter This parameter adds a delay between the transmission of each packet from the camera and thus slows the data transmission rate of the camera The higher the inter packet delay parameter is set the greater the delay between the transmission of each packet will be and the lower the data transmission rate will be After you have adjusted the Inter packet Delay parameter on each camera you can check the sum of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter values and see if the sum is now less than 125 MByte s 5 2 1 A Procedure for Managing Bandwidth In theory managing bandwidth sharing among several cameras is as easy as adjusting the inter packet delay In practice it is a bit more complicated because you must consider several factors when managing bandwidth The procedure below outlines a structured approach to managing bandwidth for several cameras The objectives of the procedure are To optimize network performance To determine the bandwidth needed by each camera for image data transmission To determine the bandwidth actually assigned to each camera for image data transmission For each camera to make sure that the
106. the end of the stream of packets end of the frame The Maximum Number Resend Requests parameter is set to 3 DIAGRAM IS NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 1 2 3 5 7 9 11 12 13 A ee i i i H Ld lt 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1014 p996 2997 2998 Time x 7 1 4 6 8 10 14 gt F g 17 Incomplete Stream of Packets and Part of the Resend Mechanism 1 Stream of packets Gray indicates that the status was checked as the packet entered the receive window White indicates that the status has not yet been checked 2 Receive window of the performance driver 3 As packet 1003 enters the receive window packet 1002 is detected as missing 4 Interval defined by the Resend Timeout parameter 5 The Resend Timeout interval expires and the first resend request for packet 1002 is sent to the camera The camera does not respond with a resend O Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter N The Resend Response Timeout interval expires and a second resend request for packet 1002 is sent to the camera The camera does not respond with a resend 8 Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 9 The Resend Response Timeout interval
107. the sensor Max Width read only Indicates the camera s maximum area of interest AOI width setting Max Height read only Indicates the camera s maximum area of interest AOI height setting Sensor Board Temperature read only Indicates the current temperature in degrees centigrade of the camera s sensor board You can read the values for all of the device information parameters or set the value of the Device User ID parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to read the parameters or write the Device User ID Read the Vendor Name parameter Pylon String t vendorName Camera DeviceVendorName GetValue Read the Model Name parameter Pylon String t modelName Camera DeviceModelName GetValue Read the Manufacturer Info parameter Pylon String t manufacturerInfo Camera DeviceManufacturerInfo GetValue Read the Device Version parameter Pylon String t deviceVersion Camera DeviceVersion GetValue Read the Firmware Version parameter Pylon String t firmwareVersion Camera DeviceFirmwareVersion GetValue 314 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Read the Device ID parameter Pylon String t deviceID Camera DeviceFirmwareVersion GetValue Write and read the Device User ID Camera DeviceUserID custom name Pylon String t deviceUserID Camera
108. to select the Time Stamp chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the time stamp chunk is enabled the camera will add a time stamp chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser that is included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the time stamp information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Time Stamp parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the time stamp chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Time Stamp chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector Timestamp Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true retrieve data from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64 t timeStamp Camera ChunkTimestamp GetValue For detailed information about using t
109. to start the timer is exposure active In other words you can use exposure start to trigger the start of a timer Timer 1 can only be assigned to output line 1 Timer 2 can only be assigned to output line 2 Timer 3 can only be assigned to output line 3 Timer 4 can only be assigned to output line 4 If you require the timer signal to be high when the timer is triggered and to go low when the delay expires simply set the output line to invert 8 2 4 1 Setting the Trigger Source for a Timer To set the trigger source for a timer Use the Timer Selector to select timer 1 or timer 2 Set the value of the Timer Trigger Source parameter to exposure active This will set the selected timer to use the start of exposure to begin the timer You can set the Trigger Selector and the Timer Trigger Source parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl Camera TimerTriggerSource SetValue TimerTriggerSource ExposureStart For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 84 Basler pilot AW00015119000 1 O Control 8 2 4 2
110. trigger input counter reset by setting the counter selector to Counter1 and setting the counter event source to FrameTrigger Set the counter reset source to Line1 Line2 Software or to Off Execute the command if using software as the counter reset source You can set the trigger input counter reset parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to configure and set the trigger input counter reset and to execute a reset via software configure reset of trigger input counter Camera CounterSelector SetValue CounterSelector Counterl Camera CounterEventSource SetValue CounterEventSource FrameTrigger select reset by signal on input line 1 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Linel select reset by signal on input line 2 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Line2 select reset by software Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Software execute reset by software Camera CounterReset Execute disable reset Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Off For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 302 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 16 6 Line
111. trigger is set to on the user must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera in order to begin each frame acquisition In this case we have set the frame start trigger signal source to input line 1 and the activation to rising edge so the rising edge of an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 will serve as the frame start trigger signal Keep in mind that the camera will only react to a frame start trigger signal when it is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status A possible use for this type of setup is a conveyor system that moves objects past an inspection camera Assume that the system operators want to acquire images of 3 specific areas on each object that the conveyor speed varies and that they do not want to acquire images when there is no object in front of the camera A sensing device on the conveyor could be used in conjunction with a PC to determine when an object is starting to pass the camera When an object is starting to pass the PC will execute an acquisition start trigger software command causing the camera to exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status An electrical device attached to the conveyor could be used to generate frame start trigger signals and to apply them to input line 1 on the camera Assuming that this electrical device was based on a position encoder it could account for the
112. value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 3 for sequence set 1 this sequence set is used a second time The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 3 228 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features for sequence set 1 this sequence set is used a third time The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 3 for sequence set 1 this sequence set can not after three uses be used again in the current sequence set cycle Therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 1 for sequence set 2 this sequence set is only used once and therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 3 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value
113. 0 Setting the AOI By default the AOI is set to use the full resolution of the camera s sensor You can change the size and the position of the AOI by changing the value of the camera s X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters The value of the X Offset parameter determines the starting column for the area of interest The value of the Y Offset parameter determines the starting line for the area of interest The value of the Width parameter determines the width of the area of interest The value of the Height parameter determines the height of the area of interest When you are setting the camera s area of interest you must follow these guidelines on all camera models The sum of the X Offset setting plus the Width setting must not exceed the width of the camera s sensor For example on the piA640 210gm the sum of the X Offset setting plus the Width setting must not exceed 648 The sum of the Y Offset setting plus the Height setting must not exceed the height of the camera s sensor For example on the piA640 210gm the sum of the Y Offset setting plus the Height setting must not exceed 488 On monochrome cameras The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters can be set in increments of 1 On color cameras The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters can be set in increments of 2 and they must be set to an even number For example the X Offset parameter can be set to 0 2 4 6 8 etc physical c
114. 000 This situation is illustrated below for rising edge triggering This rise in the trigger signal will be ignored and a Frame Start Overtrigger event will be generated ExFSTrig Signal Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 35 Overtriggering with Timed Exposure For more information about the Frame Start Overtrigger event see Section 12 17 on page 308 For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 131 114 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Trigger Width Exposure Mode When trigger width exposure mode is selected the length of the exposure for each frame acquisition will be directly controlled by the ExFSTrig signal If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExFSTrig signal rises and continues until the ExFSTrig signal falls If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExFSTrig signal falls and continues until the ExFSTrig signal rises Figure 36 illustrates trigger width exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering The exposure controlled by the ExFSTrig signal must be equal to or larger than the minimum allowed exposure time For more information about the minimum allowed exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 131 Trigger width exposure is especially useful if you intend to vary the length of the
115. 000 Image Acquisition Control For more information about setting the camera for hardware acquisition start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExFSTrig signal see Section 9 4 5 2 the electrical requirements for input lines 1 and 2 see Section 7 7 1 on page 72 determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 9 12 on page 154 9 5 3 2 Exposure Modes If you are triggering the start of frame acquisition with an externally generated frame start trigger ExFSTrig signal two exposure modes are available timed and trigger width Timed Exposure Mode When timed mode is selected the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s exposure time parameters If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExFSTrig signal rises If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExFSTrig signal falls The following figure illustrates timed exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering ExFSTrig Signal Period D ExFSTrig Signal J a S E Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 34 Timed Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering Note that if you attempt to trigger a new exposure start while the previous exposure is still in progress the trigger signal will be ignored and a Frame Start Overtrigger event will be generated Basler pilot 113 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119
116. 0015119000 Test Image 1 Fixed Diagonal Gray Gradient 8 bit The 8 bit fixed diagonal gray gradient test image is best suited for use when the camera is set for monochrome 8 bit output The test image consists of fixed diagonal gray gradients ranging from 0 to 255 If the camera is set for 8 bit output and is operating at full resolution test image one will look similar to Figure 77 The mathematical expression for this test image Gray Value column number row number MOD 256 Fig 77 Test Image One Test Image 2 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient 8 bit The 8 bit moving diagonal gray gradient test image is similar to test image 1 but it is not stationary The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever a new image acquisition is initiated The test pattern uses a counter that increments by one for each new image acquisition The mathematical expression for this test image is Gray Value column number row number counter MOD 256 Test Image 3 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient 12 bit The 12 bit moving diagonal gray gradient test image is similar to test image 2 but it is a 12 bit pattern The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever a new image acquisition is initiated The test pattern uses a counter that increments by one for each new image acquisition The mathematical expression for this test image is Gray Value column number row number counter MOD 4096 312 Basler pilot
117. 1 2 General Specifications AW00015119000 Specification piA640 210gm gc piA1000 48gm gc piA1000 60gm gc Sensor Size gm 648 x 488 gm 1004 x 1004 H x V pixels gc 646 x 486 gc 1000 x 1000 Sensor Type Kodak KAI 0340M CM Kodak KAI 1020M CM Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 1 3 2 3 Pixel Size 7 4 um x 7 4 um 7 4 um x 7 4 um Max Frame Rate 210 fps 48 fps 60 fps at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit s or Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbit s Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 equivalent to DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Mono 8 equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 Bayer GB 8 equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 Bayer GB 16 equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 Bayer GB 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 12 10 to 24 VDC 5 min 10 8 VDC lt 1 ripple 4 5 W 12 VDC 4 8 W 12 VDC 4 8 W 12 VDC 1 O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional Basler pilot
118. 2 Select sequence set with index number 0 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 0 Set up the first acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute Select sequence set with index number 1 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 1 Set up the second acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute Select sequence set with index number 2 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 2 Set up the third acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 6 Binning The binning feature is only available on the monochrome cameras Binning increases the camera s response to light by summing the charges from adjacent pixels into one p
119. 213 Corrected the indications of x offset and y offset in Figure 56 in Section 12 4 on page 219 and in Figure 72 in Section 12 10 1 2 on page 272 Added the reverse X feature in Section 12 7 on page 261 Removed the statement that auto functions have no effect on frame rate in Section 12 10 1 on page 270 and added a note that frame rate may be affected if exposure auto is used in Section 12 10 3 on page 279 Added a reference to the reverse X feature in Section 12 10 1 2 on page 272 Replaced Auto Gain Raw by the correct Gain Raw All parameter name in Section 12 10 2 on page 277 Replaced Auto Exposure Time Abs by the correct Exposure Time Abs parameter name in Section 12 10 3 on page 279 Added the auto function profile feature in Section 12 10 5 on page 282 and adjusted Section 12 10 2 on page 277 and Section 12 10 3 on page 279 accordingly Added the trigger delay feature in Section 12 14 on page 290 Added the acquisition status feature in Section 12 15 on page 292 and added a reference in Section 8 2 3 on page 82 Added descriptions about resetting the frame counter and about relating frame and trigger input counter in Section 12 16 3 on page 296 Corrected the maximum value for the frame counter in Section 12 16 3 on page 296 Added the trigger input counter feature in Section 12 16 5 on page 300 Added the high gain and auto functions factory setups and the standard factory setup formerly the default set in Sectio
120. 293 12 16 1 What Are Chunk Features 0 000 00 cee eee ee 293 Basler pilot v Table of Contents AW00015119000 12 16 2 Making the Chunk Mode Active and Enabling the Extended Data Stamp 294 12 16 3 Frame Counter 0 00000 eee 296 12 16 4 Time Stamps sei bac oy eX owe ene eae E Wen oe beeen See 299 12 16 5 Trigger Input Counter 0 0 0 000 eee 300 12166 Line Status Al arime pk Nene SENS olgi ed Wee po Ree Ske 303 12 16 7 GCRC CHeECKSUM piinu eee Ptr ad Shaded fe Pee ete BS 305 12 16 8 Sequence Set Index 0 000 tee 307 12 17 Event Reporting 20 a a ea ee eee 308 12 18 Fest IMa ge S eda do o4 ee eee ee ee ate ee Dei aan eee Ot i 311 12 19 Device Information Parameters 00000 cece eee 314 12 20 Configuration Sets sq sedan hee Wak weed oes sb alee eddie Seb eh ae sid wade 316 12 20 1 Saving User Setsaas nissana S Gs eae pede e ds denne dys sea E ada ds 317 12 20 2 Selecting a Factory Setup as the Default Set 2 318 12 20 3 Loading a Saved Set or the Default Set into the Active Set 319 12 20 4 Selecting the Startup Set 0 0 0 00000 ce ee 320 12 21 Camera Feature Set 2 0 0 2 00 eee 321 13 Troubleshooting and Support 00 cece eee eee ee 323 13 1 Technical Support Resources 2 000 ccs 323 13 2 Before Contacting Basler Technical Support 0020020 324 REVISION HIStOIY eienen ia eae RG oad
121. 3 3 The pylon API You can access all of the camera s parameters and can control the camera s full functionality from within your application software by using Basler s pylon API The Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference contains an introduction to the API and includes information about all of the methods and objects included in the API The programmer s guide and API reference are included in the pylon SDK The Basler pylon Software Development Kit SDK includes a set of sample programs that illustrate how to use the pylon API to parameterize and operate the camera These samples include Microsoft Visual Studio solution and project files demonstrating how to set up the build environment to build applications based on the API The SDK is available in the Downloads section of the Basler website www baslerweb com For more information about installing pylon software see the installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 You can download the guide from the Basler website www baslerweb com 32 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters 4 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters This section describes the Basler network drivers available for your camera and provides detailed information about the parameters associated with the drivers Two network drivers are available for the network adapter used with your GigE cameras The Basler filter driver is a ba
122. 327 Revision History AW00015119000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00015111000 15 Feb 2008 Added a note on the sensor characteristics of the piA1900 32gm gc in Section 1 2 on page 2 Included the Software Licensing Information section on page 22 Moved the guidelines for avoiding EMI and ESD problems to Section 1 7 on page 23 Included the warning related to code snippets in Section 1 9 on page 25 Transferred to following sections to the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API Software and Hardware Installation Network Recommendations and Camera and Network Adapter IP Configuration Added the reference to the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API in Section 2 on page 29 Added the Improve the Network Performance step in Section 5 2 1 on page 53 Corrected the minimum value for the Timer Delay Raw parameter and indicated the minimum value for the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter in Section 8 2 4 2 on page 85 Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual AW00015112000 5 Mar 2008 Modified mechanical drawings in Section 1 5 1 1 on page 14 and Section 1 5 2 on page 17 dimensions holes for screw lock connector Added information on the input line transition threshold in Table 5 on page 64 Added the maximum exposure times and related settings in Section 9 7 1 on page 132 Minor modifications and c
123. 5119000 28 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Software and Hardware Installation 2 Software and Hardware Installation The information you will need to install and operate the camera is included in the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 You can download the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API from the Basler website www baslerweb com The guide includes the information you will need to install both hardware and software and to begin capturing images It also describes the recommended network adapters describes the recommended architecture for the network to which your camera is attached and deals with the IP configuration of your camera and network adapter After completing your camera installation refer to the Basler Network Drivers and Parameters and Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth sections of this camera User s Manual for information about improving your camera s performance in a network and about using multiple cameras After the camera is powered on pylon software processes a camera description file included in the camera to make the camera features available for use The following camera description files are available and are used alternatively The Full camera description file providing all features The Basic camera description file providing most features Processing the Full camera description f
124. 8 equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 Bayer GB 8 equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 Bayer GB 16 equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 Bayer GB 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 12 10 to 24 VDC 5 min 10 8 VDC lt 1 ripple 4 9 W 12 VDC 4 9 W 12 VDC 1 O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional Basler pilot AW000151 19000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification piA1600 35gm gc piA1900 32 gm gc Size L x W x H standard housing 86 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 98 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 90 head housing 104 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without front module or connectors 110 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with front module and connectors Weight standard housing 220 g typical 90 head housing 240 g typical Conformity CE FCC RoHS GenlCam GigE Vision IP30 Table 2 General Specifications conform to the quality standards generally adhered to by Basler The sensitivity to light for clusters of up to six contiguous pixels may deviate significantly from the sensitivities
125. 8 bit Y value for each pixel to the host PC In the YUV color model the Y component for each pixel represents a brightness value This brightness value can be considered as equivalent to the value that would be sent from a pixel in a monochrome camera So in essence when a color camera is set for Mono 8 it outputs an 8 bit monochrome image This type of output is sometimes referred to as Y Mono 8 The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when a color camera is set for Mono 8 output The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Basler pilot 203 Pixel Data Formats AW00015119000 Bo the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Y value for Pg B Y value for P Bo Y value for P2 B3 Y value for P3 B4 Y value for P4 Bs Y value for P5 Be Y value for Pg B7 Y value for P7 e e e Bm 3 Y value for P 3 Bm 2 Y value for P Bm 1 Y value for Ph 1 Bm Y value for Ph With the camera set for Mono 8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal
126. A amp T FA amp TI FA amp T Resends available via the bandwidth 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 reserve Resends needed 0 7 4 10 20 1 0 0 1 Effect on the accumulator pool 0 2 ca 5 9 i4 5 5 i Resends left in the accumulator pool 15 13 14 9 0 4 9 14 15 after frame transmission F A amp T Frame Acquired Not enough and Transmitted resends available 1 48 Packet unavailable errors generated You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period but no resends are needed The accumulator pool started with 15 resends available and remains at 15 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period but 7 resends are needed The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are used and 2 resends are used from the accumulator pool The accumulator pool is drawn down to 13 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period and 4 resends are needed The 4 resends needed are taken from the resends available via the bandwidth reserve The fifth resend available via the bandwidth reserve is not needed so it is added to the accumulator
127. Accordingly the sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 3 Input line 1 sets bit O of the sequence set address Input line 2 sets bit 1 of the sequence set address Both input lines are not set for invert The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled and a frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 1 and 2 Input line 1 is found to be high and input line 2 is found to be low This corresponds to the address of sequence set 1 Accordingly sequence set 1 is selected Its parameter values are loaded into the active set and are used for the image acquisition Note that the state of input line 1 went high well ahead of the frame start trigger microsecond between setting the states of the input lines and the rise of the To ensure reliable selection of a sequence set allow the elapse of at least one frame start trigger signal Also maintain the states of the input lines at least for one microsecond after the frame start trigger signal has risen Note also that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while an input line changes its state This happened for example when input line 1 changed its state before the first frame start trigger was received see also Figure 64 Basler p
128. AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a Trigger Software command to apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera Camera TriggerSoftware Execute Retrieve acquired frame here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to FrameStart executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software frame start trigger signal to the camera You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 111 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 9 5 3 Using a Hardware Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 9 5 3 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to e g input line 1 an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 on the camera will act as the frame start trigger signal for the camera This type of trigger signal is generally referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExFSTrig signal can be used to trigger frame acquisition The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status frame acquisition will start wheneve
129. B Green value for P4 bits 3 0 Blue value for Po bits 3 0 Bo Green value for P4 bits 11 4 B3 Blue value for P3 bits 11 4 B4 Green value for P3 bits 3 0 Blue value for P3 bits 3 0 Bs Green value for P3 bits 11 4 Be Blue value for P4 bits 11 4 B7 Green value for Ps bits 3 0 Blue value for P4 bits 3 0 Bg Green value for Ps bits 11 4 e Bm 5 Blue value for P 3 bits 11 4 Bm 4 Green value for P 9 bits 3 0 Blue value for Ph 3 bits 3 0 Bm 3 Green value for Ph 2 bits 11 4 Bm 2 Blue value for P 4 bits 11 4 Bm 1 Green value for P bits 3 0 Blue value for P bits 3 0 Bm Green value for Ph bits 11 4 Basler pilot 197 Pixel Data Formats AW00015119000 Odd Rows Byte Data Bo Green value for Pg bits 11 4 B Red value for P4 bits 3 0 Green value for Po bits 3 0 Bo Red value for P4 bits 11 4 B3 Green value for P3 bits 11 4 B4 Red value for P3 bits 3 0 Green value for P3 bits 3 0 Bs Red value for P3 bits 11 4 Bg Green value for P4 bits 11 4 B7 Red value for Ps bits 3 0 Green value for P4 bits 3 0 Bg Red value for Ps bits 11 4 e e e e e e e e e Bm 5 Green value for P 3 bits 11 4 Bm 4 Red value for Ph 2 bits 3 O Green value for P 3 bits 3 0 Bm 3 Red value for Ph 2 bits 11
130. Basler pilot USER S MANUAL FOR GigE VISION CAMERAS Document Number AW000151 Version 19 Language 000 English Release Date 8 March 2013 BASLER the power of sight For customers in the U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for a computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules For customers in Canada This apparatus complies with the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in Radio Interference Regulations Pour utilisateurs au Canada Cet appareil est conforme aux normes Classe A pour bruits radio lectriques sp ci
131. Bayer BG 16 output Note that the data is placed in the image buffer in little endian format The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line P the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line Bo the first byte of data for a line Bm the last byte of data for a line Even Lines Odd Lines Byte Data Byte Data Bo Low byte of blue value for Po Bo Low byte of green value for Po B High byte of blue value for Po B4 High byte of green value for Po B2 Low byte of green value for P4 B2 Low byte of red value for P4 B3 High byte of green value for P4 B3 High byte of red value for P4 B4 Low byte of blue value for P3 By Low byte of green value for P3 Bs High byte of blue value for P2 Bs High byte of green value for P2 Be Low byte of green value for P3 Be Low byte of red value for P3 B7 High byte of green value for P3 B7 High byte of red value for P3 e e e e e e e Bm 7 Low byte of blue value for P 3 Bm 7 Low byte of green value for P 3 Bm 6 High byte of blue value for P _3 Bm 6 High byte of green value for Ph 3 Bm 5 Low byte of green value for P 2 Bm 5 Low byte of red value for P Bm 4 High byte of green value for P Bm 4 High byte of red value for Ph 2 Basler pilot 193 Pixel Data Formats AW00015119000
132. Case Operation in controlled sequence advance mode with Line 1 as the sequence control source Cycling through the sequence set cycles according to the states of input line 1 not set for invert Enabling and disabling of the sequencer feature Setting Sequence Set Total Number 6 camera is waiting for a frame start trigger h camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequencer Enabled Disabled Signal Applied to Input Line 1 Advance Sequence Set Cycle Starts Again z A ea A Frame Start Trigger Signal h h h v h v v o 1 ll a A 3 4 Ei 5 o E EEE E eee 2 ml y v v Time Fig 61 Sequencer in Controlled Sequence Advance Mode with Line 1 as the Sequence Control Source Synchronous Restart You can restart the sequence cycle by selecting the input line that is not used for sequence advance control as the source for controling sequence cycle restart In the following use case see also Figure 62 the same settings were made as in the previous use case The Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Line 1 was selected as
133. DeviceUserID GetValue Read the Sensor Width parameter int64 t sensorWidth Camera SensorWidth GetValue Read the Sensor Height parameter int64 t sensorHeight Camera SensorHeight GetValue Read the Max Width parameter int64 t maxWidth Camera WidthMax GetValue Read the Max Height parameter int64 t maxHeight Camera HeightMax GetValue Read the Temperature Abs parameter camera TemperatureSelector SetValue TemperatureSelector Sensorboard double temperature camera TemperatureAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily read the parameters and to read or write the Device User ID You can use the Basler pylon IP Configuration tool to read or write the Device User ID For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 the pylon IP Configuration Tool see the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 Basler pilot 315 Features AW00015119000 12 20 Configuration Sets A configuration set is a group of values that contains all of the parameter settings needed to control the ee camera There are three basic types of configuration Flash Volatile sets the active set the default set and user sets vee User Set 1 ee ee The Active Set
134. ExposureAuto Continuous For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 282 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 10 6 Balance White Auto Balance White Auto is an auto function and the automatic counterpart to manually setting the white balance The balance white auto function is only available on color models Automatic white balancing is a two step process First the Balance Ratio Abs parameter values for red green and blue are each set to 1 5 Then assuming a gray world model the Balance Ratio Abs parameter values are automatically adjusted such that the average values for the red and blue pixels match the average value for the green pixels The balance white auto function uses Auto Function AOI 2 and can be operated in the once and continuous modes of operation If Auto Function AOI 2 does not overlap the Image AOI see the Auto Function AOI section the pixel data from Auto Function AOI 2 will not be used to control the white balance of the image However as soon as the Balance White Auto function is set to once or continuous operation mode the Balance Ratio Abs parameter values for red green and blue are each set to 1 These settings will control the white balance of the image For information on the white balance feature see Section 10 3 1 on
135. Gamma parameter was incorrectly referred to as the Gamma Raw parameter Included the Auto Functions section on page 270 and added related information in other parts of the manual Extended the description of the debouncer in Section 12 12 on page 286 Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual AW00015114000 22 Aug 2008 Updated contact addresses and phone numbers Official release of the averaging feature and of the auto functions AW00015115000 30 Sep 2008 Added information for the new piA2400 17 gm gc models Basler pilot 329 Revision History AW00015119000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00015116000 17 June 2009 Added information drawings inclusive about the 90 head housing variant in Section 1 on page 1 The designations of the Kodak sensors were indicated more specifically by adding M and CM for mono and color sensors respectively in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added maximum sensor tilt angles for the piA2400 17gm gc in Figure 12 on page 16 and Figure 14 on page 19 Indicated the relevance of spectral response curves for the piA2400 17gm gc in Section 1 3 on page 8 and Section 1 4 on page 11 Section 2 on page 29 and Section 3 on page 31 and have been revised to reflect that the pylon driver package can now be downloaded from the website Updated the minimum allowed exposure times in Section 9 7 on page 131 Added the digital shift feature in Section 12 3 on page
136. PLC power and I O cable is a single cable that connects power to the camera and connects to the camera s I O lines The PLC power and I O cable adjusts the voltage levels of PLC devices to the voltage levels required by the camera and it protects the camera against negative voltage and reverse polarity Close proximity to strong magnetic fields should be avoided PLC device You can use a PLC power and I O cable when the camera is not connected to a PLC device if power for the I O input is supplied with 24 VDC We recommend using a PLC power and I O cable if the camera is connected to a Basler offers PLC power and I O cables with 3 m and 10 m lengths Each cable is terminated with a 12 pin Hirose plug HR10A 10P 12S on the end that connects to the camera The other end is unterminated Contact your Basler sales representative to order the cables Basler pilot 69 Physical Interface AW00015119000 7 5 Camera Power Camera power must be supplied to the camera s 12 pin connector via the standard power and I O cable or via the PLC power and I O cable Power consumption is as shown in the specification tables in Section 1 of this manual Voltage Outside of Specified Range Can Cause Damage The recommended operating voltage of the power to the camera is 12 VDC 10 to 24 VDC 5 If the voltage is less than 10 8 VDC the camera CAUTION may operate erratically An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the 12 pin Co
137. Pg bits 11 4 Bio P7 bits 3 0 Pg bits 3 B11 P7 bits 11 4 e e e e e e e Bm 5 Ph 3 bits 11 4 Bm 4 Ph 2 bits 3 0 P 3 bits 3 Bm 3 Ph 2 bits 11 4 Bm 2 Ph 1 bits 11 4 Bm 1 P bits 3 O Ph 14 bits 3 Bm Ph bits 11 4 184 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats When a monochrome camera is set for Mono 12 Packed the pixel data output is 12 bit data of the unsigned type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 e e e e e 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 Basler pilot 185 Pixel Data Formats AW00015119000 11 2 4 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 When a monochrome camera is set for the YUV 4 2 2 Packed pixel data format the camera transmits Y U and V values in a fashion that mimics the output from a color camera set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed The Y value transmitted for each pixel is an actual 8 bit brightness value similar to the pixel data transmitted when a monochrome camera is set for Mono 8 The U and V values transmitted will always be zero With this format a Y value is transmitted for each pixel but the U and V values are only transmitted for every second pixel The order of the pixel data for a received frame in the image buffer in your PC is similar
138. Remember however that the diagrams apply to the standard mode Accordingly the acquisition start trigger shown in the diagrams is not available in legacy mode and the frame start trigger shown is equivalent to the acquisition start trigger in legacy mode 118 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 6 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Legacy Mode The main parameter associated with the acquisition start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger has two available settings off and on 9 6 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off When the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to off the camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera With the trigger mode set to off the way that the camera will operate the acquisition start trigger depends on the setting of the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to single frame the camera will automatically generate a single acquisition start trigger signal whenever it receives an Acquisition Start command If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame the camera will automatically begin generating acquisition start trigger signals when it receives an Acquisition Start command The camera will continue to generate acquisition start trigger signals until
139. Selector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Trigger delay double TriggerDelay us 1000 0 1000us 1Ims 0 001s 290 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay us Legacy mode Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Trigger delay double TriggerDelay us 1000 0 1000us lms 0 001s Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay us For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 9 1 on page 91 Basler pilot 291 Features AW00015119000 12 15 Acquisition Status When controlling image acquisition with a software trigger you can use the acquisition status feature to detemine when the camera is ready to be triggered for an image acquisition Using this feature you can avoid triggering the camera at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings For other means of checking the acquisition status see also the Acquisition Monitoring Signals section you cannot use the status of the Acquisition Start command to determine when the
140. Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Acquisition Start Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera before you can begin frame acquisition A software acquisition start trigger signal is applied by Setting the Trigger Selector parameter to Acquisition Start Executing a Trigger Software command The camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status It cannot react to frame trigger signals when in this acquisition status When a software acquisition start trigger signal is received by the camera it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the number of frame start trigger signals received by the camera is equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When a new software acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will again exit from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Note that as long as the Trigger Selector parameter is set to Acquisition Start a software acquisition start trigger will be applied to the camera each time a Trigger Software command is
141. Status All The Line Status All feature samples the status of all of the camera s input lines and output lines each time an image acquisition is triggered It then adds a chunk to each acquired image containing the line status information The line status all information is a 32 bit value As shown in Figure 75 certain bits in the value are associated with each line and the bits will indicate the state of the lines If a bit is O it indicates that the state of the associated line was low at the time of triggering If a bit is 1 it indicates that the state of the associated line is was high at the time of triggering Indicates output line 4 state Indicates output line 3 state Indicates output line 2 state Indicates input line 2 state Indicates output line 1 state Indicates input line 1 state 34 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 2221 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 14 10 9 8 7 Je 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fig 75 Line Status All Parameter Bits or any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive disables all The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the line status all feature chunk features To enable the line status all chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Line Status All chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the line status all chunk is enabled the camera will add a line status all chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk app
142. The pylontAP lita cue ee a aa ak De ee Sed Babe a a e eaei 32 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters 000e cece eeeeeee 33 4 1 The Basler Filter Driver 2 0 0 0 0 0 00 cc ee 34 4 2 The Basler Performance Driver 0000 cece eee eee 35 4 3 Transport Layer Parameters 00 000 e eee 43 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth 45 5 1 Network Related Parameters in the Camera 00000 cece eee 45 5 2 Managing Bandwidth When Multiple Cameras Share a Single Network Path 52 5 2 1 A Procedure for Managing Bandwidth 00000 eee eee 53 Camera Functional Description 000 cece eee eee eee 59 6 1 OVENVIEW 2a eee edb ead saa hes thd eee dh dob wh a aa ee ee 59 Physical Interface 22 42 5 24 52 ca2esieeh ieee ees Soot e ees 63 7 1 General Description of the Connections 2 000 0c eee eee 63 Basler pilot i Table of Contents AW00015119000 7 2 Connector Pin Assignments and Numbering 00002 eee eee eee 64 7 2 1 12 pin Receptacle Pin Assignments 00 00 eee eee eee 64 7 2 2 RJ 45 Jack Pin Assignments 000 000 e eee 65 2 3 Pini NumbernGs 44 2 202 0 204 Sorta We eae e te wea Pl ewe eke eR 65 3 lt Connector Types 2icaccsin ls eee kA Si ooh ee Bae Deo ed cies 66 Tat B pinRJz45 Jack s fico ext ee a da amp watts hata ie R i e a Anas 66 3 2 A2 pin Connector snk we bbe Ke bab a 8 Soo
143. Value 500 500 milliseconds Heartbeat Timeout Camera t TlParams_t TlParams Camera GetTLNodeMap TlParams HeartbeatTimeout SetValue 5000 5 seconds For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler pilot 43 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters 44 AW00015119000 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth 5 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth This section describes the camera parameters that are related to the camera s performance on the network It also describes how to use the parameters to manage the available network bandwidth when you are using multiple cameras 5 1 Network Related Parameters in the Camera The camera includes several parameters that determine how it will use its network connection to transmit data to the host PC The list below describes each parameter and provides basic information about how the parameter is used The following section describes how you can use the parameters to manage the bandwidth used by each camera on your network Payload Size read only Indicates the total size in bytes of the image data plus any chunk data if chunks are enabled that the camera will transmit Packet headers are not included Stream Channel Selector read w
144. X offset coordinate a width a Y offset coordinate and a height For example suppose that you specify the x offset as 10 the width as 16 the y offset as 6 and the height as 10 The area of the array that is bounded by these settings is shown in Figure 56 The camera will only transfer pixel data from within the area defined by your settings Information from the pixels outside of the area of interest is discarded Column 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Line 0 1 E j Y 3 Offset 4 A 6 7 EEE 8 E M 9 E T H Height 1 ENEE E 11 0 12 _ E 13 E E The camera 14 will only 15 transmit the 16 pixel data 17 from this 18 i area 19 fn 1E LI LI Ji Lot LO Ta Offset a Width Fig 56 Area of Interest One of the main advantages of the AOI feature is that decreasing the height of the AOI can increase the camera s maximum allowed acquisition frame rate For more information about how changing the AOI height affects the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 9 12 on page 154 Basler pilot 219 Features AW0001511900
145. _RGBtoRGB Set the light source selector so that no correction will be done Camera LightSourceSelector SetValue LightSourceSelector_Off II Set the light source selector for tungsten lighting Camera LightSourceSelector SetValue LightSourceSelector_Tungsten Set the light source selector for daylight at about 5000K Camera LightSourceSelector SetValue LightSourceSelector_Daylight II Set the light source selector for daylight at about 6500K Camera LightSourceSelector SetValue LightSourceSelector_Daylight6500K II Set the matrix correction factor Camera ColorTransformationMatrixFactor SetValue 0 50 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 31 10 3 3 1 The Custom Light Source Setting by someone who is thoroughly familiar with matrix color transformations It is nearly impossible to enter correct values in the conversion matrix by trial and error The Custom setting for the Light Source Selector parameter is intended for use The RGB to RGB color matrix conversion for each pixel is performed by multiplying a 1 x 3 matrix containing R G and B color values with a 3 x 3 matrix containing correction values Each column in the 3 x 3 matrix can be populated with values of your choice In other words Gain00 Gain01 Gain02 R R Gain10 Gain11 Gain12 G
146. a complete image The accumulator is basically an extra pool of resends that the camera can use in unusual situations The Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation parameter is a multiplier used to set the maximum number of resends that can be held in the accumulator pool For example assume that the current bandwidth reserve setting for your camera is 5 and that this reserve is large enough to allow up to 5 packet resends during a frame period Also assume that the Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation parameter is set to 3 With these settings the accumulator pool can hold a maximum of 15 resends i e the multiplier times the maximum number of resends that could be transmitted in a frame period Note that with these settings 15 will also be the starting number of resends within the accumulator pool The chart on the next page and the numbered text below it show an example of how the accumulator would work with these settings The chart and the text assume that you are using an external trigger to trigger image acquisition The example also assumes that the camera is operating in a poor environment so many packets are lost and many resends are required The numbered text is keyed to the time periods in the chart Basler pilot 47 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00015119000 Time Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a en a ee FA amp TIIFA amp TIIFA amp TIHIFA amp TIIFA amp TIHF
147. according to the scheme that applied to the preceding frame start triggers While frame exposure and readout for the fifth frame start trigger are in progress the sequencer feature is disabled The complete frame is transmitted The sequencer parameter values in the active set return to the values that existed before the sequencer feature was enabled Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Use Case Operation in free selection sequence advance mode Sequence sets are selected at will The selection is controlled by the states of the input lines Settings Sequence Set Total Number 4 Input line 1 not set for invert sets bit O of the sequence set address Input line 2 not set for invert sets bit 10f the sequence set address camera is waiting for a frame start trigger v camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated fj frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequencer Enabled Disabled Signal Applied to Input Line 1 Signal Applied to Input Line 2 Z A A z2 A A BB E Frame Start Tri Si l nas v v v v v v v v v 1 1 o A Oo Ei A A Time Fig 64 Sequencer in Free Selection Mode Operating the Sequencer Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for operating the sequencer in Free Selection sequence advance mode from withi
148. actual bandwidth assigned for image data transmission matches the bandwidth needed To make sure that the total bandwidth assigned to all cameras does not exceed the network s bandwidth capacity To make adjustments if the bandwidth capacity is exceeded Step 1 Improve the Network Performance If you use as recommended the Basler performance driver with an Intel PRO network adapter or a compatible network adapter the network parameters for the network adapter are automatically optimized and need not be changed If you use the Basler filter driver and have already set network parameters for your network adapter during the installation of the Basler pylon software continue with step two Otherwise open the Network Connection Properties window for your network adapter and check the following network parameters If you use an Intel PRO network adapter Make sure the Receive Descriptors parameter is set to its maximum value and the Interrupt Moderation Rate parameter is set to Extreme Also make sure the Speed and Duplex Mode parameter is set to Auto Detect If you use a different network adapter see whether parameters are available that will allow setting the number of receive descriptors and the number of CPU interrupts The related parameter names may differ from the ones used for the Intel PRO adapters Also the way of setting the parameters may be different You may e g have to use a parameter to set a low number for the inter
149. after an image is captured the camera checks a counter that tracks the number of images acquired and develops a frame counter stamp for the image And if the Time Stamp feature is enabled the camera creates a time stamp for the image The frame counter stamp and the time stamp would be added as chunks of trailing data to each image as the image is transferred from the camera The features that add chunks to the acquired images are referred to as chunk features Before you can use any of the features that add chunks to the image you must make the chunk mode active Making the chunk mode active is described in the next section Basler pilot 293 Features AW00015119000 12 16 2 Making the Chunk Mode Active and Enabling the Extended Data Stamp Before you can use any of the camera s chunk features the chunk mode must be made active Making the chunk mode active does two things It makes the Frame Counter the Trigger Input Counter the Time Stamp the Line Status All the CRC Checksum and the Sequence Set Index chunk features available to be enabled It automatically enables the Extended Image Data chunk feature To make the chunk mode active Set the Chunk Mode Active parameter to true You can set the Chunk Mode Active parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue tru
150. age Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Use Case Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger Off The acquisition start trigger is on and the acquisition start trigger source is set to input line 1 The user must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to input line 1 to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the acquisition frame count is set to 3 the camera will re enter the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status after 3 frames have been acquired The frame start trigger is off The camera will generate frame start trigger signals internally with no action by the user Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger On Trigger Source for the acquisition start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the acquisition start trigger Rising Edge Acquisition Frame Count 3 Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger Off a trigger signal generated by the camera internally a trigger signal applied by the user Rey camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal y frame exposure and readout frame transmission Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed Neaeeaeeeees ZEEE RESIS RRR Acquisition Start Trigger Signal applied to line 1 LA Frame Start i Li 1 Li Li i Trigger S
151. ain for the right half of the sensor will be the sum of the Gain Raw All value plus the Gain Raw Tap 1 value Gain Raw Tap 2 sets an additional amount of gain for the left half of the sensor The total gain for the left half of the sensor will be the sum of the Gain Raw All value plus the Gain Raw Tap 2 value For each camera model the minimum and maximum allowed Gain Raw and Gain Total settings are shown in the tables below Basler pilot 207 Features AW00015119000 Gain Raw All Gain Raw Tap 1 Gain Raw Tap 2 Camera Model Min Max Max Max Max Max Max Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 8 bit 16 bit 8 bit 16 bit 8 bit 16 bit depth depth depth depth depth depth piA640 210 0 500 400 500 400 500 400 piA1000 48 0 500 400 500 400 500 400 piA1000 60 0 500 400 500 400 500 400 piA1600 35 0 500 400 500 400 500 400 piA1900 32 0 500 400 500 400 500 400 piA2400 17 0 500 400 500 400 500 400 Table 15 Minimum and Maximum Allowed Gain Raw Settings Gain Raw All Gain Raw Tap 1 Gain Raw All Gain Raw Tap 2 Camera Model Min Max Max Max Max Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 8 bit depth 16 bit depth 8 bit depth 16 bit depth piA640 210 0 500 400 500 400 piA1000 48 0 500 400 500 400 piA1000 60 0 500 400 500 400 piA1600 35 0 500 400 500 400 piA1900 32 0 500 400 500 400 piA2400 17 0 500 400 500 400 Tab
152. al Image Acquisition N Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 1 Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Time Fig 49 Trigger Ready Signal You should be aware that if the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is enabled the operation of the trigger ready signal will be influenced by the value of the parameter If the value of the parameter is greater than zero but less than the maximum allowed the trigger ready will go high at the rate specified by the parameter value For example if the parameter is set to 10 the trigger ready signal will go high 10 times per second If the value of the parameter is greater than the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with the current camera settings the trigger ready signal will work as described above and will go high at a point that represents the maximum acquisition frame rate allowed the camera will simply ignore the attempt The trigger ready signal will only be available when hardware triggering is enabled If you attempt to start an image acquisition when the trigger ready signal is low By default the trigger ready signal is assigned to physical output line 2 on the camera However the assignment of the trigger signal to a physical output line can be changed Basler pilot 147 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Selecting the Trigger Ready Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The trig
153. amera in order to begin each frame exposure In this case we have set the frame start trigger signal source to input line 1 and the activation to rising edge so the rising edge of an externally generated electrical signal applied to line 1 will serve as the frame start trigger signal This type of camera setup is used frequently in industrial applications One example might be a wood products inspection system used to inspect the surface of pieces of plywood on a conveyor belt as they pass by a camera In this situation a sensing device is usually used to determine when a piece of plywood on the conveyor is properly positioned in front of the camera When the plywood is in the correct position the sensing device transmits an electrical signal to input line 1 on the camera When the electrical signal is received on line 1 it serves as a frame start trigger signal and initiates a frame acquisition The frame acquired by the camera is forwarded to an image processing system which will inspect the image and determine if there are any defects in the plywood s surface Basler pilot 137 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Use Case Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger On The acquisition start trigger is off The camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals internally with no action by the user The frame start trigger is on and the frame start trigger source is set to input line 1 The user must apply a frame s
154. aptured with reverse X enabled on the right Normal Image Mirror Image eooecoococe wud A 000000000000000 E Fig 67 Reverse X Mirror Imaging Using AOls with Reverse X You can use the AOI feature when using the reverse X feature Note however that the position of an AOI relative to the sensor remains the same regardless of whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled As a consequence an AOI will display different images depending on whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled Basler pilot 261 Features AW00015119000 Normal Image Mirror Image eocecooscoo op aay a see F AOI AOI Fig 68 Using an AOI with Reverse X Mirror Imaging For color cameras provisions are made ensuring that the effective color filter alignment will be constant for both normal and mirror images AOls Depending on whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled an Image AOI will display different images and an Auto Function AOI will refer to different image contents AOls used for the auto function feature will behave analogously to standard The positions of the AOls relative to the sensor will not change For more information about auto functions see Section 12 10 on page 270 262 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Setting Reverse X You can enable or disable the reverse X feature by setting the ReverseX parameter value You can set the parameter value from within
155. arameters see Section 9 7 on page 131 9 6 1 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters You can set the Trigger Mode and related parameter values for the frame start trigger from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API If your settings make it necessary you can also set the Trigger Source parameter The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger to on and the Trigger Source to input line 1 Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode to continuous the Trigger Mode to off and the Acquisition Frame Rate to 60 Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Set th xposure tim Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Enable the acquisition frame rate parameter and set the frame rate
156. are not acquired When end of exposure event reporting is enabled an end of exposure event will be reported for each image in the sequence of individual images No end of exposure event will be reported spe cifically for the averaged image When a chunk feature is enabled the data chunk from the last image in the sequence of individual images will be taken for the averaged image Output Frame Rate When averaging is used the images will be transmitted at an output frame rate which will be lower than the acquisition frame rate As the number of averaged individual images increases the output frame rate will decrease The output frame rate is described by the following formula Acquisition Frame Rate CUO Blame Rates Number of Averaged Images Example Assume the acquisition frame rate is 248 4 frames per second and 3 images are averaged then the output frame rate will be 82 2 frames per second Note that averaging will allow an increased acquisition frame rate compared to not using averaging if the frame transmission is the most restricting factor When averaging is used Formula 3 in the Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate section is replaced by the following formula Device Current Throughput Parameter Value x Number of Averaged Images Max Frames s Payload Size Parameter Basler pilot 265 Features AW00015119000 Setting Averaging You can enable averaging by setting the AveragingNumberOfFrames
157. art Modes are available that allow the length of exposure time to be directly controlled by the ExTrig signal or to be set for a pre programmed period of time Accumulated charges are read out of the sensor when exposure ends At readout the accumulated charges are transported from the sensor s light sensitive elements pixels to its vertical shift registers see Figure 20 on page 60 The charges from the bottom line of pixels in the array are then moved to two horizontal shift registers as shown in the figure Charges from the left half of the line are moved to the left horizontal shift register and charges from the right half of the line are moved to the right horizontal shift register The left horizontal shift register shifts out charges from left to right that is pixel 1 pixel 2 pixel 3 and so on The right horizontal shift register shifts out charges from right to left that is pixel n pixel n 1 pixel n 2 and so on where n is the last pixel in a line As the charges move out of the horizontal shift registers they are converted to voltages proportional to the size of each charge Each voltage is then amplified by a Variable Gain Control VGC and digitized by an Analog to Digital converter ADC For optimal digitization gain and black level can be adjusted by setting camera parameters After each voltage has been amplified and digitized it passes through an FPGA and into an image buffer As the pixel data passes through the FPGA
158. art trigger has a mode setting But in Basler pylon there is a single parameter the Trigger Mode parameter that is used to set the mode for both of these triggers Also the Trigger Software command mentioned earlier can be executed for either the acquisition start trigger or the frame start trigger So if you want to set the Trigger Mode or execute a Trigger Software command for the acquisition start trigger rather than the frame start trigger how do you do it The answer is by using the Trigger Selector parameter Whenever you want to work with a specific type of trigger your first step is to set the Trigger Selector parameter to the trigger you want to work with either the acquisition start trigger or the frame start trigger At that point the changes you make to the Trigger Mode Trigger Source etc will be applied to the selected trigger only Exposure Time Control As mentioned earlier when a frame start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will begin to acquire a frame A critical aspect of frame acquisition is how long the pixels in the camera s sensor will be exposed to light during the frame acquisition If the camera is set for software frame start triggering the exposure time parameters will determine the exposure time for each frame If the camera is set for hardware frame start triggering there are two modes of operation timed and trigger width With the timed mode the exposure time parameters will de
159. art triggers has been received Before more frames can be acquired a new acquisition start trigger signal must be applied to the camera to exit it from waiting for acquisition start trigger status Note that this feature only applies when the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on This feature is explained in greater detail in the following sections Basler pilot 99 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 9 4 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode The main parameter associated with the acquisition start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger has two available settings off and on 9 4 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera 9 4 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on the camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and cannot react to frame start trigger signals You must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to exit the camera from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition st
160. asler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 7 2 Setting the Exposure Time Using Absolute Settings You can also set the exposure time by using an absolute value This is accomplished by setting the Exposure Time Abs parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in increments of 1 us When you use the Exposure Time Abs parameter to set the exposure time the camera accomplishes the setting change by automatically changing the Exposure Time Raw parameter to achieve the value specified by your Exposure Time Abs setting This leads to a limitation that you must keep in mind if you use Exposure Time Abs parameter to set the exposure time That is you must set the Exposure Time Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using the Exposure Time Raw parameter with the current Exposure Time Base parameter For example if the time base was currently set to 62 us you could use the Exposure Time Base Abs parameter to set the exposure to 62 us 124 us 186 us etc Note that if the Exposure Time Abs parameter is not a multiple of the current Exposure Time Base Abs parameter the camera will automatically change the setting for the Exposure Time Abs parameter to the nearest achieveable value If you set the Exposure Time Base Abs parameter to 1 you can set the Exposure Time Abs parameter to any value within the specified range You should also be aware that if you change
161. atus The camera can then react to frame start trigger signals and will continue to do so until the number of frame start trigger signals it has received is equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting The camera will then return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status In order to acquire more frames you must apply a new acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to exit it from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on you must select a source signal to serve as the acquisition start trigger The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal The available selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by executing an Trigger Software command for the acquisition start trigger on the host PC Line 1 When the source signal is set to line 1 you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line 1 on the camera If the Trigger Source parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to Line 1 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a risin
162. ble pixel data formats 11 1 Setting the Pixel Data Format The setting for the camera s Pixel Format parameter determines the format of the pixel data that will be output from the camera The available pixel formats depend on the camera model and whether the camera is monochrome or color Table 13 lists the pixel formats available on each monochrome camera model and Table 14 lists the pixel formats available on each color camera model Mono Camera Mono 8 Mono 16 Mono 12 YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Model Packed Packed Packed piA640 210gm piA1000 48gm piA1000 60gm piA1600 35gm piA1900 32gm piA2400 17gm Table 13 Pixel Formats Available on Monochrome Cameras format available Basler pilot 179 Pixel Data Formats AW00015119000 Color Camera Mono 8 Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer YUV YUV Model GB 8 BG 8 GB16 BG16 GB12 BG 12 4 2 2 4 2 2 Packed Packed Packed YUYV Packed piA640 21 Ogc e e e o e e piA1000 48gc piA1 000 60gm e e e e e e piA1600 35gc e piA1 900 32gc e e e e e o piA2400 17gc e Table 14 Pixel Formats Available on Color Cameras format available Details of the monochrome formats are described in Section 11 2 on page 181 and details of the color formats are des
163. ble represents the 12 bit value that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 0 The numbers at locations 1 through 7 are not used The number at location 8 in the table represents the 12 bit value that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 8 The numbers at locations 9 through 15 are not used The number at location 16 in the table represents the 12 bit value that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 16 The numbers at locations 17 through 23 are not used The number at location 24 in the table represents the 12 bit value that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 24 And so on As you can see the table does not include a defined 12 bit output value for every pixel value that the sensor can report So what does the camera do when the sensor reports a pixel value that is between two values that have a defined 12 bit output In this case the camera performs a straight line interpolation to determine the value that it should transmit For example assume that the sensor reports a pixel value of 12 In this case the camera would perform a straight line interpolation between the values at location 8 and location 16 in the table The result of the interpolation would be reported out of the camera as the 12 bit output Another thing to keep
164. both halves of the sensor The Black Level Raw All value can be set in a range from 0 to 600 Black Level Raw Tap 1 Sets an additional amount of black level adjustment for the right half of the sensor The value can be set in a range from 0 to 600 The total black level for the right half of the sensor will be Black Level Raw All value Black Level Raw Tap 1 value The sum of the Black Level Raw All value and the Black Level Raw Tap 1 value must not exceed 600 Black Level Raw Tap 2 Sets an additional amount of black level adjustment for the left half of the sensor The value can be set in a range from 0 to 600 The total black level for the left half of the sensor will be Black Level Raw All value Black Level Raw Tap 2 value The sum of the Black Level Raw All value and the Black Level Raw Tap 2 value must not exceed 600 If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields 8 bit effective pixel depth Mono 8 YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed an increase of 64 in a black level setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the pixel values output from the camera And a decrease of 64 in a black level setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the pixel values output from the camera an effective pixel depth of 12 bits per pixel Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed an increase of 4 ina black level setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the pixel values output from the camera A decrease of 4 in a black
165. can be projected onto a plane as shown in Figure 53 such that a color hexagon is formed The primary and secondary colors define the corners of the color hexagon in an alternating fashion The edges of the color hexagon represent the colors resulting 172 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Color Creation and Enhancement from mixing the primary and secondary colors The center of the color hexagon represents all shades of gray including black and white The representation of any arbitrary color of the RGB color space will lie within the color hexagon The color will be characterized by its hue and saturation Hue specifies the kind of coloration for example whether the color is red yellow orange etc Saturation expresses the colorfulness of a color At maximum saturation no shade of gray is present At minimum saturation no color but only some shade of gray including black and white is present Fig 53 RGB Color Cube With YCM Secondary Colors Black and White Projected On a Plane Basler pilot 173 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00015119000 Decrease A Saturation Adjustment i Increase Hue Adjustment Y G R Fig 54 Hue and Saturation Adjustment In the Color Hexagon Adjustments Are Indicated for Red as an Example Hue and Saturation Adjustment The color adjustment feature lets you adjust hue and saturation for the primary and the secondary colors Each adjustment affects those areas in
166. can vary depending on the current camera settings 9 1 Image Acquisition Control Modes Legacy and Standard Two different image acquisition control modes are available the legacy mode and the standard mode Previous Basler pilot cameras with firmware version 3 2 and below only operate according to the legacy mode The legacy mode differs from the standard mode in only two respects the acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode the frame start trigger of the standard mode is called acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode Recommendations for choosing the image acquisition control mode If you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras we recommend choosing the legacy mode In this mode triggering the camera will be exactly as for previous cameras Note also that you will not have to modify any code of your application If you do not want to operate the camera together with previous cameras we most strongly recommend choosing the standard mode For more information about acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode see Section 9 6 on page 118 For more information about acquisition start trigger and frame start trigger in the standard mode see Section 9 4 on page 99 and Section 9 5 on page 106 respectively For more information about determining the camera s firmware version see Section 12 18 on page 311 When the camera is started for the first time after de
167. ce Advance Mode parameter to Free Selection 3 Set the Sequence Set Total Number parameter The maximum number is 4 4 Select the sequence set address bits and set the input lines that will act as the control sources If the Set Total Number parameter was set to two a Bit O will be selected by default as the sequence set address bit Set input line 1 or input line 2 as the control source for setting bit 0 If the Set Total Number parameter was set to higher than two a Select bit O of the sequence set address bit b Set input line 1 or input line 2 as the control source for setting bit 0 c Select bit 1 of the sequence set address bit d Set the input line as the control source for setting bit 1 Chose the input line not used for setting bit 0 5 Use the Sequence Set Index parameter to select a sequence set index number for the sequence set currently being populated The available numbers are 0 through 3 6 Set up your first acquisition scenario i e lighting object positioning etc 7 Adjust the camera parameters to get the best image quality with this scenario you are adjusting the parameters in the active set 8 Execute the Sequence Set Store command to copy the sequence parameter values currently in the active set into the selected sequence set Any existing parameter values in the sequence set will be overwritten 9 Repeat the above steps for the other sequence sets starting from step 5 Configuring Sequence Sets
168. ce for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Set the acquisition frame count Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode to on the Trigger Source to line 1 the Trigger Activation to rising edge and the Acquisition Frame Count to 5 Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger a Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode_ On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the activation mode for the selected trigger to rising edge m Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set the acquisition frame count Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 102 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 4 4 Using a Software Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode 9 4 4 1 Introduction If the camera s Acquisition
169. ce set to the next see below for details 222 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features The Sequencer and the Active Configuration Set During operation the camera is controlled by a set of configuration parameters that reside in the camera s volatile memory This set of parameters is known as the active configuration set or active set for short When you use the pylon API or the pylon Viewer to make a change to a camera parameter such as the Gain you are making a change to the active set And since the active set controls camera operation you will see a change in camera operation when you change a parameter in the active set For more information about the active set see the Configuration Sets section The parameters in the active set can be divided into two types non sequence and sequence parameters as shown in Figure 57 on page 223 The values of the non sequence parameters cannot be changed using the sequencer feature The values of the sequence parameters however can be set very quickly by using sequence sets Because the sequence sets reside in the camera you can replace the values in the active set with values from one of the sequence sets almost instantaneously as images are acquired Using the sequencer feature has no effect on the camera s frame rate The sequence set currently defining the parameter values of the active set is also called the current set Active Set Non sequence Parameters pylo
170. ceive window to check the status of packets The check for missing packets is made as packets enter the receive window If a packet arrives from higher in the sequence of packets than expected the preceding skipped packet or packets are detected as missing For example suppose packet n 1 has entered the receive window and is immediately followed by packet n 1 In this case as soon as packet n 1 enters the receive window packet n will be detected as missing Basler pilot 35 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AW00015119000 General Parameters Enable Resend Enables the packet resend mechanisms If the Enable Resend parameter is set to false the resend mechanisms are disabled The performance driver will not check for missing packets and will not send resend requests to the camera If the Enable Resend parameter is set to true the resend mechanisms are enabled The performance driver will check for missing packets Depending on the parameter settings and the resend response the driver will send one or several resend requests to the camera Receive Window Size Sets the size of the receive window Threshold Resend Mechanism Parameters The threshold resend request mechanism is illustrated in Figure 16 where the following assumptions are made Packets 997 998 and 999 are missing from the stream of packets Packet 1002 is missing from the stream of packets DIAGRAM IS NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 3 4 5 6 1 2
171. commend not using shift by 4 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 4 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 256 12 3 2 Digital Shift with 8 Bit Pixel Formats No Shift As mentioned in the Functional Description section of this manual the camera uses 12 bit ADCs to digitize the output from the imaging sensor When the camera is set for a pixel format that outputs pixel data at 8 bit i eDi DE a Oe ae Oe Ee ae ipit effective depth by default the camera drops the 4 least significant bits from each ADC and transmits the 8 most significant bits bit 11 through 4 ADC Pi Not Shifted Shift by 1 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the output from the camera will include bit 10 through bit 3 from each ADC ADC bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting once is that the output of the 1 10 9 8 7 6 54 3 2 1 0 camera is effectively multiplied by 2 For example assume that the camera is set for no shift that it is lu viewing a uniform white target and that under these he conditions the reading for the brightest pixel is 10 If lt gt Dor Shifted Once you changed the digital shift setting to shift by 1 the reading would increase to 20 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set b
172. control frame acquisition start see Section 9 4 4 on page 103 For more information about using a hardware trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 9 4 5 on page 104 trigger Keep in mind that the camera will only react to acquisition start triggers when it is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 93 and Section 9 4 on page 99 By default input line 1 is selected as the source signal for the acquisition start 120 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Exposure Time Control with the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s exposure time parameters When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to e g input line 1 the exposure time for each frame acquisition can be controlled with the exposure time parameters or it can be controlled by manipulating the hardware trigger signal For more information about controlling exposure time when using a software trigger see Section 9 4 4 on page 103 For more information about controlling exposure time when using a hardware trigger see Section 9 4 5 on page 104 For more information about exposure time p
173. cribed in Section 11 3 on page 187 You can set the Pixel Format parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat_Mono8 Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat_Monol2Packed Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat_Monol6 Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat_YUV422 YUYV_ Packed Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat_BayerGB8 Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat_YUV422Packed Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat_BayerGB16 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 180 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats 11 2 Pixel Data Formats for Mono Cameras 11 2 1 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 8 pixel data format it outputs 8 bits of brightness data per pixel The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Mono 8 output The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last
174. ctive set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the im age acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used An AsyncAdvance command is sent After some delay the parameter values of the next sequence set will be loaded into the active set It is assumed here that the delay between sending the AsyncRestart command and it becoming effective will allow the acquisition of two more images When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used The AsyncAdvance command has not yet become effective because of the assumed associ ated delay When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used The AsyncAdvance command has not yet become effective because of the assumed associ ated delay When the AsyncAdvance command becomes effective the camera happens to be in waiting for frame start trigger status The parameter values of the next sequence set i e of sequence 244 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features set 1 are loaded into the active set Note that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while the parameter values of sequence set 1 are loaded into the active set see also Figure 63 se
175. cycle at 0 Accordingly the difference between matching counts will always be one regardless of the number of counting cycles Note that if both counters were started at the same time and not reset since and if the trigger input counter is ahead of the matching frame counter by more than one the camera was overtriggered and not all external triggers resulted in frame acquisitions Frame Counter Reset Whenever the camera is powered off the frame counter will reset to 0 During operation you can reset the frame counter via software or via I O input line 1 or line 2 You can also disable the ability to perform a reset by setting the reset source to off By default the frame counter reset is disabled To use the frame counter reset feature Configure the frame counter reset by setting the counter selector to Counter2 and setting the counter event source to FrameStart Set the counter reset source to line 1 line 2 software or off Execute the command if using software as the counter reset source You can set the frame counter reset parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to configure and set the frame counter reset and to execute a reset via software configure reset of frame counter Camera CounterSelector SetValue CounterSelector Counter2 Camera CounterEventSource SetValue CounterEventSource FrameStart select r
176. cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be high and therefore the sequence cycle is restarted Input line 1 is found to be low but this has no significance Synchronous restart has priority over the secquence set advance control The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition Another sequence set cycle has started Note that the state of input line 2 went high well ahead of the frame start trigger microsecond between setting the states of the input lines and the rise of the To ensure reliable selection of a sequence set allow the elapse of at least one frame start trigger signal Also maintain the states of the input lines at least for one microsecond after the frame start trigger signal has risen Note also that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while an input line changes its state This happened for example when input line 2 changed its state before the fourth frame start trigger was received see also Figure 62 Basler pilot 241 Features AW00015119000 state During this period the camera will not wait for a frame start trigger and Mak
177. d is executed Acquisition Start Trigger The acquisition start trigger is essentially an enabler for the frame start trigger The acquisition start trigger has two modes of operation off and on If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on the initial acquisition status of the camera will be waiting for acquisition start trigger see Figure 32 on page 95 When the camera is in this acquisition status it cannot react to frame start trigger signals When an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The camera can then react to frame start trigger signals The camera will continue to react to frame start trigger signals until the number of frame start trigger signals it has received is equal to an integer parameter setting called the Acquisition Frame Count At that point the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will remain in that status until a new acquisition start trigger signal is applied As an example assume that the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on th
178. dard mode the trigger ready signal relates to the frame start trigger signal In legacy mode the trigger ready signal relates to the acquisition start trigger signal When you are acquiring images the camera automatically calculates the earliest moment that it is safe to trigger each new acquisition The trigger ready signal will go high when it is safe to trigger an acquisition will go low when the acquisition has started and will go high again when it is safe to trigger the next acquisition see Figure 49 The camera calculates the rise of the trigger ready signal based on the current exposure time parameter setting the current size of the area of interest and the time it will take to readout the captured pixel values from the sensor The trigger ready signal is especially useful if you want to run the camera at the maximum acquisition frame capture rate for the current conditions If you monitor the trigger ready signal and you trigger acquisition of each new image immediately after the signal goes high you will be sure that the camera is operating at the maximum acquisition frame rate for the current conditions 146 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Signal goes high Signal goes low Signal goes high Signal goes low at earliest safe when exposure at earliest safe when exposure moment to trigger for acquisition moment to trigger for acquisition acquisition N 1 N 1 begins acquisition N 2 N 2 begins TrigRdy Sign
179. de enable the frame counter chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Frame Counter chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector Framecounter Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true retrieve date from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize 296 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features int64 t frameCounter Camera ChunkFramecounter GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Comparing Counter Chunk Data When comparing trigger input counter data and frame counter data related to the same image be aware that the trigger input counter initially starts at 1 whereas the frame counter starts at 0 Therefore the trigger input count will always be ahead of the matching frame count by one if both counters were started at the same time and if an image was acquired for every trigger Whenever the counters restart after having reached 4294967295 they will both start another counting
180. dependent mechanical testing laboratory and subjected to the stress tests listed below The mechanical stress tests were performed on selected camera models with standard housing After mechanical testing the cameras exhibited no detectable physical damage and produced normal images during standard operational testing Test Standard Conditions Vibration DIN EN 60068 2 6 10 58 Hz 1 5 mm_58 500 Hz 20 g_1 Octave Minute sinusoidal each axis 10 repetitions Shock each axis DIN EN 60068 2 27 20 g 11ms 10 shocks positive 20 g 11 ms 10 shocks negative Bump each axis DIN EN 60068 2 29 20 g 11 ms 100 shocks positive 20 g 11 ms 100 shocks negative Vibration DIN EN 60068 2 64 15 500 Hz 0 05 PSD ESS standard profile 00 30 h broad band random digital control each axis Table 4 Mechanical Stress Tests The mechanical stress tests were performed with a dummy lens connected to a C mount The dummy lens was 35 mm long and had a mass of 66 g Using a heavier or longer lens requires an additional support for the lens Basler pilot 21 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW000151 19000 1 6 Software Licensing Information The software in the camera includes the LWIP TCP IP implementation The copyright information for this implementation is as follows Copyright c 2001 2002 Swedish Institute of Computer Science All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binar
181. determined the maximum size packets the adapter can handle make sure that the adapter is set to use the maximum packet size Next check the documentation for your network switch and determine the maximum packet size that it can handle If there are any settings available for the switch make sure that the switch is set for the largest packet size possible Now that you have set the adapter and switch you can determine the largest packet size the network can handle The device with the smallest maximum packet size determines the maximum allowed packet size for the network For example if the adapter can handle 8 kB packets and the switch can handle 6 kB packets then the maximum for the network is 6 kB packets Once you have determined the maximum packet size for your network set the value of the Packet Size parameter on each camera to this value maximum packet size for a device especially network switches There is a quick and dirty way to check the maximum packet size for your network with its current configuration The manufacturer s documentation sometimes makes it difficult to determine the 1 Open the pylon Viewer select a camera and set the Packet Size parameter to a low value 1 kB for example Use the Continuous Shot mode to capture several images 3 Gradually increase the value of the Packet Size parameter and capture a few images after each size change 4 When your Packet Size setting exceeds the packet size
182. djustment Damping The gray value adjustment damping controls the rate by which pixel gray values are changed when Exposure Auto and or Gain Auto are enabled If an adjustment damping factor is used the gray value target value is not immediately reached but after a certain delay This can be useful for example when objects move into the camera s view area and where the light conditions are gradually changing due to the moving objects By default the gray value adjustment damping is set to 0 6836 This is a setting where the damping control is as stable and quick as possible Setting the Adjustment Damping The gray value adjustment damping is determined by the value of the Gray Value Adjustment Damping Abs parameter The parameter can be set in a range from 0 0 to 0 78125 The higher the value the lower the adjustment damping is i e the sooner the target value will be reached the adaptation is realized over a smaller number of frames Examples 0 6836 Default value the camera starts with There is a relatively immediate continuous adaptation to the target gray value If you set the value to 0 5 there would be more interim steps the target value would be reached after a higher number of frames You can set the gray value adjustment damping from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the gray value adjustment damping Camera GrayValueAdju
183. dth parameter value Use the Line Selector to select the camera output line for which you want to set the minimum output pulse width parameter value output line 1 2 3 or 4 Set the value of the MinOutPulseWidthAbs parameter You can set the Line Selector and the value of the MinOutPulseWidthAbs parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the input line Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Outl 288 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Set the parameter value to 10 0 microseconds Camera MinOutPulseWidthAbs SetValue 10 0 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 289 Features AW00015119000 12 14 Trigger Delay The trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay in microseconds that will be applied between the receipt of a hardware trigger and it becoming effective The trigger delay can be specified in the range from 0 to 10000000 us equivalent to 10 s When the delay is set to 0 us no delay will be applied Note the different applicability of the trigger delay depending on the image acquisition control mode Standard
184. e Note that making the chunk mode inactive switches all chunk features off Also note that when you enable ChunkModeActive the PayloadType for the camera changes from Pylon PayloadType_Image to Pylon PayloadType_ChunkData For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Once the chunk mode is active and the Extended Image Data feature has been enabled the camera will automatically add an extended image data chunk to each acquired image The extended image data chunk appended to each acquired image contains some basic information about the image The information contained in the chunk includes The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height for the AOI The Pixel Format of the image The Minimum Dynamic Range and the Maximum Dynamic Range To retrieve data from the extended image data chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser 294 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the extended image data by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Offset X parameter Read the value of the Chunk Offset Y parameter Read the value of the Chunk Width parameter Read the value of the Chunk Height parameter
185. e The counter counts up to 4294967295 unless it is reset before see below After reaching the maximum value the counter will reset to 0 and then continue counting Be aware that if the camera is acquiring frames continuously and continuous capture is stopped several numbers in the counting sequence may be skipped This happens due to the internal image buffering scheme used in the camera feature or any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the frame counter disables all chunk features To enable the frame counter chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Frame Counter chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the frame counter chunk is enabled the camera will add a frame counter chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the frame counter information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Frame Counter parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mo
186. e and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler pilot 85 1 O Control AW00015119000 Changing the Delay Time Base By default the Timer Delay Time Base is fixed at 1 us minimum value and the timer delay is normally adjusted by setting the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter However if you require a delay time that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter alone the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the delay time base The Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter value sets the delay time base in us The default is 1 us and it can be changed in 1 us increments Note that there is only one timer delay time base and it is used by all four of the available timers You can set the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera TimerDelayTimebaseAbs SetValue 5 Setting the Delay with an Absolute Value You can also set the Timer delay by using an absolute value This is accomplished by setting the Timer Delay Abs parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in increments of 1 us To set the delay for a timer using an absolute value Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Delay Abs pa
187. e pixel two will be green pixel three will be blue etc For odd lines in the images pixel zero will be red pixel one will be green pixel two will be red pixel three will be green etc For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 10 1 1 on page 160 The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer GB 16 output Note that the data is placed in the image buffer in little endian format The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line P the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line Bg the first byte of data for a line Bm the last byte of data for a line Even Lines Odd Lines Byte Data Byte Data Bo Low byte of green value for Po Bo Low byte of red value for Pg B High byte of green value for Po B High byte of red value for Po Bo Low byte of blue value for P4 Bo Low byte of green value for P B3 High byte of blue value for P4 B3 High byte of green value for P4 B4 Low byte of green value for P3 B4 Low byte of red value for Pz Bs High byte of green value for P2 Bs High byte of red value for P2 Be Low byte of blue value for P3 Bg Low byte of green value for P3 B7 High byte of blue value for P3 B7 High byte of green value for P3 e e e e
188. e this section also applies if the legacy mode is enabled instead In this case however the following differences must be taken into account the acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode the frame start trigger of the standard mode is called acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 9 1 on page 91 This section presents an overview of the elements involved with controlling the acquisition of images Reading this section will give you an idea about how these elements fit together and will make it easier to understand the detailed information in the sections that follow Four major elements are involved in controlling the acquisition of images Acquisition start and acquisition stop commands and the acquisition mode parameter The acquisition start trigger The frame start trigger Exposure time control When reading the explanations in the overview and in this entire chapter keep in mind that the term frame is typically used to mean a single acquired image When reading the material in this section
189. e Acquisition Frame Count parameter is set to three and the camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Once the camera has received three frame start trigger signals it will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status At that point you must apply a new acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to make it exit waiting for acquisition start trigger Frame Start Trigger Assuming that an acquisition start trigger signal has just been applied to the camera the camera will exit from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Applying a frame start trigger signal to the camera at this point will exit the camera from the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status and will begin the 94 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control process of exposing and reading out a frame see Figure 32 on page 95 As soon as the camera is ready to accept another frame start trigger signal it will return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status A new frame start trigger signal can then be applied to the camera to begin another frame exposure The frame start trigger
190. e available for use by the sequencer feature Some sequence advance modes require the storing of additional settings for example the total number of sequence sets you want to use the number of consecutive uses of a sequence set or the source to control sequence set advance For details about populating sequence sets and making related settings see the sections below explaining the sequence advance modes current sequence set cannot be read or changed using the pylon API or the pylon Viewer Only those sequence parameter values will be displayed that were active before the sequencer was enabled You will not be able to see the parameter values set by the current set When the sequencer feature is enabled the sequence parameter values of the Make sure the sequencer feature is disabled when configuring sequence sets 224 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features camera is reset or switched off If you are using the sequencer feature you must Because the sequence sets only reside in volatile memory they are lost if the populate the sequence sets after each camera reset or startup Note also that sequence sets can not be saved in user sets Sequence Advance As explained above a sequence set can only control the operation of the camera after its parameter values were loaded into the active set The loading into the active set and therefore the selection of a sequence set as the current set for a specific
191. e camera at it s maximum resolution your exposure time will not normally be the most restrictive factor on the frame rate However if you are using long exposure times or small areas of interest it is quite possible to find that your exposure time is the most restrictive factor on the frame rate In this case you should lower your exposure time You may need to compensate for a lower exposure time by using a brighter light source or increasing the opening of your lens aperture The frame transmission time will not normally be a restricting factor But if you are using multiple cameras and you have set a small packet size or a large inter packet delay you may find that the transmission time is restricting the maximum allowed rate In this case you could increase the packet size or decrease the inter packet delay If you are using several cameras connected to the host PC via a network switch you could also use a multiport network adapter in the PC instead of a switch This would allow you to increase the Ethernet bandwidth assigned to the camera and thus decrease the transmission time For more information about AOI settings see Section 12 4 on page 219 For more information on the settings that determine the bandwidth assigned to the camera see Section 5 2 on page 52 Basler pilot 155 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Formula 1 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the sensor readout time 1 Max Frames s AOl He
192. e environments often include devices that generate electromagnetic interference EMI and they are prone to electrostatic discharge ESD Excessive EMI and ESD can cause problems with your camera such as false triggering or can cause the camera to suddenly stop capturing images EMI and ESD can also have a negative impact on the quality of the image data transmitted by the camera To avoid problems with EMI and ESD you should follow these general guidelines Always use high quality shielded cables The use of high quality cables is one of the best defenses against EMI and ESD Try to use camera cables that are the correct length and try to run the camera cables and power cables parallel to each other Avoid coiling camera cables If the cables are too long use a meandering path rather then coiling the cables Avoid placing camera cables parallel to wires carrying high current switching voltages such as wires supplying stepper motors or electrical devices that employ switching technology Placing camera cables near to these types of devices may cause problems with the camera Attempt to connect all grounds to a single point e g use a single power outlet for the entire system and connect all grounds to the single outlet This will help to avoid large ground loops Large ground loops can be a primary cause of EMI problems Use a line filter on the main power supply Install the camera and camera cables as far as possible from devices gene
193. e power to the camera is 12 VDC 10 to 24 VDC 5 If the voltage is less than 10 8 VDC the camera may operate erratically An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the 12 pin Connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 12 pin connector must have 12 pins Use of a smaller plug such as one with 10 pins or 8 pins can damage the pins in the camera s 12 pin connector 25 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00015119000 Inappropriate Code May Cause Unexpected Camera Behavior The code snippets provided in this manual are included as sample code only Inappropriate code may cause your camera to function differently than expected and may compromise your application To ensure that the snippets will work properly in your application you must adjust them to meet your specific needs and must test them thoroughly prior to use CAUTION The code snippets in this manual are written in C Other programming languages can also be used to write code for use with Basler pylon When writing code you should use a programming language that is both compatible with pylon and appropriate for your application For more information about the programming languages that can be used with Basler pylon see the documentation included with the pylon package Warranty Precautions To ensure that your warranty remains in force Do not remove the camera s serial number label If the label is removed and the serial number ca
194. e rate is 50 fps acquire frames at too high a rate some of the acquisition trigger signals that you apply will be received by the camera when it is not in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status The camera will ignore any acquisition start trigger signals that it receives when it is not waiting for acquisition start trigger This situation is commonly referred to as over triggering the camera If you are triggering frame acquisition with an ExASTrig signal and you attempt to To avoid over triggering you should not attempt to acquire frames at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings For more information about setting the camera for hardware acquisition start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExASTrig signal see Section 9 4 5 2 Basler pilot 125 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 For more information about the electrical requirements for input lines 1 and 2 see Section 7 7 1 For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 9 12 9 6 3 2 Exposure Modes If you are triggering the start of frame acquisition with an externally generated acquisition start trigger ExASTrig signal two exposure modes are available timed and trigger width Timed Exposure Mode When timed mode is selected the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the value of the camera s exposure time paramete
195. e start trigger signal Also maintain the state of the input line at least for one microsecond after the frame start trigger signal has risen Note also that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while the input line changes its state This happened when input line 1 changed its state before the fourth frame start trigger was received see also Figure 60 Basler pilot 235 Features 236 AW00015119000 Make sure not to send a frame start trigger while the input line changes its state During this period the camera will not wait for a frame start trigger and any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame start trigger status see the Acquisition Monitoring Tools section When the next frame start trigger was received the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received input line 1 is found to be high Accordingly another sequence set cycle is started and the parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition As explained above synchronous restart has priority here over the automatic sequence set advance When the next frame start triggers were r
196. e sure not to send a frame start trigger while an input line changes its any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame trigger status see the Acquisiton Monitoring Tools section When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter
197. e user Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger Off Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger Off a trigger signal generated by the camera internally camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger camera is waiting for a frame start trigger frame exposure and readout frame transmission Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed r Acquisition Start i i i i Vt Li Li Trigger Signal Pie eee eee ees ee ee eee ee eee ee eee ee eee 2 BA BH BA BAA B BA Frame Start i Li Li Li Li i i Trigger Signal eia ee eee he ee kh ee ee i Time Fig 42 Use Case 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger Off 136 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Off Frame Start Trigger On Use case two is illustrated on page 138 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on Because the acquisition start trigger is set to off the user does not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera The camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally Because the frame start trigger is set to on the user must apply a frame start trigger signal to the c
198. eamGrabber ResendRequestBatching SetValue 10 Write the ResendTimeout parameter StreamGrabber ResendTimeout SetValue 2 Write the ResendRequestResponseTimeout parameter StreamGrabber ResendRequestResponseTimeout SetValue 2 Write the MaximumNumberResendRequests parameter StreamGrabber MaximumNumberResendRequests SetValue 25 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Note that the performance driver parameters will only appear in the viewer if the performance driver is installed on the adapter to which your camera is connected For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 41 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AW00015119000 Adapter Properties When the Basler Performance driver is installed it adds a set of advanced properties to the network adapter These properties include Max Packet Latency A value in microseconds that defines how long the adapter will wait after it receives a packet before it generates a packet received interrupt Max Receive Inter packet Delay A value in microseconds that defines the maximum amount of time allowed between incoming packets Maximum Interrupts per Second Sets the maximum number of interrupts per second that the adapter will generate Netw
199. eature 166 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Color Creation and Enhancement Camera GammaEnable SetValue true II Set the gamma type to sRGB Camera GammaSelector SetValue GammaSelector_sRGB The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values for user type correction Enable the Gamma feature Camera GammaEnable SetValue true Set the gamma type to User Camera GammaSelector SetValue GammaSelector_User II Set the Gamma value to 1 2 Camera Gamma SetValue 1 2 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 31 Basler pilot 167 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00015119000 10 3 3 Matrix Color Transformation If matrix color transformation is not available activate the Full camera description file For more information see Section 12 21 on page 321 Introduction The main objective of matrix color transformation is to make corrections to the color information that will account for the type of lighting used during image acquisition and to compensate for imperfections in the sensor s color generation process With the matrix color transformation a first matrix transformation step ensures that the pixel values from the sensor are available in RGB color space i e as R G or B component for each pixel A second transformation step takes acco
200. eceived the camera advances to the next sequence sets and uses them for image acquisition in accord with the Always Active sequence control source and as described in the previous use case Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Use Case Operation in controlled sequence advance mode with Always Active as the sequence control source Automatic cycling through the sequence set cycles with two synchronous restarts controlled by input line 1 Setting Sequence Set Total Number 6 Line 1 not set for invert is selected as the source for controlling restart camera is waiting for a frame start trigger y camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set 0 current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated NE frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Enabled Signal Applied to Input Line 1 Restart Sequence Set Cycle Sequence Set Cycle Starts Again Starts Again E al z Frame Start Trigger Signal v v v v v v v v v M 1 A o 1 o 1 A 4 Time Fig 60 Sequencer in Controlled Sequence Advance Mode with Always Active as the Sequence Control Source and Synchronous Restart Controlled by Line 1 12 5 2 2 Operation with an Input Line as Sequence Control Source Operating the Sequencer When the Line 1 or Line 2 sequence control source is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next is controlled acc
201. ed Acquisition Start Trigger Signal WLLL Frame Start Trigger Signal Fig 32 Acquisition Start and Frame Start Triggering Basler pilot 95 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Applying Trigger Signals The paragraphs above mention applying a trigger signal There are two ways to apply an acquisition start or a frame start trigger signal to the camera via software or via hardware To apply trigger signals via software you must first select the acquisition start or the frame start trigger and then indicate that software will be used as the source for the selected trigger signal At that point each time a Trigger Software command is executed the selected trigger signal will be applied to the camera To apply trigger signals via hardware you must first select the acquisition start or the frame start trigger and indicate that input line 1 will be used as the source for the selected trigger signal At that point each time a proper electrical signal is applied to input line 1 an occurrence of the selected trigger signal will be recognized by the camera The Trigger Selector The concept of the trigger selector is very important to understand when working with the acquisition start and frame start triggers Many of the parameter settings and the commands that apply to the triggers have names that are not specific to a particular type of trigger for example the acquisition start trigger has a mode setting and the frame st
202. ed to know the current value of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter and the Bandwidth reserve parameter for each camera 100 Bandwidth Reserved Data Bandwidth Assigned Bandwidth Assigned x 100 Step 6 For each camera compare the data bandwidth needed with the data bandwidth assigned For each camera you should now compare the data bandwidth assigned to the camera as determined in step 4 with the bandwidth needed by the camera as determined in step 3 For bandwidth to be used most efficiently the data bandwidth assigned to a camera should be equal to or just slightly greater than the data bandwidth needed by the camera If you find that this is the situation for all of the cameras on the network you can go on to step 6 now If you find a camera that has much more data bandwidth assigned than it needs you should make an adjustment To lower the amount of data bandwidth assigned you must adjust a parameter called the Inter packet Delay If you increase the Inter packet Delay parameter value on a camera the data bandwidth assigned to the camera will decrease So for any camera where you find that the data bandwidth assigned is much greater then the data bandwidth needed you should do this Raise the setting for the Inter packet delay parameter for the camera Recalculate the data bandwidth assigned to the camera Compare the new data bandwidth assigned to the data bandwidth needed Repeat 1 2 and 3 until the data bandwidth as
203. eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 speed and duplex mode parametet 54 squence set ACCIESS naniesienia aR i 251 SRGB Gamma cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 166 standard factory setup 316 318 319 standard image acquisition control MOE siini nerais 91 standard power and I O cable 67 voltage requirements 0 70 72 startup parameter set 00 317 320 Starup Sel naa iaa A NAIEAN 320 stress test ceceee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeneeeees 21 SUPPO scene NE eS 324 synchronous AAVANCE cececeeeeeeeeeeees 225 synchronous restart cccccceceeeseeeeees 225 T target value 0 ceecseeenteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 270 technical SUPPOMt 00 ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 323 temperature housing 24 339 Index test image selector ceeee 311 test images 311 time delay time base abs parameter 86 time stamp chunk 299 timed exposure mode 006 113 126 timer delay ccc ceeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 86 timer delay abs parameter 06 86 timer delay raw parameter 006 85 timer delay tiMe eceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 85 timer delay time base 86 timer CUratiONn e a one e aR 87 timer duration abs parameter 88 timer duration raw parameter 87 timer duration time base ee 87 timer duration time base abs parameter 87 tim
204. eeree re 53 network switch packet SIZe 0 54 non sequence parameter 223 O optical size of the Sensor 2 4 6 output frame rate cceeeeeeeeeeee 265 output line voltage requirements 75 output lines CONFIQUIING 0 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeees 81 electrical characteristics 0 75 inverter ere 83 FESPONSE t Me cee eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 77 voltage requirements 75 over triggering 112 125 overlapped exposure cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 143 P packet size gamera ogra ia 54 network adapter 54 network switch eeeeeseeeeeeerreereen 54 packet size parameter cee 45 packet timeout parameter 34 39 46 parameter sets explained cece cece eect cece eeeteeeeetee ees 316 parameter sets SAVING ceeee 317 parameters loaded at startup 320 payload size parameter cccceees 45 performance driver cceceeeeeeeeeees 33 pin assignments 64 pin numbering ssesssesssessserrserrrerrrerssees 65 pixel data formats neseno 179 YUV 422 YUYV packed 186 YUV 422 packed n se 186 pixel format parameter 0 cee 180 pixel formats Bayer BG 12 packed 08 197 Bayer BG 16 ccceeseeeereeeeetees 193 Bayer BG 8 ccecsesceeeeeeseneeeeeeeees 189 Bayer GB 12 packed 06 195 Bayer GB Oiri itaenea 191
205. eg e4 172 10 3 5 A Procedure for Setting the Color Enhancements 04 177 10 3 6 The Color Factory Setup 0 000 cc eee 178 11 Pixel Data Formats ieceres noaee ie seid eee eee Gaede Awe ees 179 11 1 Setting the Pixel Data Format 0 0000 ccc eee 179 11 2 Pixel Data Formats for Mono Cameras 0000 cece eee ees 181 11 2 1 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 0 2005 181 11 2 2 Mono 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 16 0 182 11 2 3 Mono 12 Packed Format 0000 tee 184 11 2 4 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 186 11 2 5 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format 020000 186 11 3 Pixel Data Formats for Color Cameras 0 000 0c cee eee 187 11 3 1 Bayer GB 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 187 11 3 2 Bayer BG 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 189 11 3 3 Bayer GB 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 191 11 3 4 Bayer BG 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 193 11 3 5 Bayer GB 12 Packed Format 0000 cece eee 195 11 3 6 Bayer BG 12 Packed Format 0000 cece eee eee 197 11 3 7 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 199 11 3 8 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format 000000 cece eee 201 11 3 9 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 203 Basler
206. elector 81 145 148 150 line source parameter 81 145 148 150 Taos 0 eee 238 line status all CHUNK ceeeeeeeeeeeee 303 line status parameter cceeeeeeeeees 89 LUT luminance lookup table 267 LUT enable parameter 0008 269 LUT index parameter 0 ee 269 LUT SelOCtOM cccceceeeeeet cette teeeees 269 M max frame jitter parameter 05 49 max height parameter 0e 314 max number resend request parameter 39 max width parameter s 314 maximum acquisition frame rate 154 maximum lens thread length 20 mechanical drawings ceeeeeeeees 14 mechanical stress test cceeeeeeeees 21 minimum output pulse width 288 mirror IMAGE eee cece cette eerren 261 missing packet detection cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 35 STATUS Ee t Aa ead rara raat heehee 35 MOES eae a e easeepecteeeses 1 modes of operation of auto functions 271 mono 12 packed pixel format 184 mono 16 pixel format eeee 182 mono 8 pixel format 0 0000 181 203 mounting NOIES ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 17 multiple cameras on a network 52 338 AW00015119000 N network adapter packet size 0 54 Network drivers eseese 33 network parameter 53 network performance ssseees
207. ements of 1 us To set the duration for a timer using an absolute value Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Duration Abs parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Duration Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl Camera TimerDurationAbs SetValue 100 When you use the Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration time the camera accomplishes the setting change by automatically changing the Timer Duration Raw parameter to achieve the value specified by the Timer Duration Abs setting This leads to a limitation that you must keep in mind if you use Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration time That is you must set the Timer Duration Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using the Timer Duration Raw and the current Timer Duration Base parameters For example if the time base was currently set to 50 us you could use the Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration to 50 us 100 us 150 us etc If you read the current value of the Timer Duration Abs parameter the value will indicate the product of the Timer Duration Raw parameter and the Timer Duration Time Base In other words the Timer Duration Abs parameter will indicate the current durat
208. end mechanism For more information about compatible Intel chipsets see the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 The performance driver uses two distinct resend mechanisms to trigger resend requests for missing packets The threshold resend mechanism The timeout resend mechanism The mechanisms are independent from each other and can be used separately However for maximum efficiency and for ensuring that resend requests will be sent for all missing packets we recommend using both resend mechanisms in a specific optimized combination as provided by the parameter default values The performance driver s parameter values determine how the resend mechanisms act and how they relate to each other You can set the parameter values by using the pylon Viewer or from within your application software by using the pylon API The parameter default values will provide for the following The threshold resend mechanism precedes the timeout resend mechanism This ensures that a resend request is sent for every missing packet even at very high rates of arriving packets The timeout resend mechanism will be effective for those missing packets that were not resent after the first resend request We strongly recommend using the default parameter settings Only users with the necessary expertise should change the default parameter values The Basler performance driver uses a re
209. ended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the line status all information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Line Status All parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the line status all chunk run the parser and retrieve the line status all chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Line Status All chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector LineStatusAll Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true Basler pilot 303 Features AW00015119000 retrieve data from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64 t lineStatusAll Camera ChunkLineStatusAll GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For m
210. enough to set bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 3 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 3 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 32 Shifted Three Times A ane Shift by 4 When the camera is set to shift by 4 the output from the camera will include bit 7 through bit 0 from each ADC ADC an bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting four times is that the output of 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 the camera is effectively multiplied by 16 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 8 bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 4 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 4 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 16 Shifted Four Times A ane 216 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 3 3 Precautions When Using Digital Shift There are several checks and precautions that you must follow before using the digital shift feature The checks and precautions differ depending on whether the camera will be set for a 12 bit pixel format or for an 8 bit pixel format in your appl
211. ents a After the camera sends an event message it waits for an acknowledgement If no acknowledgement is received within a specified timeout the camera will resend the event message If an acknowledgement is still not received the timeout and resend mechanism will repeat until a specified maximum number of retries is reached If the maximum number of retries is reached and no acknowledge has been received the message will be dropped During the time that the camera is waiting for an acknowledgement no new event messages can be transmitted 4 Event Reporting involves some further software related steps and settings to be made For more information see the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit 308 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features The Event Queue As mentioned in the example above the camera has an event queue The intention of the queue is to handle short term delays in the camera s ability to access the network and send event messages When event reporting is working smoothly a single event will be placed in the queue and this event will be sent to the PC in an event message before the next event is placed in the queue If there is an occasional short term delay in event message transmission the queue can buffer several events and can send them within a single event message as soon as transmission time is available However if you are operating the camera at high frame rates with a sma
212. er s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 306 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 16 8 Sequence Set Index The Sequence Set Index chunk adds a chunk to each acquired frame containing the index number of the sequence set that was used for frame acquisition The sequencer feature must be enabled before you can enable the sequence set index feature For more information about the sequencer feature see the Sequencer section feature or any of the other chunk features Making the chunk mode inactive The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the sequence set index disables all chunk features To enable the sequence set index chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Sequence Set Index chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the sequence set index chunk is enabled the camera will add a sequence set index chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser that is included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the sequence set index information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Sequence Set Index parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your
213. er Settable Output Lines The User Output Value All parameter is a 32 bit value As shown in Figure 29 the lowest four bits of the parameter value will set the state of the user settable outputs If a bit is 0 it will set the state of the associated output to low If a bit is high it will set the state of the associated port to high 82 Basler pilot AW00015119000 O Control Sets user output 4 state Sets user output 3 state Sets user output 2 state Sets user output 1 state 34 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 1817 16 15 14 13 12 14 10 9 8 7 J 5 4 3 2 1 0 Not used LSB Fig 29 User Output Value All Parameter Bits To set the state of multiple user settable output lines Use the User Output Value All parameter to set the state of multiple user settable outputs You can set the User Output Value All parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter Camera UserOutputValueAll SetValue 0x3 int64 t currentOutputState Camera UserOutputValueAl1l GetValue If you have the invert function enabled on an output line that is designated as user settable the user setting sets the state of the line before the inverter 8 2 3 Setting an Output Line for Invert You can set each individual output line to invert or not to invert the outgoing signal To set the invert function on an output l
214. er delays a valid signal between its arrival at the camera and its transfer The duration of the delay will be determined by the debouncer value Figure 73 illustrates how the debouncer filters out invalid input signals i e signals that are shorter than the debouncer value The diagram also illustrates how the debouncer delays a valid signal Unfiltered arriving signals Debouncer l T T l l debouncer value l l Transferred valid signal l I delay TIMING CHARTS ARE NOT DRAWN TO SCALE Fig 73 Filtering of Input Signals by the Debouncer 286 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features The debouncer value is determined by the value of the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter value The parameter is set in microseconds and can be set in a range from 0 to approximately 1 s To set a debouncer Use the Line Selector to select the camera input line for which you want to set the debouncer input line1 or 2 Set the value of the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter You can set the Line Selector and the value of the Line Debouncer Abs parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the input line Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Linel Set the parameter value to 100 microseconds Camera LineDebouncerTimeAbs SetValue 100 For detailed information about u
215. er selector ceeeeeeeeeeeees 84 85 87 88 timer trigger source parametet 84 transition threshold 72 73 transmission start delay 08 151 trigger delay c cc cccsceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 290 acquisition start legacy mode 129 frame start standard mode 115 trigger input counter chunk 0 300 FESCL cua EE h ds aad 302 trigger ready signal 115 127 146 trigger width exposure mode 115 127 U USE case diagrams ccceeeeeeeees 134 227 user configuration Set eee 317 user Output Selector seese 82 user output value parameter 06 82 V ventilatio Maassa eaa i aa 24 vertical DINNING eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eeen 257 ACCANTO ST 31 W Wight miesanie a aeann enie 3 5 7 white balance ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 164 SOUliG asies ie arana Eta 164 white balance auto see balance white auto write timeout parameter s 43 340 AW00015119000 Y YUV 422 YUYV packed pixel data format sne seeen erene 186 YUV 422 YUYV packed pixel format cccceceeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 201 YUV 422 data range eee 200 YUV 422 packed pixel data format 186 YUV 422 packed pixel format 199 Basler pilot
216. er technical support to get a copy of the exact camera parameters that you were using when the problem occurred To make note of the parameters use Basler s pylon Viewer tool If you cannot access the camera please try to state the following parameter settings J7 Image Size AOI Pixel Format Exposure Time r J7 Packet Size r r Frame Rate 11 Live image test image If you are having an image problem try to generate and save live images that show the problem Also generate and save test images Please save the images in BMP format zip them and send them to Basler technical support Basler pilot 325 Troubleshooting and Support AW00015119000 326 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Revision History Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00015101000 9 Feb 2007 Preliminary version of the document AW00015102000 22 Feb 2007 Updated the camera weight and operating temperature range This is still a preliminary version AW00015103000 24 May 2007 First release covering production cameras AW00015104000 8 June 2007 Modified Section 2 for the installation of the Basler pylon software version 1 0 AW00015105000 19 July 2007 Integrated the Kodak KAI 2093 sensor Minor corrections throughout the manual Added information on IP30 in Section 1 2 Added warning not to remove the serial number in Section 1 9 Updated times in Section 7 7 3 Removed note
217. era will execute an Acquisition Stop command internally and will no longer be able to acquire frames To acquire another frame you must execute a new Acquisition Start command If the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter is set for continuous frame after an Acquisition Start command has been executed frame acquisition can be triggered as desired Each time a frame trigger is applied while the camera is in a waiting for frame trigger acquisition status the camera will acquire and transmit a frame The camera will retain the ability to acquire frames until an Acquisition Stop command is executed Once the Acquisition Stop command is received the camera will no longer be able to acquire frames Setting the Acquisition Mode and Issuing Start Stop Commands You can set the Acquisition Mode parameter value and you can execute Acquisition Start or Acquisition Stop commands from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The code snippet below illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode parameter value and to execute an Acquisition Start command Note that the snippet also illustrates setting several parameters regarding frame triggering These parameters are discussed later in this chapter Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode SingleFrame Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource
218. es As mentioned in the previous section you can designate one or more of the user output lines as user settable Once you have designated an output line as user settable you can use camera parameters to set the state of the line Setting the State of a Single User Settable Output Line To set the state of a single user settable output line Use the User Output Selector to select the output line you want to set For example if you have designated output line 3 as user settable you would select user settable output 3 Set the value of the User Output Value parameter to true high or false low This will set the state of the selected line You can set the Output Selector and the User Output Value parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to designate output line 3 as user settable and setting the state of the output line Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Out3 Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource UserOutput Camera UserOutputSelector SetValue UserOutputSelector UserOutput3 Camera UserOutputValue SetValue true bool currentUserOutput3State Camera UserOutputValue GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Setting the State of Multiple Us
219. es and columns in the sensor and not to the physical lines in the sensor as they normally would Normally the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter settings for an Auto For more information about the concept of a virtual sensor see Section 12 6 1 on page 259 You can select an Auto Function AOI and set the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values for the Auto Function AOI from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to select an Auto Function AOI and to get the maximum allowed settings for the Width and Height parameters The code snippets also Basler pilot 275 Features AW00015119000 illustrate setting the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values As an example Auto Function AOI is selected Select the appropriate auto function AOI for gain auto and exposure auto control Currently auto function AOI 1 is predefined to gather the pixel data needed for gain auto and exposure auto control Set Camera Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue 0 Camera Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Camera the position and size of the auto function AOI AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue 0 AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax
220. es the starting column for the Auto Function AOI The value of the Y Offset parameter determines the starting line for the Auto Function AOI The value of the Width parameter determines the width of the Auto Function AOI The value of the Height parameter determines the height of the Auto Function AOI When you are setting an Auto Function AOI you must follow these guidelines The sum of the X Offset setting plus the Width setting must not exceed the width of the camera s sensor For example on the piA640 21gm0 the sum of the X Offset setting plus the Width setting must not exceed 648 The sum of the Y Offset setting plus the Height setting must not exceed the height of the camera s sensor For example on the piA640 210gm the sum of the Y Offset setting plus the Height setting must not exceed 488 The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters can be set in increments of 1 and Height parameters for an Auto Function AOI in increments of 2 to make the Auto Function AOI match the Bayer filter pattern of the sensor For example you should set the X Offset parameter to 0 2 4 6 8 etc On color cameras we strongly recommend setting the X Offset Y Offset Width Function AOI refer to the physical columns and lines in the sensor But if binning is enabled monochrome cameras only these parameters are set in terms of virtual columns and lines i e the settings for an Auto Function AOI will refer to the binned lin
221. eset by signal on input line 1 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Linel select reset by signal on input line 2 Basler pilot 297 Features AW00015119000 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Line2 select reset by software Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Software execute reset by software Camera CounterReset Execute disable reset Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Off For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 298 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 16 4 Time Stamp The Time Stamp feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing a time stamp that was generated when image acquisition was triggered The time stamp is a 64 bit value The time stamp is based on a counter that counts the number of time stamp clock ticks generated by the camera The unit for each tick is 8 ns as specified by the Gev Timestamp Tick Frequency The counter starts at camera reset or at power off on any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive disables all chunk The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the time stamp feature or features To enable the time stamp chunk Use the Chunk Selector
222. eter setting You can execute the White Balance Reset command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to execute the command Reset the white balance adjustments Camera BalanceWhiteReset Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily execute the command For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 31 For more information about the Light Source Selector parameter setting see Section 10 3 3 on page 168 Basler pilot 165 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00015119000 10 3 2 Gamma Correction The gamma correction feature lets you modify the brightness of the pixel values output by the camera s sensor to account for a non linearity in the human perception of brightness There are two modes of gamma correction available on the camera sRGB gamma and User gamma sRGB Gamma When the camera is set for sRGB gamma correction it automatically sets the gamma correction to adjust the pixel values so that they are suitable for display on an SRGB monitor If you will be displaying the images on an sRGB monitor using this type of gamma correction is appropriate If you select SRGB gamma the value is set to approximately 0 42 User Gamma With User type gamma correction you can set the gamma correction value as desired To accomplish the correction a gamma correction value y is applied to the brigh
223. expires and a third resend request for packet 1002 is sent to the camera The camera still does not respond with a resend 10 Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 11 Because the maximum number of resend requests has been sent and the last Resend Response Timeout interval has expired packet 1002 is now considered as lost 12 End of the frame 13 Missing packets at the end of the frame 2999 and 3000 14 Interval defined by the Packet Timeout parameter 1 1 38 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters Maximum Number Resend Requests The Maximum Number Resend Requests parameter sets the maximum number of resend requests the performance driver will send to the camera for each missing packet Resend Timeout The Resend Timeout parameter defines how long in milliseconds the performance driver will wait after detecting that a packet is missing before sending a resend request to the camera The parameter applies only once to each missing packet after the packet was detected as missing Resend Request Response Timeout The Resend Request Response Timeout parameter defines how long in milliseconds the performance driver will wait after sending a resend request to the camera before considering the resend request as lost If a resend request for a missing packet is considered lost and if the maximum number of resend requests as set by the Maximum Number Resend Requests parameter has
224. exposure time for each captured frame ExFSTrig Signal Period Exposure ExFSTrig Signal Fig 36 Trigger Width Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering When you operate the camera in trigger width exposure mode you must also use the camera s exposure time parameters to set an exposure time This parameter setting will be used by the camera to operate the Trigger Ready signal You should adjust the exposure setting to represent the shortest exposure time you intend to use For example assume that you will be using trigger width exposure mode and that you intend to use the ExFSTrig signal to vary the exposure time in a range from 3000 us to 5500 us In this case you would use the exposure setting to set the exposure time to 3000 us For more information about the Trigger Ready signal see Section 9 10 3 on page 146 For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 131 9 5 3 3 Frame Start Trigger Delay The trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay in microseconds that will be applied between the receipt of a hardware frame start trigger and when the trigger will become effective The trigger delay will not operate if the Trigger Mode parameter for frame start is set to off or if you are using a software frame start trigger For more information about the trigger delay feature and how to use it see Section 12 14 on page 290 Basler pilot 115 Image Acquisition C
225. f O_ TH X i PASERI E HH 8 Hpilot ASALA S QS O 44 a 85 3 a 86 7 p 98 5 17 5 Photosensitive surface of the sensor nz e CoS O a N 2 x M3 4 5 deep 9 7 pS 80 2 Fig 11 Mechanical Dimensions in mm Basler pilot 2 x M3 3 5 deep 15 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00015119000 1 5 1 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy The sensor positioning accuracy is as shown in the drawings below X 04 0 25 Y 0 0 25 Oo ra j Q Q To the length Center lines of the housing Center lines of the sensor of the thread ig OZ This is the sensor tilt tolerance It applies to every point on the photosensitive surface and is relative to the center of the die th 2 1 i Photosensitive Q JS QO surface of the h 4 ia sensor iY Y O N 0 17 57 9 9 This tolerance is for the distance between the front of the 5J lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive surface Note that this tolerance and the sensor tilt tolerance see above must be combined to obtain the total tolerance for every point on the photosensitive surface
226. f it in the color hexagon will also be affected to some degree For example when you adjust red yellow and magenta will also be affected When you are making hue and saturation adjustments it is a good idea to start by concentrating on one line in the color chart Once you have the colors in a line properly adjusted you can move on to each of the other lines in turn Basler pilot 177 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00015119000 misadjust the color adjustment settings and not be able to bring them back into proper adjustment You can easily recover from this situation by using the camera s color adjustment reset command see page 176 When you first start working with the color enhancement tools it is easy to badly Another way to recover is to make the cameras color factory setup the default configuration set and then to load the default configuration set into the camera s active set See the next section for more information about the camera s color factory setup 10 3 6 The Color Factory Setup When a camera leaves the factory it contains several factory setups stored in its permanent memory A factory setup is simply a collection of settings for the parameters needed to operate the camera Each one of the factory setups is optimized to make the camera perform well in a particular situation One of the setups is known as the color factory setup and the parameter settings contained in the color fact
227. fi es dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique Life Support Applications These products are not designed for use in life support appliances devices or systems where malfunction of these products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury Basler customers using or selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Basler for any damages resulting from such improper use or sale Warranty Note Do not open the housing of the camera The warranty becomes void if the housing is opened All material in this publication is subject to change without notice and is copyright Basler AG Contacting Basler Support Worldwide Europe Basler AG An der Strusbek 60 62 22926 Ahrensburg Germany Tel 49 4102 463 515 Fax 49 4102 463 599 support europe baslerweb com Americas Basler Inc 855 Springdale Drive Suite 203 Exton PA 19341 U S A Tel 1 610 280 0171 Fax 1 610 280 7608 support usa baslerweb com Asia Basler Asia Pte Ltd 8 Boon Lay Way 03 03 Tradehub 21 Singapore 609964 Tel 65 6425 0472 Fax 65 6425 0473 support asia baslerweb com www baslerweb com AW00015119000 Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 000000eee 1 1 Models eria eim way dd ed eae a didn wun hd id aaa Manis Ni ee aaeei 1 1 2 General Specifications 0 0 00 0c
228. for the second line transmitted pixel zero and pixel one will be red and green respectively Since the pattern of the Bayer filter is fixed you can use this information to determine the color of all of the other pixels in the image Bayer BG alignment means that pixel zero and pixel one of the first line in each image transmitted will be blue and green respectively And for the second line transmitted pixel zero and pixel one will be green and red respectively Since the pattern of the Bayer filter is fixed you can use this information to determine the color of all of the other pixels in the image Because the size and position of the area of interest on color cameras must be adjusted in increments of 2 the color filter alignment will remain the same regardless of the camera s area of interest AOI settings The Pixel Color Filter parameter indicates the current alignment of the camera s Bayer filter to the pixels in the images captured by a color camera You can tell how the current AOI is aligned to the Bayer filter by reading the value of the Pixel Color Filter parameter For more information about the camera s AOI feature see Section 12 4 on page 219 160 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 1 2 Pixel Data Formats Available on Cameras with a Bayer Filter Bayer Formats Cameras equipped with a Bayer pattern color filter can output pixel data in the Bayer GB 8 or Bayer BG 8 pixel data output format t
229. g edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger Falling Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter must be set to continuous 100 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control By default input line 2 is selected as the source signal for the acquisition start trigger Keep in mind that the camera will only react to acquisition start triggers when it is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 93 and Section 9 4 on page 99 9 4 2 Acquisition Frame Count Standard Mode When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on you must set the value of the camera s Acquisition Frame Count parameter The value of the Acquisition Frame Count can range from 1 to 255 With acquisition start triggering on the camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When in this acquisition status the camera cannot react to frame start trigger signals If an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start tr
230. g when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 2048 Basler pilot 213 Features AW00015119000 Shift by 2 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the output from the camera will include bit 9 through bit 0 ADC from each ADC along with 2 zeros as LSBs bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 The result of shifting twice is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied by 4 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the 2 least significant bits output from the camera for each B Shifted Twice pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 4th gray value for example 4 8 12 16 20 and so on If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 2 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 2 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 1024 Shift By 3 When the camera is set to shift by 3 the output from the camera will include bit 8 ADC through bit O from each ADC along with 3 bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit zeros as LSBs 1 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 10 The result of shifting 3 times is that the output of the camera is effectively
231. ger Signal Received Trigger Signal Received Frame Acquisition ge e Sf Exposure Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 33 Frame Acquisition with a Software Frame Start Trigger When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the frame rate will be determined by how often you apply a software trigger signal to the camera and you should not attempt to trigger frame acquisition at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed for the current camera settings There is a detailed explanation about the maximum allowed frame rate at the end of this chapter Software frame start trigger signals that are applied to the camera when it is not ready to receive them will be ignored Section 9 5 2 2 on page 111 includes more detailed information about applying a software frame start trigger to the camera using Basler pylon For more information about exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 131 For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 9 12 on page 154 110 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 5 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software frame start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the
232. ger ready signal can be selected to act as the source signal for e g output line 1 Selecting a source signal for the output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the trigger ready output signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Outl Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource TriggerReady You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 8 2 1 on page 81 For more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera s output lines see Section 7 7 2 on page 75 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 9 1 on page 91 9 10 4 Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal Standard Mode Only The acquisition trigger wait signal is only available when the image acquisition control is set to standard mode For more information about image acquisition control and setting the mode see Section 9 1 on page 91 As you are acquiring frames the camera automatically monitors the acquisition start tri
233. gger status and supplies a signal that indicates the current status The Acquisition Trigger Wait signal will go high whenever the camera enters a waiting for acquisition start trigger status The signal will go low when an external acquisition start trigger ExASTrig signal is applied to the camera and the camera exits the waiting for acquisition start trigger status The signal will go high again when the camera again enters a waiting for acquisition trigger status and it is safe to apply the next acquisition start trigger signal If you base your use of the ExASTrig signal on the state of the acquisition trigger wait signal you can avoid acquisition start overtriggering i e applying an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera when it is not in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status If you do apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera when it is not ready to receive the signal it will be ignored and an acquisition start overtrigger event will be reported 148 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Figure 50 illustrates the Acquisition Trigger Wait signal with the Acquisition Frame Count parameter set to 3 and with exposure and readout overlapped The figure assumes that the trigger mode for the frame start trigger is set to off so the camera is internally generating frame start trigger signals Acq Trigger Wait Signal ExASTrig Signal Frame Acqui
234. ggerDelay us 1000 0 Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay us Set for the timed exposure mod Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Set th xposure tim Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute Frame acquisition will start when the externally generated frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig signal goes high The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and execute the commands related to hardware frame start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode and the trigger mode for the acquisition start trigger set to off We will use the trigger width exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s 116 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with external frame start tr
235. ging sensor When the camera is set for a pixel format that outputs pixel data at 12 bit bit bit opi DR bit Ee pit bit Dit pit effective depth by default the camera transmits the 12 bits that are output from each ADC ADC B No Shift B Shift by 1 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the output from the camera will include bit 10 through bit 0 from ADC each ADC along with a zero as an LSB bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting once is that the output of the 9 8 7 65432 1 0 camera is effectively multiplied by 2 For example assume that the camera is set for no shift that it is viewing a uniform white target and that under these B 5 conditions the reading for the brightest pixel is 100 lt Shifted Once If you changed the digital shift setting to shift by 1 the reading would increase to 200 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the least significant bit output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that no odd gray values can be output and that the gray value scale will only include values of 2 4 6 8 10 and so on This absence of some gray values is commonly referred to as missing codes If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 1 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 1 settin
236. gnal to the camera In this case we have set the acquisition start trigger signal source to input line 1 and the activation to rising edge so an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 will serve as the acquisition start trigger signal The Acquisition Frame Count parameter has been set to 3 When a rising edge of the electrical signal is applied to input line 1 the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Once the camera has acquired 3 frames it will re enter the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Before any more frames can be acquired a new rising edge must be applied to input line 1 to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the frame start trigger is set to off the user does not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera The camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally The rate at which the frame start trigger signals will be generated is normally determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter If the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is disabled the camera will acquire frames at the maximum allowed frame rate This type of camera setup is used frequently in intelligent traffic systems With these systems a typical goal is to acquire several images of a car as it passes throug
237. gned so that they reflect the lower bandwidth needs You can lower the data bandwidth needed by a camera either by lowering its frame rate or by decreasing the size of the area of interest AOI Once you have adjusted the frame rates and or AOI settings on the cameras you should repeat steps 2 through 6 For more information about the camera s maximum allowed frame transmission rate see Section 9 12 on page 154 For more information about the AOI see Section 12 4 on page 219 Basler pilot 57 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00015119000 58 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Camera Functional Description 6 Camera Functional Description This chapter provides an overview of the camera s functionality from a system perspective The overview will aid your understanding when you read the more detailed information included in the later chapters of the user s manual 6 1 Overview Each camera provides features such as a full frame shutter and electronic exposure time control Exposure start exposure time and charge readout can be controlled by parameters transmitted to the camera via the Basler pylon API and the GigE interface There are also parameters available to set the camera for single frame acquisition or continuous frame acquisition Exposure start can also be controlled via an externally generated hardware trigger ExTrig signal The ExTrig signal facilitates periodic or non periodic acquisition st
238. h a toll booth A sensing device is usually placed at the start of the toll booth area When a car enters the area the sensing device applies an electrical signal to input line 1 on the camera When the electrical signal is received on input line 1 it serves as an acquisition start trigger signal and the camera exits from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enters a waiting for frame trigger acquisition status In our example the next 3 frame start trigger signals internally generated by the camera would result in frame acquisitions At that point the number of frames acquired would be equal to the setting for the Acquisition Frame Count parameter The camera would return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and would no longer react to frame start trigger signals It would remain in this condition until the next car enters the booth area and activates the sensing device This sort of setup is very useful for traffic system applications because multiple frames can be acquired with only a single acquisition start trigger signal pulse and because frames will not be acquired when there are no cars passing through the booth this avoids the need to store images of an empty toll booth area For more information about the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 9 5 1 1 on page 107 and for information about setting the parameter see Section 9 5 1 3 on page 109 Basler pilot 139 Im
239. has two modes off and on If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera The rate at which the camera will generate the signals and acquire frames will be determined by the way that you set several frame rate related parameters If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on you must trigger frame start by applying frame start trigger signals to the camera Each time a trigger signal is applied the camera will begin a frame exposure When frame start is being triggered in this manner it is important that you do not attempt to trigger frames at a rate that is greater than the maximum allowed There is a detailed explanation about the maximum allowed frame rate at the end of this chapter Frame start trigger signals applied to the camera when it is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status will be ignored camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal frame exposure and readout N frame transmission a frame start trigger signal that will be ignored because the camera is not in a waiting for frame start trigger status Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting 3 Acquisition Acquisition Start top Command Command Executed Execut
240. he Bayer GB 16 or Bayer BG 16 format and the Bayer GB 12 Packed or Bayer BG 12 Packed format When a color camera is set for one of these pixel data output formats the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way For each pixel covered with a red portion of the filter you get 8 or 12 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green portion of the filter you get 8 or 12 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue portion of the filter you get 8 or 12 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output For complete details of these pixel data output formats see Section 11 1 on page 179 and Section 11 3 on page 187 RGB Format For complete details of the pixel data output format see YUV Formats All color cameras with a Bayer filter can output pixel data in YUV 4 2 2 Packed format or in YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed format When a color camera is set for either of these formats each pixel in the captured image goes through a two step conversion process as it exits the sensor and passes through the camera s electronics This process yields Y U and V color information for each pixel In the first step of the process a demosaicing algorithm is performed to get RGB data for each pixel This is required because color cameras with a Bayer filter on the sensor gather only one color of light for each individual pixel The second step of the process is to convert the RGB information
241. he camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame trigger status see the Acquisiton Monitoring Tools section When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be low and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be low and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 3 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is
242. he camera parameters to get the best image quality with this scenario you are adjusting all parameters in the active set Set the Sequence Set Executions parameter The available numbers range from 1 to 256 Execute the Sequence Set Store command to copy the sequence parameter values currently in the active set into the selected sequence set Any already existing parameter values in the sequence set will be overwritten 9 Repeat the above steps starting from step 4 for the other sequence sets Configuring Sequence Sets and Advance Control Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for configuring sequence sets from within your application software The following code snippet gives example settings It illustrates using the API to set the auto sequence advance mode set the total number of sequence sets to 2 set the numbers of consecutive sequence set executions and populate sequence sets 0 and 1 by storing the sequence parameter values from the active set in the sequence sets Disable the sequencer featur Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false Set the Auto sequence advance mode Camera SequenceAdvanceMode SetValue SequenceAdvanceMode Auto Set the total number of sequence sets Camera SequenceSetTotalNumber SetValue 2 Select sequence set with index number 0 Basler pilot 231 Features AW00015119000 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 0 Set up the fi
243. he pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference Basler pilot 299 Features AW00015119000 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 12 16 5 Trigger Input Counter The Trigger Input Counter feature numbers external image acquisition triggers sequentially as they are received When the feature is enabled a chunk is added to each image containing the related value of the trigger input counter The trigger input counter is a 32 bit value On the first counting cycle the counter starts at 1 and increments by 1 for each received trigger The counter counts up to 4294967295 unless it is reset before see below After having reached the maximum value the counter will continue counting starting at 0 Be aware that if the camera is operating in continuous frame mode free run the trigger input counter will not be available feature or any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the trigger input counter disables all chunk features To enable the trigger input counter chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Trigger Input Counter chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the trigger input counter chunk is enabled the camera will add a trigger input counter chunk
244. her sequence set cycle has started When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used While frame exposure and readout are in progress the sequencer feature is disabled The complete frame is transmitted and the cycling through sequence sets is terminated The sequencer parameter values in the active set return to the values that existed before the sequencer feature was enabled Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Use Case Operation in controlled sequence advance mode with Disabled sequence control source Cycling through the sequence set cycles only due to one asynchronous advance and one asynchronous restart Enabling and disabling of the sequencer feature Setting Sequence Set Total Number 6 asynchronous advance AsyncAdvance command delay between sending the advance command and it becoming effective V asynchronous restart AsyncRestart command delay between sending the restart command and it becoming effective camera is waiting for a frame start trigger v camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set 0 current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequencer Enabled Disabled Sequence Set Cycl g V Starts Again Za zal
245. hite balance must be correct transformation we nonetheless strongly recommend to also use color matrix Although color adjustment can be used without also using color matrix transformation to make full use of the camera s color enhancement capabilities See Section 10 3 3 on page 168 for more information about color matrix transformation The RGB Color Space The RGB color space includes light with the primary colors red green and blue and all of their combinations When red green and blue light are combined and when the intensities of R G and B are allowed to vary independently between 0 and 100 all colors within the RGB color space can be formed Combining colored light is referred to as additive mixing When two primary colors are mixed at equal intensities the secondary colors will result The mixing of red and green light produces yellow light Y the mixing of green and blue light produces cyan light C and the mixing of blue and red light produces magenta light M When the three primary colors are mixed at maximum intensities white will result In the absence of light black will result The color space can be represented as a color cube see Figure 53 on page 173 where the primary colors R G B the secondary colors C M Y and black and white define the corners All shades of gray are represented by the line connecting the black and the white corner For ease of imagination the color cube
246. iate ExASTrig signal is applied to line 1 e g a rising edge of the signal for rising edge triggering the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the number of frame start trigger signals received by the camera is equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When a new ExASTrig signal is applied to line 1 the 104 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control camera will again exit from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status For more information about setting the camera for hardware acquisition start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExASTrig signal see Section 9 4 5 2 For more information about the electrical requirements for input lines 1 and 2 see Section 7 7 1 on page 72 9 4 5 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware acquisition start triggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values required to enable rising edge
247. ication If you will be using a 12 bit pixel format make this check Use the pylon Viewer or the pylon API to set the camera for a 12 bit pixel format and no digital shift Check the output of the camera under your normal lighting conditions and note the readings for the brightest pixels If any of the readings are above 2048 do not use digital shift If all of the readings are below 2048 you can safely use the shift by 1 setting If all of the readings are below 1024 you can safely use the shift by 1 or 2 settings If all of the readings are below 512 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 or 3 settings If all of the readings are below 256 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 3 or 4 settings If you will be using an 8 bit format make this check Use the pylon Viewer or the pylon API to set the camera for a 8 bit pixel format and no digital shift Check the output of the camera under your normal lighting conditions and note the readings for the brightest pixels If any of the readings are above 128 do not use digital shift If all of the readings are below 128 you can safely use the shift by 1 setting If all of the readings are below 64 you can safely use the shift by 1 or 2 settings If all of the readings are below 32 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 or 3 settings If all of the readings are below 16 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 3 or 4 settings 12 3 4 Enabling and Setting Digital Shift You can enable
248. ications Requirements and Precautions Specification piA2400 17gm gc Size L x W x H standard housing 86 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 98 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 90 head housing 104 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without front module or connectors 110 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with front module and connectors Weight standard housing 220 g typical 90 head housing 240 g typical Conformity CE FCC RoHS GenlCam GigE Vision IP30 Table 3 General Specifications Basler pilot 7 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW000151 19000 1 3 Spectral Response for Mono Cameras The following graphs show the spectral response for each available monochrome camera model The spectral response curves exclude lens characteristics and light source characteristics 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 Absolute Quantum Efficiency 0 1 0 0 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 Wave Length nm Fig 1 piA640 210gm Spectral Response 8 Basler pilot AW00015119000 0 50 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 0 45 0 40 0 35 0 30 0 25 0 20 0 15 Absolute Quantum Efficiency 0 10 0 05 0 00 300 400 500 600 700 Wave Length nm Fig 2 piA1000 48gm and piA1000 60gm Spectral Respo
249. igger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the camera has received a number of frame start trigger signals equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting it will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status At that point you must apply a new acquisition start trigger signal to exit the camera from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 101 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 9 4 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters Standard Mode You can set the Trigger Mode and Trigger Source parameters for the acquisition start trigger and also set the Acquisition Frame Count parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode to on the Trigger Source to software and the Acquisition Frame Count to 5 Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the sour
250. igger in legacy mode 118 active configuration Set ceeee 316 ACTIVE SC ee cceceee tees eeeeeetettetenneeeteaees 223 see active configuration set additive MIXING cece eects 172 adjustment damping gray value eeee ce eeeeeeesteeetteeeeeeeees 281 advance ASYNCNLONOUS ke eeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 SYNCHRONOUS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 AOI see area of interest APIa SP oh cathe e a a AS 32 area of interest auto function AOI seseeeeeeeeeeeeneen 270 OXPlAINGO iiitide dinaan 219 Setting ea ae races 220 using with binning 259 area of interest auto functions OXPIAINGO terii isr eniin iae essaiera 272 asynchronous advance cceeeeeeeees 225 asynchronous restart eeens 225 auto FUNCTION cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeteees 270 using with binning 271 auto function AOI explained cece ceeceectteeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 270 SOUING sete hivieietinetll a 275 auto function profile c cceee 282 Basler pilot Index auto functions modes of operation ee 271 auto functions factory setup 316 318 auto sequence set advance mode 228 averaging effect on acquisition frame rate 265 explained He feesfevehetasheushonledetabekbernteged 264 output frame rate n se eeen 265 SUING ecstschecse torch eresthiateass Satseeceeeenets 266 B balance white auto 283 bandwidth assigned parameter 46
251. igger signals Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false Select the frame start trigger m Camera Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger a Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel w Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge m Camer w riggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation Rising Set for the trigger width exposure mode Camer w ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode TriggerWidth Set the shortest exposure time the shortest exposure time we plan to use is 1500 us Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 1500 Prepare for frame acquisition here Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished riggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Edge Frame acquisition will start each time the externally generated frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig signal goes high Retrieve the captured frames Camera AcquisitionStop Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 117 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 9 6 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Legacy Mode This section only applies if the legacy mode is enabled for
252. iggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Basler pilot 123 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Set for the timed exposure mod Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Set th xposure tim Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a Trigger Software command to apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera Camera TriggerSoftware Execute Retrieve acquired frame here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to AcquisitionStart executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 124 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 6 3 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 9 6 3 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parame
253. ight 1 xC C Height 1 xC C Where AOI Height the height of the acquired frames as determined by the AOI settings The constants C4 and C gt depend on the camera model as shown in the table below Cy C2 piA640 210gm gc 8 76 us 511 57 us piA1000 48 gm gc 13 39 us 7403 21 us piA1000 60gm gc 12 92 us 3627 58 us piA1600 35 gm gc 19 56 us 4756 52 us piA1900 32 gm gc 0 00 us 31218 19 us piA2400 17 gm gc 20 94 us 15385 07 us Note The maximum frame rate of the piA1900 32gm gc is limited to 32 fps Formula 2 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the exposure time for the acquired frames 1 Max Frames s ________ Exposure time in us C Where The constant C3 depends on the camera model as shown in the table below C3 piA640 210gm gc 30 us piA1000 48 gm gc 62 us piA1000 60gm gc 59 us piA1600 35 gm gc 61 us piA1900 32 gm gc 84 us piA2400 17 gm gc 37 us For more information about setting the exposure time see Section 9 7 on page 131 156 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Formula 3 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the frame transmission time Device Current Throughput Parameter Value Max Frames s Zevce Vurrent throughput Farameter value Payload Size Parameter Value formula in the Averaging section which may permit a higher maximum When the averaging feature is used the
254. ignal J Wei Se cee GO a ae Meee ee ene ere Looe See ee oe ee So ele eee Time Fig 44 Use Case 3 Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger Off 140 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 4 Acquisition Start and Frame Start Triggers Both On Use case four is illustrated on page 142 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on Because the acquisition start trigger mode is set to on the user must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera In this case we have set the acquisition start trigger signal source to software so the execution of an acquisition trigger software command will serve as the acquisition start trigger signal The Acquisition Frame Count parameter is set to 3 When an acquisition trigger software command is executed the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Once the camera has acquired 3 frames it will re enter the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Before any more frames can be acquired a new acquisition trigger software command must be executed to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the frame start
255. ile takes more time than processing the Basic camera description file Accordingly processing the Basic camera description file requires a shorter period to elapse until the camera features are available for use In order to make the camera features sooner available after the initial start of the camera the camera is configured by the factory to process the Basic camera description file Therefore some features will initially not be available If you want to use any of the features that are initially not available you must activate the camera description file providing all features If you will only use the smaller feature set we recommend not to change the factory setting to make the camera features sooner available For more information particularly about activating a camera description file and about the features not provided by the smaller camera description file see Section 12 21 on page 321 Basler pilot 29 Software and Hardware Installation AW00015119000 30 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters 3 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters This chapter explains the options available for changing the camera s parameters The available options let you change parameters either by using stand alone tools that access the camera via a GUI or by accessing the camera from within your software application 3 1 The pylon Viewer The Basler pylon Viewer is a standalone application that lets
256. ilot 251 Features AW00015119000 252 state During this period the camera will not wait for a frame start trigger and Make sure not to send a frame start trigger while an input line changes its any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame trigger status see the Acquisition Monitoring Tools section When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 1 and 2 Because the states have not changed the parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 1 and 2 The states of both input lines are found to be low This corresponds to the address of sequence set 0 Accordingly sequence set 0 is selected The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 1 and 2 Input line 1 is found to be low and input line 2 is found to be high This corresponds to the address of sequence set 2 Accordingly sequence set 2 is selected The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition The sequence sets for the next five frame start triggers are selected and used
257. image acquisition are performed according to the selected sequence advance mode The selection of a sequence set as the current set is always linked to the frame start trigger signals unless software commands are used see below Accordingly a sequence advance mode provides a scheme for advancing from one sequence set to the next as frames are triggered The following sequence advance modes are available Auto Sequence set advance is automatically controlled by the camera The camera will cycle through the available sequence sets in ascending sequence set index number as frames are triggered Individual sequence sets can be used consecutively After one sequence set cycle is complete another one will start automatically Controlled Sequence set advance is controlled by a source that can be selected The available sources are automatic control by the camera the always active setting an input line or the disabled setting allowing sequence set advance only by software commands The camera will cycle through the available sequence sets in ascending sequence set index number as frames are triggered After one sequence set cycle is complete another one will start automatically Free selection Sequence set advance by selecting sequence sets at will from the available sequence sets The selection is controlled by the states of the input lines The regular cycling through the sequence sets according to the Auto or Controlled advance modes can b
258. ime period you do not trigger image acquisition You delay triggering acquisition for the period of time that would normally be needed to acquire and transmit a single image The current camera settings would allow 5 resends to occur during this period of time But since no data is transmitted no resends are required The 5 resends that could have occurred are added to the accumulator pool and they bring the pool up to 9 8 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period but no resends are needed The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are not needed so they are added to the accumulator pool and they bring the pool up to 14 9 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period and 1 resend is needed The 1 resend needed is taken from the resends available via the bandwidth reserve The other 4 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are not needed so they are added to the accumulator pool Note that with the current settings the accumulator pool can only hold a maximum of 15 resends So the pool is now 15 Frame Max Jitter read only If the Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation parameter is set to a high value the camera can experience a large burst of data resends during transmi
259. imum Possible Exposure Time On all camera models you can obtain the maximum possible exposure time 10000000 us by setting the Exposure Time Raw parameter value to 1 and the Exposure Time Base Abs parameter value to 10000000 us Changing the Exposure Time Base By default the Exposure Time Base is fixed at 20 us and the exposure time is normally adjusted by setting the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter However if you require an exposure time that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter alone the Exposure Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the exposure time base The Exposure Time Base Abs parameter value sets the exposure time base in us The exposure time base can be changed in 1 us increments and the default is 20 us You can set the Exposure Time Raw and Exposure Time Base parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Camera ExposureTimeRaw SetValue 100 Camera ExposureTimeBaseAbs SetValue 200 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 132 B
260. in factory setup 316 318 horizontal binning 257 horizontal mirror image n 261 housing 90 heades aii aackaw ds 1 17 SLANG AMG si2hiecccsiaacirialinthos Stes sosehonens 1 14 PUGS id fc aa lt O ahs 173 hue adjustment ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 174 Numidia lees tee add 24 l image acquisition control mode 91 IGQaCY siete A E es 91 SLANG Ar irsini eioen 91 image distortion ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 259 image property target value ce eeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeees 270 input lines CONFIQUIING iieii iit 79 electrical characteristics 0 74 INVEMON eo e a a aeai 80 voltage requirements 2 72 73 installation hardware esssesssesresrrerrrerrrerrressreee 29 SOf WATE 0 se eeeececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeees 29 integrate enabled signal 008 145 inter packet delay 0 0 00 34 39 53 inverter input lines 0 0 eee eect eee teeeeeees 80 output lines ooo eee eect tees eeeeeees 83 IP configuration tool ceeeeeeteee 31 IP SO 8 aan Genes Beat 14 17 337 Index IR cut filter eects 11 20 163 J jumbo frames eee eect eeee eee teeteeeeeeteeeees 54 jumbo packets 54 L LEDS 2s s isvectealasissseieeis anataenn aiani 63 66 legacy image acquisition control mode 91 lens adapter ee eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 2 4 6 lens thread length eese 20 line inverter parameter 000 80 83 line s
261. index number 0 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 0 Load the sequence parameter values from the sequence set into the active set Camera SequenceSetLoad Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 250 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 5 3 Free Selection Sequence Advance Mode When the free selection sequence advance mode is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next as frame start triggers are received does not adhere to a specific preset sequence The sequence sets can be selected at will using the states of input lines The states of the input lines set the sequence set addresses These correspond to the sequence set index numbers and accordingly the related sequence set is selected For details about selecting sequence sets via the sequence set address see the Selecting Sequence Sets section The states of two input lines are checked if more than two sequence sets are available The states of one input line is checked when only two sequence sets are available The Sequence Set Total Number parameter specifies the total number of different sequence sets that are available The maximum number is 4 12 5 3 1 Operation Operating the Sequencer The following use case see also Figure 64 illustrates the operation of the sequencer in free selection sequence advance mode In this use case the Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to four
262. ine Use the Line Selector to select an output line Set the value of the Line Inverter parameter to true to enable inversion on the selected line and to false to disable inversion You can set the Line Selector and the Line Inverter parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Enable the inverter on output line 1 Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Outl Camera LineInverter SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 83 1 O Control AW00015119000 8 2 4 Working with Timers The camera has four timer output signals available Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 and Timer 4 As shown in Figure 30 each timer works as follows A trigger source event occurs that starts the timer A delay period begins to expire When the delay expires the timer signal goes high and a duration period begins to expire When the duration period expires the timer signal goes low Duration lt _ _____ __ gt Delay f Trigger source event occurs Fig 30 Timer Signal Currently the only trigger source event available
263. ing the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens in the sensor s Bayer filter you get 12 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens in the filter you get 12 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens in the filter you get 12 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 10 1 1 on page 160 The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer GB 12 Packed output The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line P the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line Bo the first byte of data for a line Bm the last byte of data for a line Even Lines Byte Data Bo Green value for Pg bits 11 4 B Blue value for P4 bits 3 0 Green value for Pg bits 3 0 Bo Blue value for P4 bits 11 4 B3 Green value for P3 bits 11 4 B4 Blue value for P3 bits 3 0 Green value for P3 bits 3 0 Bs Blue value for P3 bits 11 4 Be Green value for P4 bits 11 4 B7 Blue value for Ps bits 3 0 Green value for P4 bits 3 0 Bg Blue value for Ps bits 11 4 e e
264. ing edge triggering In this example we will use a trigger delay Set the acquisition mode to single frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode SingleFrame Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger m Camera riggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger a Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge anl Camera riggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set the trigger delay for one millisecond 1000us Ims 0 001s double TriggerDelay us 1000 0 Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay us Set for the timed exposure mod Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Set th xposure tim Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute Frame acquisition will start when the externally generated acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig signal goes high Basler pilot 129 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and execute the commands related to hardware acquisition start triggering with the camera
265. ing the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter values Payload Size int64 t payloadSize Camera PayloadSize GetValue GevStreamChannelSelector Camera GevStreamChannelSelector SetValu GevStreamChannelSelector StreamChannelO PacketSize Camera GevSCPSPacketSize SetValue 1500 Inter packet Delay Camera GevSCPD SetValue 1000 Frame transmission Delay Camera GevSCFTD SetValue 1000 Bandwidth Reserve Camera GevSCBWR SetValue 10 50 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation Camera GevSCBWRA SetValue 10 Frame Jitter Max int64 t jitterMax Camera GevSCFJM GetValue Device Max Throughput int64 t maxThroughput Camera GevSCDMT GetValue Device Current Throughput int64 t currentThroughput Camera GevSCDCT GetValue Resulting Framerate double resultingFps Camera ResultingFrameRateAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 51 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00015119000 5 2 Managing Bandwidth When Multiple
266. ion red will be replaced by gray for red colors in the image 174 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Color Creation and Enhancement Color Adjustment Parameters The initial parameter that you must consider when working with the color adjustment feature is the Processed Raw Enable parameter If you are working with a camera that is set to output pixel data in one of the Bayer formats then the Processed Raw Enabled parameter must be set to enabled if you want to use color enhancement The camera will then be able to perform color enhancements on the raw RGB data from the sensor and still be able to output the pixel data in one of the Bayer formats If the camera is set for one of the Bayer pixel data output formats and the Processed Raw Enable parameter is not set to enabled the matrix color transformation feature and the color adjustment feature will have no effect on the camera operation The Processed Raw Enable parameter is not relevant if the camera is set to a color pixel data output format other than a Bayer format e g to a YUV output format You can enable or disable the color adjustment feature by setting the value of the Color Adjustment Enable parameter to true or false You can use the Color Adjustment Selector parameter to select a color to adjust The colors you can select are red yellow green cyan blue and magenta You can use the Color Adjustment Hue parameter to set the hue for the selected color as a floating point val
267. ion 9 4 on page 99 Referring to the use case diagrams that appear in Section 9 8 on page 134 can help you understand the explanations of the frame start trigger 106 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 5 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode The main parameter associated with the frame start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger has two available settings off and on 9 5 1 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Off When the Frame Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to off the camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera With the trigger mode set to off the way that the camera will operate the frame start trigger depends on the setting of the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to single frame the camera will automatically generate a single frame start trigger signal whenever it receives an Acquisition Start command If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame the camera will automatically begin generating frame start trigger signals when it receives an Acquisition Start command The camera will continue to generate frame start trigger signals until it receives an Acquisition Stop command The rate at which the frame start trigger signals are generated may be determined by the camera s Acquisition Fra
268. ion time setting You should also be aware that if you change the duration time using the raw settings the Timer Duration Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new duration time 88 Basler pilot AW00015119000 O Control 8 3 Checking the State of the I O Lines 8 3 1 Checking the State of a Single Output Line You can determine the current state of an individual output line To check the state of a line Use the Line Selector parameter to select an output line Read the value of the Line Status parameter to determine the current state of the selected line A value of true means the line s state is currently high and a value of false means the line s state is currently low You can set the Line Selector and read the Line Status parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and read the parameter value Select output line 2 and read the state Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Out2 bool outputLine2State Camera LineStatus GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 8 3 2 Checking the State of All Lines You can determine the current state of
269. ions describing the individual auto functions pertinent camera settings and with the general circumstances used for capturing A target value for an image property can only be reached if it is in accord with all images Otherwise the target value will only be approached For example with a short exposure time insufficient illumination and a low setting for the upper limit of the gain parameter value the Gain Auto function may not be able to achieve the current target average gray value setting for the image 270 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features only An auto function uses the binned pixel data and controls the image property You can use an auto function when binning is enabled monochrome cameras of the binned image For more information about binning see Section 12 6 on page 257 12 10 1 1 Modes of Operation The following auto function modes of operation are available All auto functions provide the once mode of operation When the once mode of operation is selected the parameter values are automatically adjusted until the related image property reaches the target value After the automatic parameter value adjustment is complete the auto function will automatically be set to off and the new parameter value will be applied to the following images The parameter value can be changed by using the once mode of operation again by using the continuous mode of operation or by man
270. it receives an Acquisition Stop command The rate at which the acquisition start trigger signals are generated will be determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter If the parameter is not enabled the camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals at the maximum rate allowed with the current camera settings If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value less than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals at the rate specified by the parameter setting If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value greater than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals at the maximum allowed frame rate For information about setting the Acquistion Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 9 6 1 3 on page 121 in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 93 and Section 9 4 on page 99 Keep in mind that the camera will only react to acquisition start triggers when it is Basler pilot 119 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Exposure Time Control with the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s ex
271. it 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 1 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 1 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 128 Basler pilot 215 Features AW00015119000 Shift by 2 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the output from the camera will include bit 9 through bit 2 from each ADC ADC The result of shifting twice is that the output of the 7 Say bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit camera is effectively multiplied by 4 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 2 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 2 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 64 Shifted Twice wor Shift by 3 When the camera is set to shift by 3 the output from the camera will include bit 8 through bit 1 from each ADC ADC a bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting three times is that the output of 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 the camera is effectively multiplied by 8 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high
272. ity with daylight lighting The factory setups are saved in permanent files in the camera s non volatile memory They are not lost when the camera is reset or switched off and they cannot be changed You can select one of the four factory setups to be the camera s default set Instructions for selecting which factory setup will be used as the default set appear later in the Configuration Sets section Note that your selection of which factory setup will serve as the default set will not be lost when the camera is reset or switched off When the camera is running the default set can be loaded into the active set The default set can also be designated as the startup set i e the set that will be loaded into the active set whenever the camera is powered on or reset Instructions for loading the default set into the active set and for designating which set will be the startup set appear later in the Configuration Sets section 316 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features User Sets As mentioned above the active configuration set is stored in the camera s volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off The camera can save most of the settings from the current active set to a reserved area in the camera s non volatile memory A configuration set that has been saved in the non volatile memory is not lost when the camera is reset or switched off There are three reserved areas in the camera s n
273. ixel Two types of binning are available vertical binning and horizontal binning With vertical binning adjacent pixels from 2 lines 3 lines or a maximum of 4 lines in the imaging sensor array are summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel Figure 65 illustrates vertical binning Vertical Binning by 2 Vertical Binning by 3 Vertical Binning by 4 aloo Gogg boo a en a oe ST i ss A a ee aan va J cnagan Co Go CoO coga Co GOEOEGUGD Goo Fig 65 Vertical Binning With horizontal binning adjacent pixels from 2 columns 3 columns or a maximum of 4 columns are summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel Figure 66 illustrates horizontal bin ning Horizontal Binning by 2 Horizontal Binning by 3 Horizontal Binning by 4 Booo Bolol Bolol olloa Hii
274. known as the Macbeth chart Load the color factory setup into the work set The color factory setup has daylight 6500 settings For information on the color factory setup see Section 10 3 6 on page 178 Begin capturing images and check the basic image appearance Set the exposure time and gain so that you are acquiring good quality images It is important to make sure that the images are not over exposed Over exposure can have a significant negative effect on the fidelity of the color in the acquired images Adjust the white balance An easy way to set the white balance is to use the once function on the camera s Balance White Auto feature Set the gamma value You should set the value to match the gamma on the monitor you are using to view acquired images When gamma is set correctly there should be a smooth transition from the lightest to the darkest gray scale targets on your color chart The sRGB gamma preset will give you good results on most CRT or LCD monitors Examine the colors and see if they are satisfactory at this point If not chose a different setting for the Light Source Selector parameter Try each mode and determine which one gives you the best color results Readjust the white balance The color fidelity should now be quite good If you want to make additional changes adjust the hue and saturation by using the color adjustment feature Keep in mind that when you adjust a color the colors on each side o
275. l AW00015119000 9 5 The Frame Start Trigger in Standard Mode This section only applies if the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 9 1 on page 91 The frame start trigger is used to begin frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status it will begin a frame acquisition each time it receives a frame start trigger signal Note that in order for the camera to be in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The Acquisition Mode parameter must be set correctly A proper Acquisition Start command must be applied to the camera A proper acquisition start trigger signal must be applied to the camera if the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on For more information about the Acquisition Mode parameter and about Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands see Section 9 2 on page 93 and Section 9 3 on page 97 For more information about the acquisition start trigger and about the acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 93 and Sect
276. lable sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Basler pilot 233 Features AW00015119000 Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger is received the camera automatically advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 3 are used for the image acquisition and so on Note that the camera has cycled once through the complete sequence set cycle when sequence set 5 was used With the next frame start trigger a new sequence set cycle starts where sequence set 0 is used After the sequencer feature is disabled the cycling through sequence sets is terminated The sequencer parameter values in the active set return to the values that existed before the sequencer feature was enabled Use Case Operation in contr
277. le 16 Minimum and Maximum Allowed Total Gain Settings If for example the piA640 210 gm gc camera is set for a pixel data format that yields 8 bit effective pixel depth Mono 8 YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed The Gain Raw All value can be set in a range from 0 to 500 The Gain Raw Tap 1 value can be set in a range from 0 to 500 The Gain Raw Tap 2 value can be set in a range from 0 to 500 The sum of the Gain Raw All setting plus the Gain Raw Tap 1 setting must be between 0 and 500 inclusive The sum of the Gain Raw All setting plus the Gain Raw Tap 2 setting must be between 0 and 500 inclusive 208 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features If for example the piA640 210 gm gc the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields an effective pixel depth of 12 bits per pixel Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed The Gain Raw All value can be set in a range from 0 to 400 The Gain Raw Tap 1 value can be set in a range from 0 to 400 The Gain Raw Tap 2 value can be set in a range from 0 to 400 The sum of the Gain Raw All setting plus the Gain Raw Tap 1 setting must be between 0 and 400 inclusive The sum of the Gain Raw All setting plus the Gain Raw Tap 2 setting must be between 0 and 400 inclusive For normal operation we recommend that you set the value of Gain Raw Tap 1 and Gain Raw Tap 2 to zero and that you simply use Gain Raw All to set the gain Typically the tap gains are only used if you want to adjust
278. led The advance from one sequence set to the next is only controlled by AsyncAdvance software commands The Sequence Set Total Number parameter specifies the total number of different sequence sets that are available and included within a sequence set cycle The maximum number is 64 12 5 2 1 Operation with the Always Active Sequence Control Source Operating the Sequencer When the Always Active sequence control source is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next proceeds automatically in ascending sequence set index numbers as frame start triggers are received The following use case see also Figure 59 illustrates the operation of the sequencer in controlled sequence advance mode with Always Active selected as the sequence control source As images are captured continuously the camera advances automatically with no action by the user from one sequence set to the next in ascending sequence set index numbers After one sequence set cycle is complete another one starts sequence advance mode when each sequence set is used only once per This way of operating the sequencer feature is similar to operating it in auto sequence set cycle Here however the first sequence set used for image acquisition after the sequencer feature was enabled is sequence set 1 as opposed to sequence set 0 in auto sequence advance mode In this use case the Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the avai
279. ler Technical Support To help you as quickly and efficiently as possible when you have a problem with a Basler camera it is important that you collect several pieces of information before you contact Basler technical support Copy the form that appears on the next two pages fill it out and fax the pages to your local dealer or to your nearest Basler support center Or you can send an e mail listing the requested pieces of information and with the requested files attached Basler technical support contact information is shown in the title section of this manual 1 The camera s product ID 2 The camera s serial number 3 Network adapter that you use with the camera 4 Describe the problem in as much detail as possible If you need more space use an extra sheet of paper 5 If known what s the cause of the problem 6 When did the problem occur r After start I While running After a certain action e g a change of parameters 324 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Troubleshooting and Support 7 How often did does the problem fr Once fr Every time occur fr Regularly when Occasionally when 8 How severe is the problem Camera can still be used E Camera can be used after take this action Camera can no longer be used 9 Did your application ever run r Yes fr No without problems 10 Parameter set It is very important for Basl
280. limits for luminance control Camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector All Camera AutoGainRawLowerLimit SetValue Camera GainRaw GetMin Camera AutoGainRawUpperLimit SetValue Camera GainRaw GetMax Set target value for luminance control This is always expressed by an 8 bit value regardless of the current pixel format i e 0 gt black 255 gt white Camera AutoTargetValue SetValue 128 Set mode of operation for gain auto function Camera GainAuto SetValue GainAuto Once For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For general information about auto functions see Section 12 10 on page 270 For information about Auto Function AOls and how to set them see Section 12 10 1 2 on page 272 278 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 10 3 Exposure Auto Exposure Auto is an auto function and the automatic counterpart to manually setting an absolute exposure time The exposure auto function automatically adjusts the Exposure Time Abs parameter value within set limits until a target average gray value for the pixel data from Auto Function AOI1 is reached In contrast to the manually set absolute exposure time the automatically adjusted absolute exposure time and the settable limits for parameter value adjustment a
281. livery from the factory the image acquisition control will be in legacy mode If you want the camera to start in standard mode set the camera to standard mode see below save the current parameter settings as a user set and designate this user set as the startup set Basler pilot 91 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 For more information about saving parameter settings as a user set and about working with user sets see Section 12 20 on page 316 Setting the Image Acquisition Control Mode You can set the image acquisition control mode from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the image acquisition control mode to standard mode and to legacy mode respectively Camera TriggerControlImplementation TriggerControlImplementation Standard Camera TriggerControlImplementation TriggerControlImplementation Legacy For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the image acquisition control mode For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 92 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 2 Means for Controlling Image Acquisition in Standard Mode This section assumes that the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control In principl
282. ll AOI the camera may be able to generate and queue events faster than they can be transmitted and acknowledged In this case The queue will fill and events will be dropped An event overrun will occur 3 Assuming that you have event overrun reporting enabled the camera will generate an event overrun event and place it in the queue 4 As soon as transmission time is available an event message containing the event overrun event will be transmitted to the PC The event overrun event is simply a warning that events are being dropped The notification contains no specific information about how many or which events have been dropped Basler pilot 309 Features AW00015119000 Setting Your System for Event Reporting Event reporting must be enabled in the camera and some additional software related settings must be made This is described in the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit Event reporting must be specifically set up for each type of event using the parameter name of the event and of the supplementary information The following table lists the relevant parameter names Event Event Parameter Name Supplementary Information Parameter Name AcquisitionStart AcquisitionStartEventData AcquisitionStartEventStreamChannellndex AcquisitionStartEventTimestamp Acquisition Start AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventData AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventStreamChannellndex Overtrigger
283. llow LED that indicate the state of the network connection A 12 pin receptacle used to provide access to the camera s I O lines and to provide power to the camera The drawing below shows the location of the two connectors and the LEDs 12 pin Receptacle Green LED Yellow LED Fig 22 Camera Connectors and LED Basler pilot 63 Physical Interface AW00015119000 7 2 7 2 1 Connector Pin Assignments and Numbering 12 pin Receptacle Pin Assignments The 12 pin receptacle is used to access the two physical input lines and four physical output lines on the camera It is also used to supply power to the camera The pin assignments for the receptacle are shown in Table 5 Pin Designation Camera Power Gnd Camera Power Gnd I O Input 1 I O Input 2 1 0 Input Gnd 1 0 Output 1 I O Output 2 Camera Power VCC O MAINIDI a BR JN Camera Power VCC oO I O Output VCC O Output 3 12 O Output 4 Table 5 Pin Assignments for the 12 pin Receptacle Pins 1 and 2 are tied together inside of the camera Pins 8 and 9 are tied together inside of the camera To avoid a voltage drop when there are long wires between your power suppy and the camera we recommend that you provide camera power VCC through separate wires between your p
284. load on the network Accordingly the number of image acquisitions that may occur between sending the software command and it becoming effective can not be predicted Using the sequencer feature with Disabled sequence control source is therefore not suitable for real time applications it may however be useful for testing purposes The delay between sending an AsyncAdvance or an AsyncRestart software We strongly recommend not to use the sequencer feature with Disabled sequence control source for real time applications The following use case see also Figure 63 illustrates the operation of the sequencer in controlled sequence advance mode with Disabled selected as the sequence control source Sequence set advance proceeds in ascending sequence set index numbers subject to asynchronous advance commands After one sequence set cycle is complete another one starts Sequence set cycle restarts are subject to asynchronous restart commands In this use case the Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the available sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the a
285. lookup table Use the LUT Index parameter and LUT value parameters to set other table values as desired Use the LUT Enable parameter to enable the table You can set the LUT Selector the LUT Index parameter and the LUT Value parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter values Select the lookup table Camera LUTSelector SetValue LUTSelector Luminance Write a lookup table to the device The following lookup table causes an inversion of the sensor values bright gt dark dark gt bright for int i 0 i lt 4096 i 8 Camera LUTIndex SetValue i Camera LUTValue SetValue 4095 i Enable the lookup table Camera LUTEnable SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 269 Features AW00015119000 12 10 Auto Functions The auto functions feature will not work if the sequencer feature is enabled For more information about the sequencer feature see Section 12 5 on page 222 12 10 1 Common Characteristics Auto functions control image properties and are the automatic counter
286. lue from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Enable vertical binning by 2 Camera BinningVertical SetValue 2 Enable horizontal binning by 4 Camera BinningHorizontal SetValue 4 Disable vertical and horizontal binning Camera BinningVertical SetValue 1 Camera BinningHorizontal SetValue 1 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 258 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 6 1 Considerations When Using Binning Increased Response to Light Using binning can greatly increase the camera s response to light When binning is enabled ac quired images may look overexposed If this is the case you can reduce the lens aperture reduce the intensity of your illumination reduce the camera s exposure time setting or reduce the camera s gain setting Reduced Resolution Using binning effectively reduces the resolution of the camera s imaging sensor For example the sensor in the piA640 210gm camera normally has a resolution of 648 H x 488 V If you set this camera to use horizontal binning by 3 and vertical binning by 3 the effective resolution of the sensor is reduced to 216 H by 162 V Note that the 488 pixel vertical dime
287. mat The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera P the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bo the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Low byte of brightness value for Pg B4 High byte of brightness value for Po B2 Low byte of brightness value for P4 B3 High byte of brightness value for P4 B4 Low byte of brightness value for P3 Bs High byte of brightness value for P2 Be Low byte of brightness value for P3 B7 High byte of brightness value for P3 Bg Low byte of brightness value for P4 Bo High byte of brightness value for P4 e e e Bm 7 Low byte of brightness value for P 3 Bm 6 High byte of brightness value for Pp 3 Bm 5 Low byte of brightness value for Ph 2 Bm 4 High byte of brightness value for Ph 2 Bm 3 Low byte of brightness value for P _4 Bm 2 High byte of brightness value for P 4 Bret Low byte of brightness value for P Bm High byte of brightness value for Ph 182 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats When the camera is set for Mono 16 the pixel data output is 16 bit data of the unsigned short little endian type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below Note that for 16 bit data you might expect a value range from 0x0000 to OxFFFF However with the camera set for M
288. me the maximum possible acquisition frame rate for a given AOI cannot be achieved To determine the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with your current camera settings you can read the value of the camera s Resulting Frame Rate parameter This parameter indicates the camera s current maximum allowed frame rate taking into account the AOI exposure time bandwidth settings and whether the averaging feature is enabled For more information about the acquisition mode see Section 9 3 on page 97 For more information about AOI settings see Section 12 4 on page 219 For more information about the Resulting Frame Rate parameter see Section 5 1 on page 45 For more information about the averaging feature see Section 12 8 on page 264 154 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Increasing the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate You may find that you would like to acquire frames at a rate higher than the maximum allowed with the camera s current settings In this case you must first use the three formulas described below to determine which factor is restricting the maximum frame rate the most Next you must try to make that factor less restrictive You will often find that the sensor readout time is most restrictive factor Decreasing the AOI height for the acquired frames will decrease the sensor readout time and will make this factor less restrictive If you are using normal exposure times and you are using th
289. me Rate Abs parameter If the parameter is not enabled the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the maximum rate allowed with the current camera settings If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value less than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the rate specified by the parameter setting If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value greater than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the maximum allowed frame rate For information about setting the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 9 5 1 3 on page 109 waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status For more information about the Keep in mind that the camera will only react to frame start triggers when it is in a acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 93 and Section 9 4 on page 99 Basler pilot 107 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Exposure Time Control with the Frame Start Trigger Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the value of the camera s Exposure Time Abs parameter For more information about the camera s Exposure Time Abs parameter see Section 9 7 on page 131 9 5 1 2 Frame Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter f
290. mits parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the feature whose factory limits will be disabled Camera ParameterSelector SetValue ParameterSelector Gain Disable the limits for the selected featur Camera RemoveLimits SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Note that the disable parameter limits feature will only be available at the guru viewing level For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 285 Features AW00015119000 12 12 Debouncer The debouncer feature aids in discriminating between valid and invalid input signals and only lets valid signals pass to the camera The debouncer value specifies the minimum time that an input signal must remain high or remain low in order to be considered a valid input signal We recommend setting the debouncer value so that it is slightly greater than the longest expected duration of an invalid signal Setting the debouncer to a value that is too short will result in accepting invalid signals Setting the debouncer to a value that is too long will result in rejecting valid signals Note that the debounc
291. mode The trigger delay can be applied to the acquisition start trigger parameter is set to off the camera will generate all acquisition start trigger The trigger delay will not operate if the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode signals internally or if you are using a software acquisition start trigger The trigger delay can be applied to the frame start trigger set to off the camera will generate all frame start trigger signals internally or The trigger delay will not operate if the Frame Start Trigger Mode parameter is if you are using a software frame start trigger Legacy mode The trigger delay can be applied to the acquisition start trigger parameter is set to off the camera will generate all acquisitiion start trigger The trigger delay will not operate if the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode signals internally or if you are using a software acquisition start trigger You can set the Trigger Delay Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values Standard mode Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector Acquisition Start Trigger delay double TriggerDelay us 1000 0 1000us lms 0 001s Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay us Select the frame start trigger Camera Trigger
292. multiplied lea Ll S S by 8 B Shifted Three Times B When the camera is set to shift by 3 the 3 least significant bits output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 8th gray value for example 8 16 24 32 and so on If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 3 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 3 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 512 Shift By 4 When the camera is set to shift by 4 the output from the camera will include bit 7 ADC through bit 0 from each ADC along with 4 bee hk Rie ead ef os wena de pe zeros as LSBs a i frre Shifted Four Times E The result of shifting 4 times is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied by 16 M S B l lt 214 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features When the camera is set to shift by 4 the 4 least significant bits output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 16th gray value for example 16 32 48 64 and so on If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 8 bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we re
293. n t be read from the camera s registers the warranty is void Do not open the camera housing Do not open the housing Touching internal components may damage them Keep foreign matter outside of the camera Be careful not to allow liquid flammable or metallic material inside of the camera housing If operated with any foreign matter inside the camera may fail or cause a fire Avoid Electromagnetic fields Do not operate the camera in the vicinity of strong electromagnetic fields Avoid electrostatic charging Transport Properly Transport the camera in its original packaging only Do not discard the packaging Clean Properly Avoid cleaning the surface of the camera s sensor if possible If you must clean it use a soft lint free cloth dampened with a small quantity of high quality window cleaner Because electrostatic discharge can damage the sensor you must use a cloth that will not generate static during cleaning cotton is a good choice 26 Basler pilot AW000151 19000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions To clean the surface of the camera housing use a soft dry cloth To remove severe stains use a soft cloth dampened with a small quantity of neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use solvents or thinners to clean the housing they can damage the surface finish Read the manual Read the manual carefully before using the camera Basler pilot 27 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW0001
294. n 12 20 on page 316 Removed the statement that settings for frame transmission delay and inter packet delay are not saved in the user sets in Section 12 20 on page 316 Added Section 13 1 on page 323 describing how to obtain an RMA number 330 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00015117000 4 Mar 2011 Updated European and U S phone numbers and U S contact address Integrated the piA1000 60gm gc Updated the power consumption for the piA2400 12 in Section 1 2 on page 2 Indicated the availability of programming languages other than C for use with pylon in Section 1 9 on page 25 Added information about the relationship between the packet timeout and the inter packet delay in Section 4 1 on page 34 Section 4 2 on page 35 and Section 5 1 on page 45 Added information about the payload and non payload portion of the packet size in Section 5 1 on page 45 Changed the maximum allowed current for an output circuit to 50 mA in Section 7 7 2 2 on page 75 Modified input line assignment to take account of standard and legacy modes in image acquisition control in Section 8 1 1 on page 79 Added the Acquisition Trigger Wait signal to Section 8 2 1 on page 81 Re wrote Section 9 on page 91 to describe acquisition start trigger and frame start trigger and to take account of standard and legacy modes in image acquisition control Indicated that the maximum possible
295. n API pylon Viewer Sequence Parameters Set by the Current Set Sequence Load Store Enable Sequence SetQ _______ Sequence Set 1 gt Sequence Set 2 __ _ __ Sequence SetN Sequence Sequence Set Advance Mode _ Index Number Fig 57 Sequence Feature Block Diagram Basler pilot 223 Features AW00015119000 The following parameters are included in each sequence set Exposure Time Digital Shift Enable Acquisition Frame Rate LUT Enable Acquisition Frame Rate Color Transformation Value Width Color Transformation Matrix Factor Height Color Adjustment Enable X Offset Color Adjustment Hue Y Offset Color Adjustment Saturation Center X Chunk Mode Active Center Y Chunk Enable Binning Horizontal Timer Delay Binning Vertical Timer Duration Pixel Format Timer Delay Timebase Test Image Timer Duration Timebase Gain Sequence Set Executions Processed Raw Enable Black Level This parameter is individually available for timer 1 timer 2 timer 3 and timer 4 This parameter is only available in auto sequence advance mode Sequence Set Configuration Before the sequencer feature can be used you must populate the sequence sets with the parameter values of the sequence parameters and store the sequence sets in the camera s memory Each sequence set is identified by a sequence set index number starting from zero After storing the sequence sets ar
296. n Auto Function AOI must be set separately from the AOI used to define the size of captured images the image AOI You can specify a portion of the sensor array and only the pixel data from the specified portion will be used for auto function control An Auto Function AOI is referenced to the top left corner of the sensor array The top left corner is designated as column 0 and row 0 as shown in Figure 71 The location and size of an Auto Function AOI is defined by declaring an X offset coordinate a width a Y offset coordinate and a height For example suppose that you specify the X offset as 14 the width as 5 the Y offset as 7 and the height as 6 The area of the array that is bounded by these settings is shown in Figure 71 Only the pixel data from within the area defined by your settings will be used by the related auto function Column 012 3 45 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Row 0 Offset o No OF O N gt Auto Function Area of Interest Height Image Area of Interest X Offset Fig 71 Auto Function Area of Interest and Image Area of Interest
297. n BR Sone ie Moe dS Oe 66 7 4 Cabling Requirements 00 000 c cee eee 67 4 1 Ethernet Cables icyan oeie riia a n eae heb a snag Wad dae 67 7 4 2 Standard Power and I O Cable 0 00000 cece eee 67 7 4 3 PLC Power and I O Cable nuanua anaana ee 69 7 5 Camera Power 0 0 000 eee 70 7 6 Ethernet GigE Device Information 00 00 eee 71 7 7 Input and Output Lines nassaan annaa 72 Taler AMPULLINGS tc oes ee i thatch eR age E ad a Ea Caden ob laid 72 7 7 1 1 Voltage Requirements 0000 0c e eee 72 TEUZ Line Schematic 23 seve eka tao eet eee ee ee ee ha be 74 0 2 Output Lines lt 2 aces kan Deedee elo eS ee eR ee hare wd a 75 7 7 2 1 Voltage Requirements 000 ccc eee 75 7 7 2 2 Line Schematic 0 0 200000 c cee 75 7 7 3 Output Line Response Time 0000 cee eee 77 amp VO COntrol 2M pate oe Bo ee ee Pan OE oe See eS Pe ee eens 79 8 1 Configuring Input Lines 0 0 0 0 eee 79 8 1 1 Assigning an Input Line to Receive a Hardware Trigger Signal 79 8 1 2 Using an Unassigned Input Line to Receive a User Input Signal 80 8 1 3 Setting an Input Line for Invert 0 0 2 0 0 eee eee 80 8 2 Configuring Output Lines 0 0020 ee 81 8 2 1 Assigning a Camera Output Signal to a Physical Output Line 81 8 2 2 Setting the State of User Settable Output Lines 82
298. n your application software The following code snippet illustrates enabling and disabling the sequencer The example assumes that sequence sets were previously configured and are currently available in the camera s memory Enable the sequencer featur Camera SequenceEnable SetValue true Basler pilot 253 Features AW00015119000 Disable the sequencer featur Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Selecting Sequence Sets Each sequence set is identified by a sequence set index number starting from zero The states of the input lines select between the sequence sets by setting the big endian sequence set addresses The addresses are simply the binary expressions of the sequence set index numbers A maximum of four sequence sets can be used Sequence Set Address Related Sequence Set Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 Sequence Set 0 0 1 Sequence Set 1 1 0 Sequence Set 2 1 1 Sequence Set 3 Table 17 Sequence Set Addresses and Related Sequence Sets The Sequence Set Total Number parameter specifies the total number of sequence sets that will be available The parameter also specifies the length of the settable sequence set address If the Sequence Set Total Number parameter is set to two Bit 0 of the binary sequence set index number see Table 17 can be set When the bit is set to 0 sequence se
299. nd API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Comparing Counter Chunk Data When comparing trigger input counter data and frame counter data related to the same image be aware that the trigger input counter initially starts at 1 whereas the frame counter starts at 0 Therefore the trigger input count will always be ahead of the matching frame count by one if both counters were started at the same time and if an image was acquired for every trigger Whenever the counters restart after having reached 4294967295 they will both start another counting cycle at 0 Accordingly the difference between matching counts will always be one regardless of the number of counting cycles Note that if both counters were started at the same time and not reset since and if the trigger input counter is ahead of the matching frame counter by more than one the camera was overtriggered and not all external triggers resulted in frame acquisitions Basler pilot 301 Features AW00015119000 Trigger Input Counter Reset Whenever the camera is powered off the trigger input counter will reset to 0 During operation you can reset the trigger input counter via I O input 1 I O input 2 or software and you can disable the reset By default the trigger input counter reset is disabled To use the trigger input counter reset Configure the
300. nformation about the Balance White Auto function see Section 12 10 6 on page 283 When you are using matrix color transformation and you set the Light Source Selector parameter to match your light source characteristics the camera will automatically make adjustments to the white balance settings so that they are best suited for the light source you selected For more information about matrix color transformation see Section 10 3 3 on page 168 With the white balancing scheme used on these cameras the red intensity green intensity and blue intensity can be individually adjusted For each color a Balance Ratio parameter is used to set the intensity of the color If the Balance Ratio parameter for a color is set to a value of 1 the intensity of the color will be unaffected by the white balance mechanism If the ratio is set to a value lower than 1 the intensity of the color will be reduced If the ratio is set to a value greater than 1 the intensity of the color will be increased The increase or decrease in intensity is proportional For example if the balance ratio for a color is set to 1 2 the intensity of that color will be increased by 20 The balance ratio value can range from 0 00 to 15 9844 But you should be aware that if you set the balance ratio for a color to a value lower than 1 this will not only decrease the intensity of that color relative to the other two colors but will also decrease the maximum intensity tha
301. ng formulas to calculate when it is safe to begin each new acquisition However there is a much more convenient way to know when it safe to begin each acquisition The camera supplies a trigger ready signal that is specifically designed to let you trigger overlapped exposure safely and efficiently For more information about using the Trigger Ready signal see Section 9 10 3 on page 146 For more detailed guidelines about using an external trigger signal with the trigger width exposure mode and overlapped exposure refer to the application notes called Using a Specific External Trigger Signal with Overlapped Exposure AW000565xx000 The application notes are available in the downloads section of the Basler website www baslerweb com 144 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 10 Acquisition Monitoring Tools 9 10 1 Exposure Active Signal The camera s exposure active ExpAc signal goes high when the exposure time for each image acquisition begins and goes low when the exposure time ends as shown in Figure 48 This signal can be used as a flash trigger and is also useful when you are operating a system where either the camera or the object being imaged is movable For example assume that the camera is mounted on an arm mechanism and that the mechanism can move the camera to view different portions of a product assembly Typically you do not want the camera to move during exposure In this case you can monitor
302. nnector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 12 pin connector must have 12 pins Use of a smaller plug such as one with 10 pins or 8 pins can CAUTION damage the pins in the camera s 12 pin connector The following voltage requirements apply to the camera power VCC pins 8 and 9 of the 12 pin receptacle Voltage Significance lt 10 8 VDC The camera may operate erratically 12 to 24 VDC Recommended operating voltage lt 1 ripple required Make sure to use a power supply that supplies power in this voltage range Table 6 Voltage Requirements for the Camera Power VCC For more information about the 12 pin connector and the power and I O cables see Section 7 2 on page 64 Section 7 3 on page 66 and Section 7 4 on page 67 70 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Physical Interface 7 6 Ethernet GigE Device Information The camera uses a standard Ethernet GigE transceiver The transceiver is fully 100 1000 Base T 802 3 compliant Basler pilot 71 Physical Interface AW00015119000 7 7 Input and Output Lines 7 7 14 Input Lines 7 7 1 1 Voltage Requirements Different voltage levels apply depending on whether the standard power and I O cable or a PLC power and I O cable is used see below Voltage Levels When the Standard Power and I O Cable is Used The following voltage requirements apply to the camera s I O input pins 3 and 4 of the 12 pin receptacle Vol
303. nse 0 6 800 900 1000 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 Absolute Quantum Efficiency 0 1 0 0 200 300 400 500 Fig 3 piA1600 35gm Spectral Response Basler pilot 600 700 Wave Length nm 800 900 1000 1100 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Absolute Quantum Efficiency Fi g Relative Response 0 50 AW00015119000 0 45 0 40 0 35 0 30 0 25 0 20 0 15 0 10 0 05 0 00 300 400 500 4 piA1900 32gm Spectral Response 0 9 600 700 Wave Length nm 800 900 1000 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 54 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 Fig 5 piA2400 17gm Spectral Response 700 Wave Length nm 800 900 1000 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 4 Spectral Response for Color Cameras The following graphs show the spectral response for each available color camera model characteristics and IR cut filter characteristics To obtain best performance from The spectral response curves exclude lens characteristics light source color models of the camera use of a dielectric IR cut filter is recommended To obtain best performance from color models of the camera use of a dielectric IR cut filter is recommended The filter should transmit in a range fr
304. nsion of the sensor was not evenly divisible by 3 so we rounded down to the nearest whole number Possible Image Distortion Objects will only appear undistorted in the image if the numers of binned lines and columns are equal With all other combinations the imaged objects will appear distorted If for example vertical binning by 2 is combined with horizontal binning by 4 the widths of the imaged objects will appear shrunk by a factor of 2 compared to the heights If you want to preserve the aspect ratios of imaged objects when using binning you must use vertical and horizontal binning where equal numbers of lines and columns are binned e g vertical binning by 3 combined with horizontal binning by 3 Binning s Effect on AOI Settings When you have the camera set to use binning keep in mind that the settings for your area of interest AOI will refer to the binned lines and columns in the sensor and not to the physical lines in the sensor as they normally would Another way to think of this is by using the concept of a virtual sen sor For example assume that you are using a piA640 210gm camera set for 3 by 3 binning as described above In this case you would act as if you were actually working with a 216 column by 162 line sensor when setting your AOI parameters The maximum AOI width would be 216 and the maximum AOI height would be 162 When you set the X Offset and the Width for the AOI you will be setting these values in terms of
305. nt to the camera The camera does not respond with a resend 6 Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 7 The Resend Timeout interval expires and the third resend request for packet 1002 is sent to the camera The camera does not respond with a resend 8 Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 40 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters 9 Because the maximum number of resend requests has been sent and the last Resend Response Timeout interval has expired packet 1002 is now considered as lost 10 End of the frame 11 Missing packets at the end of the frame 2999 and 3000 12 Interval defined by the Packet Timeout parameter You can set the performance driver parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read and write the parameter values Get the Stream Parameters object Camera_t StreamGrabber t StreamGrabber Camera GetStreamGrabber 0 Write the ReceiveWindowSize parameter StreamGrabber ReceiveWindowSize SetValue 16 Disable packet resends StreamGrabber EnableResend SetValue false Write the PacketTimeout parameter StreamGrabber PacketTimeout SetValue 40 Write the ResendRequestThreshold parameter StreamGrabber ResendRequestThreshold SetValue 5 Write the ResendRequestBatching parameter Str
306. o isolated See the previous section for input voltages and their significances The current draw for each input line is between 5 and 15 mA Figure 25 shows an example of a typical circuit you can use to input a signal into the camera By default Input Line 1 is assigned to receive an external hardware trigger ExTrig signal that can be used to control the start of image acquisition Your 12 Pin Gnd Receptacle I Input imi Voltage Current Limiter g O_In 1 0 to 24 VDC Int ged o O Sei _In_ Your Gnd Camera Fig 25 Typical Voltage Input Circuit For more information about input line pin assignments and pin numbering see Section 7 2 on page 64 For more information about how to use an ExTrig signal to control acquisition start see Section 9 4 5 on page 104 Section 9 5 3 on page 112 and Section 9 6 3 on page 125 For more information about configuring the input lines see Section 8 1 on page 79 74 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Physical Interface 7 7 2 Output Lines 7 7 2 1 Voltage Requirements The following voltage requirements apply to the I O output VCC pin 10 of the 12 pin receptacle Voltage Significance lt 3 3 VDC The I O output may operate erratically 3 3 to 24 VDC Recommended operating voltage Table 9 Voltage Requirements for the I O Output VCC 7 7 2 2 Line Schematic The camera is equipped with four physical output lines designated as Out
307. oe hE ede hee ore Eee 327 INO tie hen SRR ESBS s Rater ROSSA e SE Toke ae SEER bata heed 335 vi Basler pilot AW00015119000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions This chapter lists the camera models covered by the manual It provides the general specifications for those models and the basic requirements for using them This chapter also includes specific precautions that you should keep in mind when using the cameras We strongly recommend that you read and follow the precautions 1 1 Models The current Basler pilot GigE Vision camera models are listed in the top row of the specification table on the next page of this manual The camera models are differentiated by their sensor size their maximum frame rate at full resolution and whether the camera s sensor is mono or color The Basler pilot GigE Vision camera models are available in the following housing variants standard housing 90 head housing The names for the housing variants other than the standard housing are appended to the camera s name e g piA640 210gm gc 90 head Unless otherwise noted the material in this manual applies to all of the camera models listed in the tables Material that only applies to a particular camera model or to a subset of models such as to color cameras or a specific housing variant only will be so designated Basler pilot 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions
308. of normal pixels The sensor characteristics of the piA1900 32gm gc cameras do not entirely Basler pilot 5 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00015119000 Specification piA2400 17 gm gc Sensor Size gm 2456 x 2058 H x V pixels gc 2454 x 2056 Sensor Type Sony ICX625ALA AQA Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 2 3 Pixel Size 3 45 um x 3 45 um Max Frame Rate at full resolution 17 fps Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit s or Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbit s Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 equivalent to DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Mono 8 equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 12 10 to 24 VDC 5 min 10 8 VDC lt 1 ripple 5 9 W 12 VDC I O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount Basler pilot AW000151 19000 Specif
309. olled sequence advance mode with Always Active as the sequence control source Automatic cycling through the sequence set cycles with no action by the user Enabling and disabling of the sequencer feature Setting Sequence Set Total Number 6 v camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequence Set Cycle Sequencer Enabled Starts Again Disabled Frame Start Trigger Signal v v v v v v v v v v 1 A 4 5 o 2 3 4 0 0 nen mm _ Time Fig 59 Sequencer in Controlled Sequence Advance Mode with Always Active as the Sequence Control Source 234 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Synchronous Restart You can restart the sequence cycle with input line 1 or input line 2 as the source for controlling sequence cycle restart In the following use case see also Figure 60 the same settings were made as in the previous use case The Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the available sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering In addition Line 1 was selected as the source for controlling restart Line 1 is not set for invert Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer
310. olumns and lines in the sensor But if binning is enabled these parameters are set in terms of virtual columns and lines For more information see Section 12 4 on page 219 Normally the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter settings refer to the 220 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features You can set the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to get the maximum allowed settings and the increments for the Width and Height parameters They also illustrate setting the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values int64 t widthMax Camera Width GetMax int64 t widhInc Camera Width GetInc Camera Width SetValue 200 Camera OffsetX SetValue 100 int64 t heightMax Camera Height GetMax inte4 t heightInc Camera Height GetInc Camera Height SetValue 200 Camera OffsetY SetValue 100 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 12 4 1 Changing AOI Parameters On the Fly Making AOI parameter changes on the fly means making the parameter changes while the camera is capturing images continuously On the
311. om 400 nm to 640 660 nm and it should cut off from 640 660 nm to 1100 nm A suitable IR cut filter is included in the standard C mount lens adapter on color models of the camera An IR cut filter is not included in the optional CS mount adapter 0 50 0 45 0 40 0 35 0 30 0 25 0 20 0 15 0 10 Absolute Quantum Efficiency 0 05 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 Wave Length nm Fig 6 piA640 210gc Spectral Response Basler pilot 11 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 45 40 AW00015119000 35 oy 4 30 25 20 i 15 js Absolute Quantum Efficiency 10 O e i Sls ge i 0 350 400 450 500 550 Wave Length nm Fi g 7 piA1000 48gc and piA1000 60gc Spectral Response 0 45 0 40 850 900 950 1000 0 35 0 30 0 25 0 20 4 0 15 ro 0 10 a Absolute Quantum Efficiency 0 05 r s 0 00 F 500 600 700 Wave Length nm Fig 8 piA1600 35gc Spectral Response 12 900 1000 Basler pilot AW000151 19000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 0 40 0 35 0 30 ell ae 0 25 r 0 20 D 0 10 Pads Absolute Quantum Efficiency 0 05 ra ae 0 00 400 500
312. on and the parameters associated with each feature 12 1 Gain The camera s gain is adjustable As shown in Figure 55 increasing the gain increases the Gray Values slope of the response curve for the camera 4095 255 cs eee 6 oB sua This results in a higher gray value output from 12 bit 8 bit the camera for a given amount of output from the imaging sensor Decreasing the gain decreases the slope of the response curve and results in a lower gray value for a given amount of sensor output Increasing the gain is useful when at your brightest exposure a gray value lower than 255 in modes that output 8 bits per pixel or 0 4095 in modes that output 12 bits per pixels 0 25 50 100 is reached For example if you found that at your brightest exposure the gray values output by the camera were no higher than 127 in an 8 bit mode you could increase the gain to 6 dB an amplification factor of 2 and thus reach gray values of 254 Sensor Output Signal Fig 55 Gain in dB As mentioned in the Functional Description section of this manual for readout purposes the sensor used in the camera is divided into two halves As a result of this design there are three gain adjustments available Gain Raw All Gain Raw Tap 1 and Gain Raw Tap 2 Gain Raw All is a global adjustment i e its setting affects both halves of the sensor Gain Raw Tap 1 sets an additional amount of gain for the right half of the sensor The total g
313. on scA750 60 output in Sections 11 2 4 11 2 5 11 3 7 11 3 8 and 11 3 9 Modified the Max Gain Raw Tap 1 and Max Gain Raw Tap 2 settings for the piA640 210 and the piA1000 48 in Section 12 1 Added binning information for the piA1600 35gm in Section 12 6 AW00015106000 20 Sept 2007 Integrated the Sony ICX625 sensor Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual AW00015107000 17 Oct 2007 Corrected the Bayer filter alignment for the piA2400 12 in Sections 1 2 11 2 and 10 1 1 added Sections 11 3 2 10 3 5 and 11 3 6 AW00015108000 5 Dec 2007 Changed the camera s family name to pilot Modified the exposure start delay in Section 9 11 and the constants for the max frame rate formulas in Section 9 12 for the piA2400 12 AW00015109000 21 Dec 2007 Added guidelines for avoiding EMI and ESD problems in Section 2 3 1 on page 40 Removed web link for further information on APIPA in Section 5 3 on page 69 Corrected the voltage ranges relating to logic 0 and logic 1 in Section 7 7 1 on page 72 Added references to Application Notes AW000565xx000 in Section 8 3 1 on page 85 and Section 9 9 1 on page 144 Added binning information for the piA1000 48gm in Section 12 6 Added the Gamma feature in Section 10 3 2 on page 166 Added the Disable Parameter Limits feature in Section 12 11 on page 285 Added the Debouncer feature in Section 12 12 on page 286 Minor corrections throughout the manual Basler pilot
314. on volatile memory available for saving configuration sets A configuration set saved in a reserved area is commonly referred to as a user set The three available user sets are called User Set 1 User Set 2 and User Set 3 When the camera is running a saved user set can be loaded into the active set A saved user set can also be designated as the startup set i e the set that will be loaded into the active set whenever the camera is powered on or reset Instructions for loading a saved user set into the active set and for designating which set will be the startup set appear later in the Configuration Sets section lost when the camera is reset or switched off If you are using the lookup table feature you must reenter the lookup table values after each camera startup or reset The values for the luminance lookup table are not saved in the user sets and are Designating a Startup Set You can designate the default set or one of the user sets as the startup set The designated startup set will automatically be loaded into the active set whenever the camera starts up at power on or after a reset Instructions for designating the startup set appear below 12 20 1 Saving User Sets Saving the current active set into a user set in the camera s non volatile memory is a three step process Make changes to the camera s settings until the camera is operating in a manner that you would like to save Set the User Se
315. ono16 only 12 bits of the 16 bits transmitted are effective Therefore the highest data value you will see is OxXOFFF indicating a signal level of 4095 This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 e e e e 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 When a camera that is set for Mono 16 has only 12 bits effective the leader of transmitted frames will indicate Mono 12 as the pixel format Basler pilot 183 Pixel Data Formats 11 2 3 Mono 12 Packed Format AW00015119000 When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 12 Packed pixel data format it outputs 12 bits of brightness data per pixel Every three bytes transmitted by the camera contain data for two pixels The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Mono 12 Packed output The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bo the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Po bits 11 4 B P bits 3 0 Po bits 3 Bo P4 bits 11 4 B3 P3 bits 11 4 By P3 bits 3 0 Po bits 3 Bs P3 bits 11 4 Be P4 bits 11 4 B7 Ps bits 3 0 Pg bits 3 Bg Ps bits 11 4 Bg
316. ontrol AW00015119000 9 5 3 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware frame start triggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the camera for single frame acquisition mode with the trigger mode for the acquisition start trigger set to off We will use the timed exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering In this example we will use a trigger delay Set the acquisition mode to single frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode SingleFrame Select the acquisition start trigger p Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Select the frame start trigger m Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger m Camera riggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge Camera Set the trigger delay for one millisecond 1000us ims 0 001s TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge double Tri
317. or Bayer GB 16 has only 12 bits effective the leader of transmitted frames will indicate Bayer GB 12 as the pixel format 192 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 4 Bayer BG 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 16 pixel data format it outputs 16 bits of data per pixel with 12 bits effective The 12 bits of effective pixel data fill from the least significant bit The four unused most significant bits are filled with zeros With the Bayer BG 16 the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens you get 12 effective bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens you get 12 effective bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens you get 12 effective bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The BG in the name Bayer BG 16 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images For even lines in the images pixel one will be blue pixel two will be green pixel three will be blue pixel four will be green etc For odd lines in the images pixel one will be green pixel two will be red pixel three will be green pixel four will be red etc The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for
318. or SetValu BlackLevelSelector All Camera BlackLevelRaw SetValue 64 Set Black Level Raw Tap 1 Camera BlackLevelSelector SetValu BlackLevelSelector Tapl Camera BlackLevelRaw SetValue 0 Set Black Level Raw Tap 2 Camera BlackLevelSelector SetValu BlackLevelSelector Tap2 Camera BlackLevelRaw SetValue 0 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 212 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 3 Digital Shift The digital shift feature lets you change the group of bits that is output from each ADC in the camera Using the digital shift feature will effectively multiply the output of the camera by 2 times 4 times 8 times or 16 times The next two sections describe how the digital shift feature works when the camera is set for a 12 bit pixel format and when it is set for a 8 bit pixel format There is also a section describing precautions that you must observe when using the digital shift feature and a section that describes enabling and setting the digital shift feature 12 3 1 Digital Shift with 12 Bit Pixel Formats No Shift As mentioned in the Functional Description section of this manual the camera uses 12 bit ADCs to digitize the output from the ima
319. or SetValue SequenceControlSelector Advance Camera SequenceControlSource SetValue SequenceControlSource Linel Set Disabled as the source because synchronous sequence set cycle restart will not be used Camera SequenceControlSelector SetValue SequenceControlSelector Restart Camera SequenceControlSource SetValue SequenceControlSource Disabled Set the total number of sequence sets Camera SequenceSetTotalNumber SetValue 2 Select sequence set with index number 0 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 0 Set up the first acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute Select sequence set with index number 1 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 1 Set up the second acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute Enable the sequencer featur Camera SequenceEnable SetValue true The following code snippet illustrates using the API to load the sequence parameter values from sequence set 0 into the active set Select sequence set with
320. or the frame start trigger is set to on you must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera each time you want to begin a frame acquisition The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal that will act as the frame start trigger signal The available selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera by executing a Trigger Software command for the frame start trigger on the host PC Line 1 When the source signal is set to line 1 you apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line 1 on the camera If the Trigger Source parameter is set to Line 1 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a rising edge of the electrical signal will act as the frame start trigger Falling Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the frame start trigger For more information about using a software trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 9 4 4 on page 103 For more information about using a hardware trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 9 4 5 on page 104 Keep in mind that the camera will only react to frame start triggers when it is in a
321. ording to the states of input line 1 or input line 2 The advance proceeds in ascending sequence set index numbers as frame start triggers are received Basler pilot 237 Features AW00015119000 explanations however apply equally well to Line 2 as the sequence control This section assumes that Line 1 is selected as the sequence control source All source The following use case see also Figure 61 illustrates the operation of the sequencer in controlled sequence advance mode with Line 1 selected as the sequence control source The camera advances from one sequence set to the next in ascending sequence set index numbers After one sequence set cycle is complete another one starts The sequence set advance is controlled by the states of Line 1 Line 1 is not set for invert In this use case the Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the available sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger is received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be low the
322. ore information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 304 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 16 7 CRC Checksum The CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Checksum feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing a CRC checksum calculated using the X modem method As shown in Figure 76 the checksum is calculated using all of the image data and all of the appended chunks except for the checksum itself The CRC chunk is always the last chunk appended to the image data CRC checksum is calculated on this data Image Data ChunkX ChunkY Chunk including any required padding Data Data CRC Fig 76 CRC Checksum of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive disables all chunk The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the CRC feature or any features To enable the CRC checksum chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the CRC chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the CRC chunk is enabled the camera will add a CRC chunk to each acquired image To retrieve CRC information from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the CRC information Note that the CRC information provided by the chunk parser is not the CRC checksum itself Rather it is a true false res
323. ork Address allows the user to specify a MAC address that will override the default address provided by the adapter Packet Buffer Size Sets the size in bytes of the buffers used by the receive descriptors and the transmit descriptors Receive Descriptors Sets the number of descriptors to use in the adapter s receiving ring Transmit Descriptors Sets the number of descriptors to use in the adapter s transmit ring To access the advanced properties for an adapter Open a Network Connections window and find the connection for your network adapter Right click on the name of the connection and select Properties from the drop down menu A LAN Connection Properties window will open Click the Configure button ON ees An Adapter Properties window will open Click the Advanced tab parameters can have a significant negative effect on the performance of the We strongly recommend using the default parameter settings Changing the adapter and the driver 42 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters 4 3 Transport Layer Parameters The transport layer parameters are part of the camera s basic GigE implementation These parameters do not normally require adjustment Read Timeout If a register read request is sent to the camera via the transport layer this parameter designates the time out in milliseconds within which a response must be received Write Timeout If a register write
324. orrections throughout the manual 328 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00015113000 18 Jul 2008 Expanded the voltage information in Section 1 2 on page 2 Updated the distances and related tolerances between the front of the lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive area in Figure 11 on page 15 and Figure 12 on page 16 Added Information about mechanical stress test results in Section 1 5 4 on page 21 Added Information about the lens to which the mechanical stress tests apply in Section 1 5 4 on page 21 Modified the voltage information in Section 1 9 on page 25 Removed voltage information from Table 5 in Section 7 2 1 on page 64 Added Section 7 4 3 on page 69 and notes in Section 7 4 2 on page 67 introducing the PLC cable Included detailed voltage information in Section 7 5 on page 70 Section 7 7 1 1 on page 72 and Section 7 7 2 1 on page 75 Modified the absolute maximum rating to 30 0 VDC in Section 7 7 1 2 on page 74 and Section 7 7 2 2 on page 75 Added a note relating to the debouncer in Section 9 11 on page 151 Renamed Section 12 on page 207 the Features section and included the contents of the former Chunk Features section Corrected the minimum value for the white balance ratio in Section 12 3 on page 213 Added Section 12 8 on page 264 introducing the averaging feature Corrected the name of the Gamma parameter in Section 12 10 on page 270 The
325. ors in the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images For even rows in the images pixel one will be blue pixel two will be green pixel three will be blue pixel four will be green etc For odd rows in the images pixel one will be green pixel two will be red pixel three will be green pixel four will be red etc The tables below describe how the data for the even rows and for the odd rows of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer BG 8 output The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a row Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a row Bo the first byte of data for a row Bm the last byte of data for a row Even Rows Odd Rows Byte Data Byte Data Bo Blue value for Po Bo Green value for Po B4 Green value for P4 B4 Red value for P4 B2 Blue value for P2 B2 Green value for Pz B3 Green value for P3 B3 Red value for P3 By Blue value for P4 By Green value for P4 Bs Green value for P5 Bs Red value for P5 2 a e 2 e a e 2 e 2 e Bm 5 Blue value for Pp 5 Bm 5 Green value for Ph 5 Bm 4 Green value for Ph 4 Bm 4 Red value for Ph 4 Bm 3 Blue value for P 3 Bm 3 Green value for Ph 3 Bm 2 Green value for Ph 2 Bm 2 Red value for Ph 2 Bm 1 Blue value for P 4 Bm 1 Green value for Ph 14 Bm Green value for Ph
326. ory setup are optimized to produce good color images under the most common lighting conditions The color factory setup is a good starting point for your color adjustment works To make the parameters contained in the color factory setup become the ones that are actively controlling camera operation you must select the color factory setup as the default camera configuration set and then you must load the default configuration set into the camera s active configuration set When you do this it will Set the Gamma Selector parameter to SRGB Set the Processed Raw Enable parameter to enabled Set the Light Source Selector parameter to Daylight 6500 Sets the white balance parameters to values that are suitable for daylight lighting If you have badly misadjusted the settings for the color enhancement features on the camera it may be difficult to bring the settings back into proper adjustment Selecting the color factory setup as the default set and then loading the default set into the active set is a good way to recover from gross misadjustment of the color features For more information about the factory setups and about selecting and loading configuration sets see Section 12 20 on page 316 178 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats 11 Pixel Data Formats By selecting a pixel data format you determine the format layout of the image data transmitted by the camera This section provides detailed information about the availa
327. osureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 set for the width exposure mode set minimum exposure time to 3000 us Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode TriggerWidth Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 128 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 6 3 3 Acquisition Start Trigger Delay The trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay in microseconds that will be applied between the receipt of a hardware acquisition start trigger and when the trigger will become effective The trigger delay will not operate if the Trigger Mode parameter for acquisition start is set to off or if you are using a software acquisition start trigger For more information about the trigger delay feature and how to set it see Section 12 14 on page 290 9 6 3 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware acquisition start triggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the camera for single frame acquisition mode We will use the timed exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with ris
328. ourceSelector SetValue LightSourceSelector_Custom Select a position in the matrix Camera ColorTransformationValueSelector SetValue ColorTransformationValueSelector_Gain01 Set the value for the selected position as a floating point value Camera ColorTransformationValue SetValue 2 11 Select a position in the matrix Camera ColorTransformationValueSelector SetValue ColorTransformationValueSelector_Gain12 Set the value for the selected position as an integer value Camera ColorTransformationValueRaw SetValue 135 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler pilot 171 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00015119000 10 3 4 Color Adjustment If color adjustment is not available activate the Full camera description file For more information see Section 12 21 on page 321 The camera s color adjustment feature lets you adjust hue and saturation for the primary and secondary colors in the RGB color space Each adjustment affects those colors in the image where the adjusted primary or secondary color predominates For example the adjustment of red affects the colors in the image with a predominant red component See Section 10 3 1 on page 164 for more information about the white balance and see Section 10 3 5 on page 177 for a overall procedure for setting the color enhancement features For the color adjustments to work properly the w
329. ower supply and pins 8 and 9 on the camera We also recommend that you provide camera power ground through separate wires between your power supply and pins 1 and 2 on the camera 64 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Physical Interface 7 2 2 RJ 45 Jack Pin Assignments The 8 pin RJ 45 jack provides Ethernet access to the camera Pin assignments adhere to the Ethernet standard 7 2 3 Pin Numbering Fig 23 Pin Numbering for the 12 pin Receptacle Basler pilot 65 Physical Interface AW00015119000 7 3 Connector Types 7 3 1 8 pin RJ 45 Jack The 8 pin jack for the camera s Ethernet connection is a standard RJ 45 connector The recommended mating connector is any standard 8 pin RJ 45 plug Green and Yellow LEDs This RJ 45 jack on the camera includes a green LED and a yellow LED When the green LED is lit it indicates that an active network connection is available When the yellow LED is lit it indicates that data is being transmitted via the network connection 7 3 2 12 pin Connector The 12 pin connector on the camera is a Hirose micro receptacle part number HR10A 10R 12P or the equivalent The recommended mating connector is the Hirose micro plug part number HR10A 10P 12S or the equivalent 66 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Physical Interface 7 4 Cabling Requirements 7 4 1 Ethernet Cables Use high quality Ethernet cables
330. page 164 To use the balance white auto function carry out the following steps 1 Select Auto Function AOI2 2 Set the position and size of Auto Function AOI2 3 Enable the balance white auto function by setting it to once or continuous You can carry out steps 1 to 3 from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to use the auto function Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI2 See the Auto Function AOI section above Enabling the balance white auto function and selecting for example the once mode of operation Select the AOI to use for auto white balancing Currently AOI2 is predefined to gather the pixel data needed for automatic white balancing Set position and size of the auto function AOI Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI2 Camera AutoFunctionAOIlOffsetX SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue 0 Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax Camera AutoFunctionAOlTHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Set the mode of operation for balance white auto function Camera BalanceWhiteAuto SetValue BalanceWhiteAuto Once Basler pilot 283 Features AW00015119000 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basle
331. parameter Setting the pa rameter s value to e g 3 enables averaging and sets 3 individual images to be averaged Setting the parameter s value to 1 disables averaging You can set the AveragingNumberOfFrames parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Enable averaging of 3 images Camera AveragingNumberOfFrames SetValue 3 Disable averaging Camera AveragingNumberOfFrames SetValue 1 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 266 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 9 Luminance Lookup Table The camera can capture pixel values at a 12 bit depth When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 16 or Mono 12 packed pixel format the camera outputs 12 effective bits Normally the 12 effective bits directly represent the 12 bit output from the camera s ADC The luminance lookup table feature lets you use a custom 12 bit to 12 bit lookup table to map the 12 bit output from the ADC to 12 bit values of your choice The lookup table is essentially just a list of 4096 values however not every value is the table is actually used If we number the values in the table from O through 4095 the table works like this The number at location 0 in the ta
332. parameter sets 06 316 317 secondary COIOS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 172 sensor APCHILCCTUNE aa a ce iaany 60 Optical SIZE caiie e 2 4 6 PIXEL SIZO uiai e ieee tes 2 4 6 position accuracy s 16 19 SIZE Ta a a a atone 2 4 6 VPE e tention 2 4 6 sensor board Basler pilot Index temperature parameter 314 sensor height parameter 314 sensor width parameter cceeeeeee 314 sequence Cyele keneen ae eas 228 sequence advance MOdE eee 222 sequence parameter serere 223 SEQUENCE SOU aier ar a EAN 222 addi ssS isiin aiaa 254 configuration 0006 231 248 255 index NUMDETL ccceceecceeeeceeeeeee eens 224 OAC ETIE A A TEE TTE 226 SLOP wisi AANE EAS 231 249 255 sequence set advance mode AULO aa e a ae 228 COMMON a EIEE 233 free selection oosssnnnnnniee nenene 251 sequence set cycle eeeeeeeerreeee 225 sequence set index chunk 008 307 sequence set index numbet 5 224 SOQUENCET cccceeeeee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 222 standard operation 0000 226 Serial NUMDEL ccccecececeeeeesessseeeeseeees 26 sets of parameters Saving 005 317 single frame acquisition mode 97 software development Kit 0 06 32 software trigger acquisition Start ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 103 frame Start oo eens 110 122 Spectral response
333. parameters in the active set Execute the Sequence Set Store command to copy the sequence parameter values currently in the active set into the selected sequence set Any existing parameter values in the sequence set will be overwritten Repeat the above steps for the other sequence sets For information about setting the input line for invert see Section 8 1 3 on page 80 Configuring Sequence Sets and Advance Control Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for configuring sequence sets from within your application software The following code snippet gives example settings It illustrates using the API to set the controlled sequence advance mode In the example Line 1 is set as the sequence control source for synchronous sequence set advance Disabled is set as the sequence control source to allow asynchronous sequence cycle reset the total number of sequence sets is set to 2 sequence sets 0 and 1 are populated by storing the sequence parameter values from the active set in the sequence sets and to enable the sequencer feature Disable the sequencer featur Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false Set the Controlled sequence advance mode and set line 1 as the sequence Basler pilot 249 Features AW00015119000 control source for synchronous sequence set advance Camera SequenceAdvanceMode SetValue SequenceAdvanceMode Controlled Camera SequenceControlSelect
334. parts of certain features such as the gain feature or the white balance feature which normally require manually setting the related parameter values Auto functions are particularly useful when an image property must be adjusted quickly to achieve a specific target value and when a specific target value must be kept constant in a series of images An Auto Function Area of Interest Auto Function AOI lets you designate a specific part of the image as the base for adjusting an image property Each auto function uses the pixel data from an Auto Function AOI for automatically adjusting a parameter value and accordingly for controlling the related image property An auto function automatically adjusts a parameter value until the related image property reaches a target value Note that the manual setting of the parameter value is not preserved For example when the Gain Auto function adjusts the gain parameter value the manually set gain parameter value is not preserved For some auto functions the target value is fixed For other auto functions the target value can be set as can the limits between which the related parameter value will be automatically adjusted For example the gain auto function lets you set an average gray value for the image as a target value and also set a lower and an upper limit for the gain parameter value Generally the different auto functions can operate at the same time For more information see the following sect
335. pool and brings the pool to 14 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period but 10 resends are needed The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are used and 5 resends are used from the accumulator pool The accumulator pool is drawn down to 9 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period but 20 resends are needed The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are used To complete all of the needed resends 15 resends would be required from the accumulator pool but the pool only has 9 resends So the 9 resends in the pool are used and 6 resend requests are answered with a packet unavailable error code The accumulator pool is reduced to 0 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth 6 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period and 1 resend is needed The 1 resend needed is taken from the resends available via the bandwidth reserve The other 4 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are not needed so they are added to the accumulator pool and they bring the pool up to 4 7 During this t
336. posure time parameters For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 131 9 6 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on you must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera each time you want to begin a frame acquisition The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal that will act as the acquisition start trigger signal The available selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by executing a Trigger Software command for the acquisition start trigger on the host PC Line 1 or 2 When the source signal is set e g to line 1 you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line 1 on the camera If the Trigger Source parameter is set to Line 1 or Line 2 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a rising edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger Falling Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger For more information about using a software trigger to
337. pter Cameras without an IR cut filter are available on request Monochrome cameras do not include an IR cut filter in the lens adapter Monochrome cameras with a C mount lens adapter can be equipped with a filter on request Lens Thread Length is Limited The location of the IR cut filter limits the length of the threads on any lens you use with the camera If a lens with a very long thread length is used the IR cut CAUTION filter will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate For more information about the location of the IR cut filter see Section 1 5 3 on page 20 Basler pilot 163 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00015119000 10 3 Color Enhancement Features 10 3 1 White Balance The white balance feature lets you adjust the balance of red green and blue such that white objects in the camera s field of view appear white in the acquired images Setting the White Balance be adjusted manually i e by setting the value of the Balance Ratio Abs This section Section 10 3 1 describes how a color camera s white balance can parameters for red green and blue The camera also has a White Balance Auto function that can automatically adjust the white balance Manual adjustment of the Balance Ratio Abs parameters for red green and blue will only work if the Balance White Auto function is disabled For more information about auto fuctions in general see Section 12 10 1 on page 270 For more i
338. ptimized for use in typical situations and will provide good camera performance in most cases Basler pilot 319 Features AW00015119000 12 20 4 Selecting the Startup Set You can select the default configuration set i e whichever was selected as the default configuration set either the Standard Factory Setup the High Gain Factory Setup or the Auto Functions Factory Setup or one of the user configuration sets stored in the camera s non volatile memory to be the startup set The configuration set that you designate as the startup set will be loaded into the active set whenever the camera starts up at power on or after a reset The User Set Default Selector is used to select the startup set Set the User Set Default Selector to User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 or Default You can set the User Set Default Selector from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector Camera UserSetDefaultSelector SetValue UserSetDefaultSelector Default 320 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 21 Camera Feature Set After the camera is powered on pylon software processes a camera description file to make the camera features available for use The camera description file is included in the camera and describes the camera features in accord with the GenlCam specification The Basler pilot cameras include two camera description files that are u
339. put Line 1 Output Line 2 Output Line 3 and Output Line 4 The output lines are accessed via the 12 pin receptacle on the back of the camera As shown in the I O schematic each output line is opto isolated See the previous section for the recommended operating voltage The maximum current allowed through an output circuit is 50 mA A conducting transistor means a logical one and a non conducting transistor means a logical zero Figure 26 shows a schematic circuit you can use to monitor an output line with a voltage signal The circuit in Figure 26 is monitoring output line 1 Your Gnd eee w Joa ee eS za L 3 3 to 24 K l T VDC a gs l I I 1 O_Out_1 rea if masea Signal to You Load i O0_Out_VCC Resistance ee Your Gnd 12 Pin Receptacle Fig 26 Typical Voltage Output Circuit By default the camera s exposure active ExpAc signal is assigned to Output Line 1 The exposure active signal indicates when exposure is taking place Basler pilot 75 Physical Interface AW00015119000 By default the camera s trigger ready TrigRdy is assigned to Output Line 2 The trigger ready signal goes high to indicate the earliest point at which exposure start for the next frame can be triggered The assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines can be changed by the user For more information about output line pin assignments and pin numbering see Section 7 2 on page 64 For more information about
340. put parameters see Section 5 1 on page 45 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 9 1 on page 91 Basler pilot 153 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 9 12 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate In general the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate for your camera can be limited by three factors The amount of time it takes to read the data for an acquired image known as a frame from the image sensor to the frame buffer This time varies depending on the height of the frame Shorter frames take less time to read out of the sensor The frame height is determined by the camera s AOI settings The exposure time for acquired frames If you use very long exposure times you can acquire fewer frames per second The amount of time that it takes to transmit an acquired frame from the camera to your host PC The amount of time needed to transmit a frame depends on the bandwidth assigned to the camera achieved if the frame transmission is the most limiting factor The acquired images are not transmitted individually but will be used for creating an averaged image The averaged image will be transmitted at an output frame rate which will be subject to the frame transmission time and will be lower than the acquisition frame rate When the averaging feature is used an increased acquisition frame rate can be When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single fra
341. quence set are loaded into the active set During this period the camera will Make sure not to send a frame start trigger while the parameter values of a not wait for a frame start trigger and any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame start trigger status see the Acquisition Monitoring Tools section When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used An AsyncRestart command is sent After some delay the parameter values of sequence set 0 will be loaded into the active set It is assumed here that the delay between sending the AsyncRestart command and it becoming effective will allow the acquisition of two more images When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used The As
342. quencer The example assumes that sequence sets were previously configured and are currently available in the camera s memory Enable the sequencer featur Camera SequenceEnable SetValue true Disable the sequencer featur Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 230 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 5 1 2 Configuration Configuring Sequence Sets and Advance Control Use the following procedure for populating sequence sets and making the related settings Make sure that the sequencer feature is disabled Set the Sequence Advance Mode parameter to Auto Set the Sequence Set Total Number parameter The maximum number is 64 ga CN gt Select a sequence set index number by setting the Sequence Set Index parameter The available numbers range from 0 to 63 When configuring sequence sets make sure to always use a continuous series of index num bers starting with index number 0 and ending with the Sequence Set Total Number parameter value minus one For example specifying a series of sequence sets only with index numbers 5 6 and 8 is not allowed If you did nonetheless the not explicitly configured sequence sets would within the scope of the sequence set total number be populated by default parameter values 5 Set up your first acquisition scenario i e lighting object positioning etc 6 Adjust t
343. r pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For general information about auto functions see Section 12 10 on page 270 For information about Auto Function AOls and how to set them see Section 12 10 1 2 on page 272 284 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 11 Disable Parameter Limits For each camera parameter the allowed range of parameter values normally is limited The factory limits are designed to ensure optimum camera operation and in particular good image quality For special camera uses however it may be helpful to set parameter values outside of the factory limits The disable parameter limits feature lets you disable the factory parameter limits for certain parameters When the factory parameter limits are disabled the parameter values can be set within extended limits Typically the range of the extended limits is dictated by the physical restrictions of the camera s electronic devices such as the absolute limits of the camera s variable gain control The values for the extended limits can be seen using the Basler pylon Viewer or from within your application via the pylon API Currently the parameter limits can only be disabled on the Gain feature To disable the limits for a parameter Use the Parameter Selector to select the parameter whose limits you wish to disable Set the value of the Remove Limits parameter You can set the Parameter Selector and the value of the Remove Li
344. r the appropriate edge transition is received by the camera When the camera receives a hardware trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new frame start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new frame start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status When the camera is operating under control of an ExFSTrig signal the period of the ExFSTrig signal will determine the rate at which the camera is acquiring frames 1 x ExFSTrig period in seconds ae Rate For example if you are operating a camera with an ExFSTrig signal period of 20 ms 0 020 s 1 gon eps So in this case the frame rate is 50 fps acquire frames at too high a rate some of the frame trigger signals that you apply will be received by the camera when it is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The camera will ignore any frame start trigger signals that it receives when it is not waiting for frame start trigger This situation is commonly referred to as over triggering the camera If you are triggering frame acquisition with an ExFSTrig signal and you attempt to To avoid over triggering you should not attempt to acquire frames at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings 112 Basler pilot AW00015119
345. ra receives a software trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new acquisition start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new acquisition start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the camera s Exposure Mode parameter must be set to timed The exposure time for each acquired frame will be determined by the camera s exposure time parameters 122 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Software Acquisition Start Software Acquisition Start Trigger Signal Received Trigger Signal Received Frame Acquisition u E a o Exposure Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameter Fig 37 Frame Acquisition with a Software Acquisition Start Trigger When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the frame rate will be determined by how often you apply a software trigger signal to the camera and you should not attempt to trigger frame acquisition at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed for the current camera settings There is a detailed explanation about the maximum allowed frame rate at the end of this chapter Software acquisition start trigger signals that are applied to the camera when it
346. rameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Delay Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl Camera TimerDelayAbs SetValue 100 When you use the Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay time the camera accomplishes the setting change by automatically changing the Timer Delay Raw parameter to achieve the value specified by the Timer Delay Abs setting This leads to a limitation that you must keep in mind if you use Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay time That is you must set the Timer Delay Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using the Timer Delay Raw and the current Timer Delay Base parameters For example if the time base was currently set to 50 us you could use the Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay to 50 us 100 us 150 us etc Note that if you set the Timer Delay Abs parameter to a value that you could not achieve by using the Timer Delay Raw and current Timer Delay Time Base parameters the camera will automatically change the setting for the Timer Delay Abs parameter to the nearest achieveable value You should also be aware that if you change the delay time using the raw settings the Timer Delay Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new delay time
347. rating sparks If necessary use additional shielding Decrease the risk of electrostatic discharge by taking the following measures Use conductive materials at the point of installation e g floor workplace Use suitable clothing cotton and shoes Control the humidity in your environment Low humidity can cause ESD problems Installations provides much more detail about avoiding EMI and ESD This application note can be obtained from the Downloads section of our website www baslerweb com The Basler application note called Avoiding EMI and ESD in Basler Camera Basler pilot 23 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00015119000 1 8 Environmental Requirements 1 8 1 Temperature and Humidity Housing temperature during operation 0 C 50 C 32 F 122 F Humidity during operation 20 80 relative non condensing Storage temperature 20 C 80 C 4 F 176 F Storage humidity 20 80 relative non condensing 1 8 2 Heat Dissipation You must provide sufficient heat dissipation to maintain the temperature of the camera housing at 50 C or less Since each installation is unique Basler does not supply a strictly required technique for proper heat dissipation Instead we provide the following general guidelines In all cases you should monitor the temperature of the camera housing and make sure that the temperature does not exceed 50 C Keep in mind that
348. re not restricted to multiples of the current exposure time base The exposure auto function uses Auto Function AOI1 and can be operated in the once and continuous modes of operation If Auto Function AOI1 does not overlap the Image AOI see the Auto Function AOI section the pixel data from Auto Function AOI1 will not be used to control the image brightness Instead the current manual setting of the Exposure Time Abs parameter value will control the image brightness The exposure auto function is not available when trigger width exposure mode is selected When the exposure auto function is used the gain auto function can be used at the same time In this case however you must also set the auto function profile feature If the Auto Exposure Time Abs Upper Limit parameter is set to a sufficiently high value the camera s frame rate may be decreased For more information about absolute exposure time settings and related limitations see Section 9 7 2 on page 133 For more information about exposure modes and how to select them see Section 9 5 3 2 on page 113 and Section 9 6 3 2 on page 126 For more information about the auto function profile feature see Section 12 10 5 on page 282 To use the exposure auto function carry out the following steps Make sure trigger width exposure mode is not selected Select Auto Function AOI1 Set the postion and size of Auto Function AOI1 Set the lower and upper limits
349. red separately Accordingly for each averaged image the num ber of required triggers will be equal to the set number of individual images used for averaging When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame a single averaged image will be ob tained The averaged image will be based on the set number of individual images The number of triggers necessary for each averaged image will be equal to the set number of individual images For example if the acquisition mode is set to single frame and the number of individual images used for averaging is set to three three triggers are needed to obtain the averaged image Make sure that for each averaged image the number of triggers is equal to the set number of individual images used for averaging individual images is acquired Otherwise the object will appear blurred in the Make sure the object being imaged does not move while the sequence of averaged image 264 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features sequence of individual images is acquired we do not recommend to do so The new settings would be applied as soon as they are set Accordingly the averaged image would be based on individual images acquired with different feature settings and poor quality for the averaged image may result Although the camera allows changing the settings for all features while a We recommend to only change the feature settings while individual images used for averaging
350. rements 0 24 ESD T EIE obedades a feess 23 event Acquisition Start Overtrigger 308 Event Overrun cccceeeeereeeeees 308 Exposure Endeis eiiie 308 Frame Start Overtrigger 308 event reporting esssesssesseesre errereen 308 exposure o 1a 0 0 10 rer 143 exposure active signal 145 Exposure UL ee eerie 279 exposure mode mMer eaa s i eaveeves 113 126 trigger width 115 127 exposure MOdeS s es 126 exposure start delay ceeeee 151 exposure time controlling with an Basler pilot AW00015119000 external trigger signal 112 125 maximum possible s a 131 minimum allowed cccccceceeeees 131 Setting re neen Meteo eadeeedd tans 132 exposure time abs parameter EE ss seaniondes tee eee 108 109 121 133 exposure time base eeeeeees 132 exposure time base abs parameter 132 exposure time parameters 131 exposure time raw parametet 132 extended image data chunk 294 F factory SCtUDP ccceeeeeeereeeeeees 316 318 auto functions factory setup 316 color factory Setup eeeee 316 high gain factory setup 00 316 standard factory setup 0 316 feature Set ccccceesseesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 321 filter arve eiee ain tee a eiaa a 33 TANG scx cde eatton ae adele E SAE 93 frame counter chunk
351. rite The GigE Vision standard specifies a mechanism for establishing several separate stream channels between the camera and the PC This parameter selects the stream channel that will be affected when the other network related parameters are changed Currently the cameras support only one stream channel i e stream channel 0 Packet Size read write As specified in the GigE Vision standard each acquired image will be fit into a data block The block contains three elements a data leader consisting of one packet used to signal the beginning of a data block the data payload consisting of one or more packets containing the actual data for the current block and a data trailer consisting of one packet used to signal the end of the data block The packet size parameter sets the size of the packets that the camera will use when it sends the data payload via the selected stream channel The value is in bytes The value does not affect the leader and trailer size which use a total of 36 bytes and the last data packet may be a smaller size The payload size will be packet size minus 36 bytes Basler pilot 45 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00015119000 The packet size parameter should always be set to the maximum size that your network adapter and network switches if used can handle Inter packet Delay read write Sets the delay in ticks between the packets sent by the camera Applies to the selected stream
352. rlapped Exposure Basler pilot 143 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Determining whether your camera is operating with overlapped or non overlapped exposures is not a matter of issuing a command or switching a setting on or off Rather the way that you operate the camera will determine whether the exposures are overlapped or not overlapped If we define the frame period as the time from the start of exposure for one image acquisition to the start of exposure for the next image acquisition then Exposure will overlap when Frame Period lt Exposure Time Readout Time Exposure will not overlap when Frame Period gt Exposure Time Readout Time You can calculate the readout time for a captured image by using the formula in Section 9 11 on page 151 9 9 1 Guidelines for Overlapped Operation If you will be operating the camera with overlapped exposure there are two important guidelines to keep in mind You must not begin the exposure time for a new image acquisition while the exposure time of the previous acquisition is in progress You must not end the exposure time of the current image acquisition until readout of the previously acquired image is complete The camera will ignore any trigger signals that violate these guidelines When you are operating a camera with overlapped exposure and using a hardware trigger signal to trigger image acquisition you could use the camera s exposure time parameter settings and timi
353. rs If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExASTrig signal rises If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExASTrig signal falls The following figure illustrates timed exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering ExASTrig Signal Period Is gt ExASTrig Signal S o Y T Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 38 Timed Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering Note that if you attempt to trigger a new exposure start while the previous exposure is still in progress the trigger signal will be ignored and an Acquisition Start Overtrigger event will be generated This situation is illustrated below for rising edge triggering This rise in the trigger signal will be ignored and an Acquisition Start Overtrigger event will be generated ExASTrig Signal o Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 39 Overtriggering with Timed Exposure For more information about the Acquisition Start Overtrigger event see Section 12 17 on page 308 126 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 131 Trigger Width Exposure Mode When trigger width exposure mode is selected the length of the exposure for each frame acquisition will be directly controlled by the ExASTrig
354. rst acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Set the number of sequence set uses Camera SequenceSetExecutions SetValue 1 Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequenc set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute Select sequence set with index number 1 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 1 Set up the second acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Set the number of sequence set uses Camera SequenceSetExecutions SetValue 4 Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequenc set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 232 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 5 2 Controlled Sequence Advance Mode When the controlled sequence advance mode is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next proceeds in ascending sequence set index numbers according to the selected sequence control source Always Active The advance from one sequence set to the next proceeds automatically as frame triggers are received Input Line 1 or Input Line 2 The advance from one sequence set to the next proceeds according to the states of the selected input line Disab
355. rupt moderation and then use a different parameter to enable the interrupt moderation If possible set the number of receive descriptors to a maximum value and set the number of Basler pilot 53 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00015119000 CPU interrupts to a low value If possible also set the parameter for speed and duplex to auto Contact Basler technical support if you need further assistance Step 2 Set the Packet Size parameter on each camera as large as possible Using the largest possible packet size has two advantages it increases the efficiency of network transmissions between the camera and the PC and it reduces the time required by the PC to process incoming packets The largest packet size setting that you can use with your camera is determined by the largest packet size that can be handled by your network The size of the packets that can be handled by the network depends on the capabilities and settings of the network adapter you are using and on capabilities of the network switch you are using Unless you have already set the packet size for your network adapter during the installation of the Basler pylon software check the documentation for your adapter to determine the maximum packet size sometimes called frame size that the adapter can handle Many adapters can handle what is known as jumbo packets or jumbo frames These are packets with a maximum size of 16 kB Once you have
356. s 102 9 4 4 Using a Software Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode 103 94AT INTOUUCHON 6 mema a ea ee A new oP de wow ate 103 9 4 4 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 103 9 4 5 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode 104 9 4 5 1 Introduction e ee ae ai tee 104 9 4 5 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 105 9 5 The Frame Start Trigger in Standard Mode 0 ccc eee eens 106 9 5 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode 0000 0c eae 107 9 5 1 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Off 200005 107 9 5 1 2 Frame Start Trigger Mode On 020000 0s 108 9 5 1 3 Setting the Frame Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters 109 9 5 2 Using a Software Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 110 95 21 IntrOdUCtlOn 44 0300 see gees seh we Wy ewe oe Shee ied 110 9 5 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 111 9 5 3 Using a Hardware Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 112 9 5 3 1 INtrOdUCHON ssena aee Bais ee ee BE 112 9 5 3 2 Exposure Modes 000000 eee ee 113 9 5 3 3 Frame Start Trigger Delay 000 00 eee eee 115 9 5 3 4 Setting the Parame
357. s equipped with a Bayer pattern filter on the imaging sensor RGB to RGB is the only setting available This setting means that the matrix color transformation process will not transform the red green and blue pixel values from the sensor into a different color space The second parameter associated with matrix color transformation is the Light Source Selector parameter The following settings are available for this parameter Off No alterations will be made to the pixel values Tungsten This setting will automatically populate the matrix with a pre selected set of values that will make appropriate corrections for images captured with tungsten lighting that has a color temperature of about 2500K to 3000K When you select this setting the camera will also 168 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Color Creation and Enhancement adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they are appropriate for a tungsten light source Daylight This setting will automatically populate the matrix with a pre selected set of values that will make appropriate corrections for images captured with daylight lighting that has a color temperature of about 5000K When you select this setting the camera will also adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they are appropriate for a daylight light source with a color temperature of about 5000K Daylight 6500K This setting will automatically populate the matri
358. s occurred FrameStartEventData Overtriggering of the frame start trigger has occurred FrameStartOvertriggerEventData The end of an exposure has occurred ExposureEndEventData An event overrun has occurred EventOverrunEventData see below for more information An Example of Event Reporting An example related to the Exposure End event illustrates how event reporting works The example assumes that your system is set for event reporting see below and that an end of exposure has just occurred in the camera In this case 1 An Exposure End event is generated The event contains the event in the strict sense and sup plementary information An Event Type Identifier In this case the identifier would show that an exposure end type event has occurred A Frame ID This number indicates the frame count at the time that the event occurred A Stream Channel Identifier Currently this identifier is always 0 A Timestamp This is a timestamp indicating when the event occurred The time stamp timer starts running at power off on or at camera reset The unit for the timer is ticks where one tick 8 ns The timestamp is a 64 bit value 2 The event is placed in an internal queue in the camera 3 As soon as network transmission time is available an event message will be sent to the PC If only one event is in the queue the message will contain the single event If more than one event is in the queue the message will contain multiple ev
359. se the formulas you will need to know the current value of the Payload Size parameter and the Packet Size parameter for each camera You will also need to know the frame rate in frames s at which each camera will operate se Bytes Frame E Saree x Packet Overhead Payload Size Leader Size Trailer Size acket Size Data Bandwidth Needed Bytes Frame x Frames s Where Packet Overhead 72 for a GigE network 78 for a 100 MBit s network Leader Size Packet Overhead 36 if chunk mode is not active Packet Overhead 12 if chunk mode is active Trailer Size Packet Overhead 8 x 1 means round up x to the nearest integer x 4 means round up x to the nearest multiple of 4 Step 5 Calculate data bandwidth assigned to each camera For each camera there is a parameter called Bandwidth Assigned This read only parameter indicates the total bandwidth that has been assigned to the camera The Bandwidth Assigned parameter includes both the bandwidth that can be used for image data transmission plus the bandwidth that is reserved for packet resents and camera control signals To determine the data bandwidth assigned you must subtract out the reserve Basler pilot 55 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00015119000 You can use the formula below to determine the actual amount of assigned bandwidth that is available for data transmission To use the formula you will ne
360. sed alternatively The camera description files represent partially different combinations of features feature sets To obtain the desired feature set for use you must select the related camera description file by setting the CameraFeatureSet parameter value and restarting the camera see below off and on Accordingly the current camera description file will serve as the default camera description file whenever the camera is powered on until the other camera description file is selected The CameraFeatureSet parameter setting persists when the camera is switched You can use either one of the following camera description files The Full camera description file provides the complete feature set All features will be available The Basic camera description file provides all features except the following ones Matrix color correction see Section 10 3 3 on page 168 Color adjustment see Section 10 3 4 on page 172 Sequencer see Section 12 5 on page 222 Accordingly the features listed above will not be available Processing the selected camera description file takes some time The time depends on the number and nature of the included features Accordingly the different camera description files require different periods to elapse until the camera features are available for use The camera features are sooner available when you use the Basic camera description file after camera restart or camera reset
361. sequencer feature is disabled while frame exposure and readout are in progress The complete frame is transmitted and the cycling through sequence sets is terminated The sequencer parameter values in the active set return to the values that existed before the sequencer feature was enabled Basler pilot 229 Features AW00015119000 Use Case Operation in auto sequence advance mode Automatic cycling through the sequence set cycles with no action by the user Enabling and disabling of the sequencer feature Settings Sequence Set Total Number 6 Sequence Set Executions 1 for sequence sets 0 2 3 and 4 Sequence Set Executions 2 for sequence set 5 Sequence Set Executions 3 for sequence set 1 v camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequence Set Cycle Sequencer Enabled Starts Again Disabled Frame Start Trigger Signal M v v v M v M M ll 1 1 A 4 5 Hi o v o E EEE E eee E i a Time Fig 58 Sequencer in Auto Sequence Advance Mode Operating the Sequencer Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for operating the sequencer in Auto sequence advance mode from within your application software The following code snippet illustrates enabling the sequencer and disabling the se
362. set for continuous frame acquisition mode We will use the trigger width exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with external acquisition start trigger signals Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger i Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge m Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set for the trigger width exposure mode Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode TriggerWidth Prepare for frame acquisition here Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Frame acquisition will start each time the externally generated acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig signal goes high Retrieve the captured frames Camera AcquisitionStop Execute For detailed information about using
363. sic GigE Vision network driver that is compatible with all network adapters The advantage of this driver is its extensive compatibility The Basler performance driver is a hardware specific GigE Vision network driver The driver is only compatible with network adapters that use specific Intel chipsets The advantage of the performance driver is that it significantly lowers the CPU load needed to service the network traffic between the PC and the camera s It also has a more robust packet resend mechanism During the installation process you should have installed either the filter driver or the performance driver For more information about compatible Intel chipsets see the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 For more information about installing the network drivers see the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 Basler pilot 33 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AW00015119000 4 1 The Basler Filter Driver The Basler filter driver is a basic driver GigE Vision network driver It is designed to be compatible with most network adapter cards The functionality of the filter driver is relatively simple For each frame the driver checks the order of the incoming packets If the driver detects that a packet or a group of packets is missing it will wait for a specified period of time to see if the missing packet or gro
364. signal If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExASTrig signal rises and continues until the ExASTrig signal falls If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExASTrig signal falls and continues until the ExASTrig signal rises The following figure illustrates trigger width exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering Trigger width exposure is especially useful if you intend to vary the length of the exposure time for each captured frame ExASTrig Signal Period Exposure ExASTrig Signal Fig 40 Trigger Width Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering When you operate the camera in trigger width exposure mode you must use the camera s exposure time parameters to set an exposure time This parameter setting will be used by the camera to operate the Trigger Ready signal You should adjust the exposure setting to represent the shortest exposure time you intend to use For example assume that you will be using trigger width exposure and that you intend to use the ExASTrig signal to vary the exposure time in a range from 3000 us to 5500 us In this case you would use the exposure setting to set the exposure time to 3000 us If you are using the trigger width exposure mode and the camera is operating with overlapped exposures there is something you must keep in mind If the action of the ExASTrig signal would end the current exposure while readout
365. signal to serve as the acquisition start trigger Legacy mode By default physical input line 1 is assigned to receive the ExTrig signal to serve as the acquisition start trigger You can assign only one line to receive the ExTrig input signal Basler pilot 79 1 O Control AW00015119000 8 1 2 Using an Unassigned Input Line to Receive a User Input Signal You can use an unassigned input line to receive your own user generated input signal The electrical characteristics of your input signal must meet the requirements shown in the Physical Interface section of this manual You can use the Line Status or Line Status All parameters to monitor the state of the input line that is receiving the user defined signal A line assigned to receive an ExTrig input signal can t be used to receive a user designed input signal For more information about using the Line Status and Line Status All parameters see Section 8 3 1 on page 89 and Section 8 3 2 on page 89 8 1 3 Setting an Input Line for Invert You can set each individual input line to invert or not to invert the incoming electrical signal To set the invert function on an input line Use the Line Selector to select an input line Set the value of the Line Inverter parameter to true to enable inversion on the selected line and to false to disable inversion You can set the Line Selector and the Line Inverter parameter value from within your application
366. signed is equal to or just greater than the data bandwidth needed pe WN something that you must keep in mind When you lower the data output rate you increase the amount of time that the camera needs to transmit an acquired frame image Increasing the frame transmission time can restrict the camera s maximum allowed frame rate If you increase the inter packet delay to lower a camera s data output rate there is Step 7 Check that the total bandwidth assigned is less than the network capacity 1 For each camera determine the current value of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter The value is in Byte s Make sure that you determine the value of the Bandwidth Assigned param eter after you have made any adjustments described in the earlier steps 2 Find the sum of the current Bandwidth Assigned parameter values for all of the cameras If the sum of the Bandwidth Assigned values is less than 125 MByte s for a GigE network or 12 5 M Byte s for a 100 Bit s network the bandwidth management is OK If the sum of the Bandwidth Assigned values is greater than 125 MByte s for a GigE network or 12 5 M Byte s for a 100 Bit s network the cameras need more bandwidth than is available and you must make adjustments In essence you must lower the data bandwidth needed by one or more of the 56 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth cameras and then adjust the data bandwidths assi
367. sing the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 287 Features AW00015119000 12 13 Minimum Output Pulse Width An output signal sent by the camera may be too narrow for some receivers to be detected To ensure reliable detection the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature allows you to increase the signal width to a set minimum width If the signal width of the original output signal is narrower than the set minimum the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature will increase the signal width to the set minimum before the signal is sent out of the camera see the figure below If the signal width of the original output signal is equal to or wider than the set minimum the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature will have no effect The signal will be sent out of the camera with unmodified signal width Without signal With signal width increase width increase Output signal lt 4 gt l l Minimum output pulse width max 100 us TIMING CHARTS ARE NOT DRAWN TO SCALE Fig 74 Increasing the Signal Width of an Output Signal The minimum output pulse width is determined by the value of the MinOutPulseWidthAbs parame ter The parameter is set in microseconds and can be set in a range from 0 to 100 us To set the minimum output pulse wi
368. sition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Time KREZA Camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger status Fig 50 Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal The acquisition trigger wait signal will only be available when hardware acquisition start triggering is enabled Basler pilot 149 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Selecting the Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The acquisition trigger wait signal can be selected to act as the source signal for camera output line 1 line 2 line 3 or line 4 Selecting a source signal for an output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 line 2 line 3 or line 4 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the acquisition trigger wait signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Outl Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource AcquisitionTriggerWait You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer applica
369. speed changes in the conveyor and ensure that frame trigger signals are generated and applied when specific areas of the object are in front of the camera Once 3 frame start trigger signals have been received by the camera the number of frames acquired would be equal to the setting for the Acquisition Frame Count parameter and the camera would return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Any frame start trigger signals generated at that point would be ignored This sort of setup is useful because it will only acquire frames when there is an object in front of the camera and it will ensure that the desired areas on the object are imaged Transmitting images of the space between the objects would be a waste of bandwidth and processing them would be a waste of processor resources Basler pilot 141 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Use Case Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger On The acquisition start trigger is on and the acquisition start trigger source is set to software The user must execute an acquisition start trigger software command to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the acquisition frame count is set to 3 the camera will re enter the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status after 3 frame trigger signals have been applied The frame start trigger is on and the frame start trigger source is set to input
370. ssion of a frame This burst of resends will delay the start of transmission of the next acquired frame The Frame Max Jitter parameter indicates the maximum time in ticks one tick 8 ns that the next frame transmission could be delayed due to a burst of resends Device Max Throughput read only Indicates the maximum amount of data in bytes per second that the camera could generate given its current settings and an ideal world This parameter gives no regard to whether the GigE network has the capacity to carry all of the data and does not consider any bandwidth required for resends In essence this parameter indicates the maximum amount of data the camera could generate with no network restrictions If the Acquisition Frame Rate abs parameter has been used to set the camera s frame rate the camera will use this frame rate setting to calculate the device max throughput If software or hardware triggering is being used to control the camera s frame rate the maximum frame rate allowed with the current camera settings will be used to calculate the device max throughput Basler pilot 49 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00015119000 Device Current Throughput read only Indicates the actual bandwidth in bytes per second that the camera will use to transmit image data and chunk data given the current area of interest settings chunk feature settings and the pixel format setting If the Acquisition Frame Ra
371. stment Damping on page 281 Basler pilot 333 Revision History AW00015119000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00015119000 08 Mar 2013 Corrected the method used for calculating the CRC checksum to X modem in Section 12 16 7 on page 305 Added the AcquisitionStartEventData and FrameStartEventData events in Section 12 17 on page 308 Added the sensor board temperature device information parameter in Section 12 19 on page 314 Added the Camera Feature Set section 12 21 on page 321 Added notes on the full camera description file in Section 10 3 3 on page 168 Section 10 3 4 on page 172 and Section 12 5 on page 222 334 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Index A acquisition frame count parameter cece eeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 101 103 acquisition frame rate ANd AOI SIZOC cece i aa 154 and averaging eseese 154 265 maximum allowed l 154 acquisition frame rate abs parameter 107 109 119 121 acquisition mode parameter 0 008 97 acquisition start command 93 97 292 acquisition start trigger eeee 94 etalls ct ed ccicivins i 99 acquisition start trigger delay legacy MOdEe cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 acquisition start trigger mode parame ler yiia aE AAA 100 acquisition status eeen 292 acquisition stop command 93 97 acquisition trigger wait signal 148 acquistion start tr
372. stmentDampingRaw SetValue 600 Camera GrayValueAdjustmentDampingAbs SetValue 0 5859 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler pilot 281 Features AW00015119000 12 10 5 Auto Function Profile If you want to use the gain auto function and the exposure auto function at the same time you must also set the auto function profile The auto function profile specifies whether the gain or the exposure time will be kept as low as possible when the system is making automatic adjustments as it attempts to reach the target average gray value To use the gain auto function and the exposure auto function at the same time carry out the following steps 1 Set the auto function profile to specify whether gain or exposure time will be minimized during adjustments 2 Set the gain auto function to the continuous mode of operation 3 Set the exposure auto function to the continuous mode of operation You can set the auto function profile from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the auto function profile As an example Gain Auto is set to be minimized during adjustments Use the gain auto and exposure auto features simultaneously Camera AutoFunctionProfile SetValue AutoFunctionProfile GainMinimum Camera GainAuto SetValue GainAuto_ Continuous Camera ExposureAuto SetValue
373. t 0 will be selected and when the bit is set to 1 sequence set 1 will be selected see Table 17 You can use the states of either input line 1 or input line 2 to set bit 0 If the input line is not set for invert the high state of the input line will set bit O to 1 and the low state will set bit 0 to 0 If the input line is set for invert the low state of the input line will set bit 0 to 1 and the high state will set bit O to 0 If the Sequence Set Total Number parameter is set to higher than two Bits 1 and 0 of the binary sequence set index number see Table 17 can be set When e g bit 0 is set to 0 and bit 1 is set to 1 sequence set 2 will be selected see Table 17 You can use the states of input line 1 to set bit 0 and the states of input line 2 to set bit 1 or vice versa If the input lines are not set for invert the high states of the input lines will set the bits to 1 and the low states will set the bits to 0 If the input lines are set for invert the low states of the input lines will set the bits to 1 and the high states will set the bits to 0 For Information about setting an input line for invert see Section 8 1 3 on page 80 254 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 5 3 2 Configuration Configuring Sequence Sets and Advance Control Use the following procedure for populating sequence sets and setting the source for sequence set advance 1 Make sure that the sequencer feature is disabled 2 Set the Sequen
374. t Selector to User Set 1 User Set 2 or User Set 3 Execute a User Set Save command to save the active set to the selected user set Saving an active set to a user set in the camera s non volatile memory will overwrite any parameters that were previously saved in that user set You can set the User Set Selector and execute the User Set Save command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and execute the command Basler pilot 317 Features AW00015119000 Camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector UserSetl Camera UserSetSave Execute For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 12 20 2 Selecting a Factory Setup as the Default Set When the camera is delivered the Standard Factory Setup will be selected as the default set You can however select any one of the four factory setups to serve as the default set To select which factory setup that will serve as the default set Set the Default Set Selector to the Standard Factory Setup High Gain Factory Setup Auto Functions Factory Setup or Color Factory Setup You can set the Default Set Selector from within your application software by
375. t of Camera Settings on Test Images When any of the test image is active the camera s analog features such as gain black level and exposure time have no effect on the images transmitted by the camera For test images 1 2 3 and 6 the cameras digital features such as the luminance lookup table will also have no effect on the transmitted images But for test images 4 and 5 the cameras digital features will affect the images transmitted by the camera This makes test images 4 and 5 a good way to check the effect of using a digital feature such as the luminance lookup table Enabling a Test Image The Test Image Selector is used to set the camera to output a test image You can set the value of the Test Image Selector to one of the test images or to test image off You can set the Test Image Selector from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the selector set for no test image Camera TestImageSelector SetValue TestImageSelector Off set for the first test image Camera TestImageSelector SetValue TestImageSelector Testimagel For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 311 Features AW0
376. t the color can achieve For this reason we don t normally recommend setting a balance ratio less than 1 unless you want to correct for the strong predominance of one color 164 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Color Creation and Enhancement To set the Balance Ratio parameter for a color Set the Balance Ratio Selector to red green or blue Set the Balance Ratio Abs parameter to the desired value for the selected color You can set the Balance Ratio Selector and the Balance Ratio Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera BalanceRatioSelector SetValue BalanceRatioSelector_Green Camera BalanceRatioAbs SetValue 1 20 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 31 White Balance Reset The camera includes a White Balance Reset command that can be used to reset the white balance adjustments This feature is especially useful if you have badly misadjusted the white balance and you want to quickly return to reasonable settings When the reset command is used it will return the camera to the settings defined by your current Light Source Selector param
377. tage Significance 0 to 24 VDC Recommended operating voltage 0 to 1 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 0 gt 1 4 to 2 2 VDC Region where the transition threshold occurs the logical state is not defined in this region gt 2 2 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 1 Table 7 Voltage Requirements for the I O Input When Using the Standard Power and I O Cable 72 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Physical Interface Voltage Levels When a PLC Power and I O Cable is Used The following voltage requirements apply to the input of the PLC power and I O cable The PLC power and I O cable will adjust the voltages to the levels required at the camera s I O input see Table 5 Voltage Significance 0 to 24 VDC Recommended operating voltage 0 to 8 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 0 gt 8 4 to 10 4 VDC Region where the transition threshold occurs the logical state is not defined in this region gt 10 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 1 Table 8 Voltage Requirements for the I O Input When Using a PLC Power and I O Cable Basler pilot 73 Physical Interface AW00015119000 7 7 1 2 Line Schematic The camera is equipped with two physical input lines designated as Input Line 1 and Input Line 2 The input lines are accessed via the 12 pin receptacle on the back of the camera As shown in the I O line schematic each input line is opt
378. tance between the front of the lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive surface Note that this tolerance and the sensor tilt tolerance see above must be combined to obtain the total tolerance for every point on the photosensitive surface Fig 14 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for Cameras With 90 Head Housing in mm unless otherwise noted Basler pilot 19 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW00015119000 1 5 3 Maximum Thread Length on Color Cameras The C mount lens adapter on color models of the camera is normally equipped with an internal IR cut filter As shown below the length of the threads on any lens you use with a color camera must be less than 8 0 mm If a lens with a longer thread length is used the IR cut filter will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate C mount Lens Ei is IR Cut Filter lt 8 0mm Not to Scale gt Lens Adapter Fig 15 Maximum Lens Thread Length on Color Cameras C mount color cameras that do not include an internal IR cut filter are available on request Monochrome cameras are not normally equipped with an internal IR cut filter however they can be equipped with an internal filter on request 20 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 4 Mechanical Stress Test Results Pilot cameras were submitted to an in
379. tart trigger signal to input line 1 to start each frame exposure Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger Off Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Source for the frame start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge a trigger signal generated by the camera internally a trigger signal applied by the user RSA camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal Y camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal frame exposure and readout frame transmission A moe Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed oth ri ri ri ri ri ri ri Acquisition Start Li it it Li Li Li Li Trigger Signal f ee oe ee a a a moe Z a tart Trigger Signal applied to line 1 nn D on qe zj A Fig 43 Use Case 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger On 138 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 3 Acquisition Start Trigger On Frame Start Trigger Off Use case three is illustrated on page 140 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off Because the acquisition start trigger mode is set to on the user must apply an acquisition start trigger si
380. te abs parameter has been used to set the camera s frame rate the camera will use this frame rate setting to calculate the device current throughput If software or hardware triggering is being used to control the camera s frame rate the maximum frame rate allowed with the current camera settings will be used to calculate the device current throughput Note that the Device Current Throughput parameter indicates the bandwidth needed to transmit the actual image data and chunk data The Bandwidth Assigned parameter on the other hand indicates the bandwidth needed to transmit image data and chunk data plus the bandwidth reserved for retries and the bandwidth needed for any overhead such as leaders and trailers Resulting Frame Rate read only Indicates the maximum allowed frame acquisition rate in frames per second given the current camera settings The parameter takes the current area of interest exposure time and bandwidth settings into account If the Acquisition Frame Rate abs parameter has been used to set the camera s frame rate the Resulting Frame Rate parameter will show the Acquisition Frame Rate abs parameter setting If software or hardware triggering is being used to control the camera s frame rate the Resulting Frame Rate parameter will indicate the maximum frame rate allowed given the current camera settings You can read or set the camera s network related parameter values from within your application software by us
381. te all required acquisition start and frame start trigger signals internally When the camera is set this way it will constantly acquire images without any need for triggering by the user This use case is commonly referred to as free run The rate at which the camera will acquire images will be determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter unless the current camera settings result in a lower frame rate If the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is disabled the camera will acquire frames at the maximum allowed frame rate Cameras are used in free run for many applications One example is for aerial photography A camera set for free run is used to capture a continuous series of images as an aircraft overflies an area The images can then be used for a variety of purposes including vegetation coverage estimates archaeological site identification etc For more information about the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 9 5 1 1 on page 107 and for information about setting the parameter see Section 9 5 1 3 on page 109 Basler pilot 135 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Use Case Free Run Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger Off The acquisition start trigger is off The camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals internally with no action by the user The frame start trigger is off The camera will generate frame start trigger signals internally with no action by th
382. ted to the host PC With the YUV 4 2 2 format the bytes are ordered as specified in the DCAM standard issued by the 1394 Trade Association With the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV format the bytes are ordered to emulate the ordering normally associated with analog frame grabbers and Windows frame buffers The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 YUYV output With this format the Y component is transmitted for each pixel but the U and V components are only transmitted for every second pixel The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bo the first byte in the buffer Basler pilot 201 Pixel Data Formats Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Y value for Pg B4 U value for Po B2 Y value for P4 B3 V value for Po By Y value for P Bs U value for P2 Be Y value for P3 B7 V value for Pz Bg Y value for P4 Bg U value for P4 Bio Y value for P5 B114 V value for P4 e e e e e e Bm 7 Y value for P 3 Bm 6 U value for P 3 Bm 5 Y value for P Bm 4 V value for P 3 Bm 3 Y value for P Bm 2 U value for Ph 1 Bm 1 Y value for Ph Bm V value for P 4 AW00015119000 When a color camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 YUYV output the pixel data
383. ter The pixel data output formats available on color cameras are related to the Bayer pattern so you need a basic knowledge of the Bayer filter to understand the pixel formats With the Bayer filter each individual pixel is covered by a part of the filter that allows light of only one color to strike the pixel The pattern of the Bayer filter used on the camera is as shown in Figure 52 the alignment of the Bayer filter with repect to the sensor is shown as an example only the figure shows the BG filter alignment As the figure illustrates within each square of four pixels one pixel sees only red light one sees only blue light and two pixels see only green light This combination mimics the human eye s sensitivity to color EEEE EREREREaS ee eE EEEE EERLRCERE HSHaSHaSeEa ono Fig 52 Bayer Filter Pattern Basler pilot 159 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00015119000 10 1 1 Bayer Color Filter Alignment The alignment of the Bayer filter to the pixels in the images acquired by color cameras depends on the camera model Table 12 shows the filter alignment for each available camera model Color Camera Model Filter Alignment piA640 210 GB piA1000 48 GB piA1000 60 GB piA1600 35 GB piA1900 32 GB piA2400 17 BG Table 12 Bayer Filter to Sensor Alignment Bayer GB alignment means that pixel zero and pixel one of the first line in each image transmitted will be green and blue respectively And
384. ter is set to e g input line 1 an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 on the camera will act as the acquisition start trigger signal for the camera This type of trigger signal is generally referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExASTrig signal can be used to trigger frame acquisition The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status frame acquisition will start whenever the appropriate edge transition is received by the camera When the camera receives a hardware trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new acquisition start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new acquisition start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When the camera is operating under control of an ExASTrig signal the period of the ExASTrig signal will determine the rate at which the camera is acquiring frames 1 amp ExASTrig period in seconds blame Reale For example if you are operating a camera with an ExASTrig signal period of 20 ms 0 020 s i a gozo 20 fps So in this case the fram
385. termine the exposure time for each frame With the trigger width mode the way that you manipulate the rise and fall of the hardware signal will determine the exposure time The trigger width mode is especially useful if you want to change the exposure time from frame to frame 96 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 3 Acquisition Start and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode Legacy and Standard Mode Executing an Acquisition Start commmand prepares the camera to acquire frames You must execute an Acquisition Start command before you can begin acquiring frames Executing an Acquisition Stop command terminates the camera s ability to acquire frames When the camera receives an Acquisition stop command If the camera is not in the process of acquiring a frame its ability to acquire frames will be terminated immediately If the camera is in the process of acquiring a frame the frame acquisition process will be allowed to finish and the camera s ability to acquire new frames will be terminated The camera s Acquisition Mode parameter has two settings single frame and continuous The use of Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands and the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter setting are related If the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter is set for single frame after an Acquisition Start command has been executed a single frame can be acquired When acquisition of one frame is complete the cam
386. ters Related to Hardware Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 116 9 6 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Legacy Mode 20000 eee eee 118 9 6 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Legacy Mode 05 119 9 6 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off 119 9 6 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On 5 120 9 6 1 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters oere EEEO gece MEE Eee tials E 121 9 6 2 Using a Software Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 122 962 s INTPOUUCTION er nets eat dae Getic Bt ek RO hae wee ET ES 122 9 6 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 123 9 6 3 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 125 9 6 3 1 Introduction sa eieaa ewe eee eee we wa E E 125 9 6 3 2 Exposure Modes 000 00 e eee 126 9 6 3 3 Acquisition Start Trigger Delay 00005 129 9 6 3 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 129 9 7 Exposure Time Parameters 0 000 eens 131 9 7 1 Setting the Exposure Time Using Raw Settings 132 9 7 2 Setting the Exposure Time Using Absolute Settings 133 Basler pilot iii Table of Contents AW00015119000 9 8
387. that the network can handle the viewer will lose the ability to capture images When you use Continuous Shot the viewer s status bar will indicate that it is acquiring images but the image in the viewing area will appear to be frozen 54 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth Step 3 Set the Bandwidth Reserve parameter for each camera The Bandwidth Reserve parameter setting for a camera determines how much of the bandwidth assigned to that camera will be reserved for lost packet resends and for asynchronous traffic such as commands sent to the camera If you are operating the camera in a relatively EMI free environment you may find that a bandwidth reserve of 2 or 3 is adequate If you are operating in an extremely noisy environment you may find that a reserve of 8 or 10 is more appropriate Step 4 Calculate the data bandwidth needed by each camera The objective of this step is to determine how much bandwidth in Byte s each camera needs to transmit the image data that it generates The amount of data bandwidth a camera needs is the product of several factors the amount of data included in each image the amount of chunk data being added to each image the packet overhead such as packet leaders and trailers and the number of frames the camera is acquiring each second For each camera you can use the two formulas below to calculate the data bandwidth needed To u
388. the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 109 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 9 5 2 Using a Software Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 9 5 2 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software frame start trigger signal to the camera to begin each frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status frame exposure will start when the software frame start trigger signal is received by the camera Figure 33 illustrates frame acquisition with a software frame start trigger signal When the camera receives a software trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new frame start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new frame start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the camera s Exposure Mode parameter must be set to timed The exposure time for each acquired frame will be determined by the value of the camera s exposure time parameters Software Frame Start Software Frame Start Trig
389. the ExpAc signal to know when exposure is taking place and thus know when to avoid moving the camera Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure Frame N Frame N 1 Frame N 2 2 35 us e E 2 3 5 us a E E 10 26 E A 7 i ExpAc i ce a i 10 26 use ma Signal Timing charts are not drawn to scale Times stated are typical Fig 48 Exposure Active Signal and the fall of the signal in relation to the start and the end of exposure See When you use the exposure active signal be aware that there is a delay in the rise Figure 48 for details By default the ExpAc signal is assigned to physical output line 1 on the camera However the assignment of the ExpAc signal to a physical output line can be changed Selecting the Exposure Active Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The exposure active output signal can be selected to act as the source signal for e g output line 1 Selecting a source signal for the output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the exposure active output signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Basler pilot 145 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Outl Camera
390. the camera to 8 bit RGB Fig 78 Test Image Six Basler pilot 313 Features AW00015119000 12 19 Device Information Parameters Each camera includes a set of device information parameters These parameters provide some basic information about the camera The device information parameters include Device Vendor Name read only contains the name of the camera s vendor This string will always indicate Basler as the vendor Device Model Name read only contains the model name of the camera for example piA640 210gm Device Manufacturer Info read only can contain some information about the camera manufacturer This string usually indicates none Device Version read only contains the device version number for the camera Firmware Version read only contains the version of the firmware in the camera Device ID read only contains the serial number of the camera Device User ID read write is used to assign a user defined name to a device This name will be displayed in the Basler pylon Viewer and the Basler pylon IP Configuration Tool The name will also be visible in the friendly name field of the device information objects returned by pylon s device enumeration procedure Device Scan Type read only contains the scan type of the camera for example area scan Sensor Width read only contains the physical width of the sensor in pixels Sensor Height read only contains the physical height of
391. the camera will gradually become warmer during the first 1 5 hours of operation After 1 5 hours the housing temperature should stabilize and no longer increase If your camera is mounted on a substantial metal component in your system this may provide sufficient heat dissipation The use of a fan to provide air flow over the camera is an extremely efficient method of heat dissipation The use of a fan provides the best heat dissipation 24 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 9 Precautions gt CAUTION CAUTION Avoid Dust on the Sensor The camera is shipped with a cap on the lens mount To avoid collecting dust on the camera s IR cut filter color cameras or sensor mono cameras make sure that you always put the cap in place when there is no lens mounted on the camera Lens Thread Length is Limited Color models of the camera with a C mount lens adapter are equipped with an IR cut filter mounted inside of the adapter The location of this filter limits the length of the threads on any lens you use with the camera If a lens with a very long thread length is used the IR cut filter will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate For more specific information about the lens thread length see Section 1 5 3 on page 20 CAUTION gt CAUTION Basler pilot Voltage Outside of Specified Range Can Cause Damage The recommended operating voltage of th
392. the exposure active signal see Section Section 9 10 4 on page 148 For more information about the trigger ready signal see Section Section 9 10 3 on page 146 For more information about assigning camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 8 2 1 on page 81 76 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Physical Interface 7 7 3 Output Line Response Time Response times for the output lines on the camera are as defined below Camera Output Signal a fee Output Line Voltage e tongo tor10 Time Fig 27 Output Line Response Times tongo Time us from switching on the signal until the voltage has reached 90 of its final level toft19 Time us from switching off the signal until the voltage has dropped to 10 of its original level The response time values for the output lines on your camera will depend on the load current and the applied voltage of your specific application In addition the exact values can vary between individual cameras As an example tongo and toff10 Were measured for a specific camera for load currents of 5 mA and 50 mA and voltages between 3 3 V and 24 V The results are shown on the figure below Basler pilot 77 Physical Interface AW00015119000 50 T 3 oO H 40 30 20 10 Voltage V 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Fig 28 Dependence of tongo and toff10 On Voltage for Different Load Currents Measured for an Individual Camera
393. the exposure time using the raw settings the Exposure Time Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new exposure time Setting the Absolute Exposure Time Parameter You can set the Exposure Time Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 124 double resultingExpTime Camera ExposureTimeAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 133 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 9 8 Use Case Diagrams This section assumes that the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control In principle this section also applies if the legacy mode is enabled instead In this case however the following differences must be taken into account the acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode the frame start trigger of the standard mode is called acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but
394. the gain balance between the left half and the right half of the sensor If you know the current settings for Gain Raw All Gain Raw Tap 1 and Gain Raw Tap 2 you can use the formulas below to calculate the dB of gain that will result from the settings Gain on the Right Sensor Half 0 0359 x Gain Raw All Setting 0 0359 x Gain Raw Tap 1 Setting Gain on the Left Sensor Half 0 0359 x Gain Raw All Setting 0 0359 x Gain Raw Tap 2 Setting For example assume that you have set the Gain Raw All to 450 the Gain Raw Tap 1 to 0 and the Gain Raw Tap 2 to 0 Then Gain on the Right Sensor Half 0 0359 x 450 0 0359 x 0 Gain on the Right Sensor Half 16 2 dB Gain on the Left Sensor Half 0 0359 x 450 0 0359 x 0 Gain on the Left Sensor Half 16 2 dB Basler pilot 209 Features AW00015119000 Setting the Gain adjusted The Gain Auto function is the automatic counterpart of the gain feature Gain can not only be manually set see below but can also be automatically and carries out a Gain Raw All adjustment automatically For more information about auto fuctions see Section 12 10 1 on page 270 For more information about the Gain Auto function see Section 12 10 2 on page 277 To set the Gain Raw All parameter value Set the Gain Selector to All Set the Gain Raw parameter to your desired value To set the Gain Raw Tap 1 parameter value Set the Gain Selector to Tap 1 Set the Gain Raw
395. the image where the adjusted color predominates For example the adjustment of red affects the colors in the image with a predominantly red component Keep in mind that when you adjust a color the colors on each side of it in the color hexagon will also be affected to some degree For example when you adjust red yellow and magenta will also be affected In the color hexagon the adjustment of hue can be considered as a rotation between hues Primary colors can be rotated towards and as far as their neighboring secondary colors And secondary colors can be rotated towards and as far as their neighboring primary colors For example when red is rotated in negative direction towards yellow then for example purple in the image can be changed to red and red in the image can be changed to orange Red can be rotated as far as yellow where red will be completely transformed into yellow When red is rotated in a positive direction towards magenta then for example orange in the image can be changed to red and red in the image can be changed to purple Red can be rotated as far as magenta where red will be completely transformed into magenta Adjusting saturation changes the colorfulness intensity of a color The color adjustment feature lets you adjust saturation for the primary and secondary colors For example if saturation for red is increased the colorfulness of red colors in the image will increase If red is set to minimum saturat
396. the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 130 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 7 Exposure Time Parameters Many of the camera s image acquisition modes require you to specify an exposure time There are two ways to set exposure time by setting raw values or by setting an absolute value The two methods are described below You can use whichever method you prefer to set the exposure time The exposure time must not be set below a minimum specified value The minimum exposure time for each camera model is shown in Table 10 The maximum exposure time that can be set is also shown in Table 10 Camera Model Minimum Allowed Exposure Time Maximum Possible Exposure Time piA640 210gm gc 28 us 10000000 us piA1000 48 gm gc 24 us 10000000 us piA1000 60 gm gc 80 us 10000000 us piA1600 35 gm gc 50 us 10000000 us piA1900 32 gm gc 69 us 10000000 us piA2400 17 gm gc 29 us 10000000 us Table 10 Minimum Allowed Exposure Time and Maximum Possible Exposure Time Exposure time can not only be manually set see below but can also be automatically adjusted Exposure Auto is an auto function and the automatic counterpart to manually setting an absolute exposure time The exposure auto func
397. the sequence control source for controlling sequence set advance In addition Line 2 was selected as the source for controlling sequence cycle restart Both input lines are not set for invert 240 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be low and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence
398. they may however be useful for testing purposes We strongly recommend to only use synchronous advance and synchronous restart for real time applications acquired frame The chunk contains the index number of the sequence set that was used for the frame acquisition For more information about the Sequence set Index chunk see the Chunk Features section You can use the Sequence Set Index chunk feature to add a chunk to each Using the Load Command There is also the Sequence Set Load command that may be useful when working with the sequence sets for testing purposes If you use the Sequence Set Selector parameter to select a sequence set and then you execute the Sequence Set Load command the sequence parameter values in the active set will be replaced by the values stored in the selected sequence set This ability can be useful in two situations First if you simply want to see how the parameters currently stored in one of the sequence sets will affect camera operation you can load the parameters from that sequence set into the active parameter set and see what happens Second if you want to prepare a new sequence set and you know that an existing set is already close to what you will need you can load the existing sequence set into the active set make some small changes to the active set and then save the active set as a new sequence set Make sure the sequencer feature is disabled before issuing the Sequence Set
399. tion automatically adjusts the Auto Exposure Time Abs parameter value In contrast to the manually set absolute exposure time the automatically adjusted absolute exposure time is not restricted to multiples of the current exposure time base The automatic adjustment is not available when trigger width exposure mode is selected For more information about auto functions see Section 12 10 on page 270 For more information about the Exposure Auto function see Section 12 10 3 on page 279 For information on parameter settings for obtaining the maximum possible exposure time see Section 9 7 1 on page 132 Basler pilot 131 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 9 7 1 Setting the Exposure Time Using Raw Settings When exposure time is set using raw values the exposure time will be determined by a combination of two elements The first element is the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter and the second element is the Exposure Time Base The exposure time is determined by the product of these two elements Exposure Time Exposure Time Raw Parameter Value x Exposure Time Base By default the Exposure Time Base is fixed at 20 us Typically the exposure time is adjusted by setting only the Exposure Time Raw parameter The Exposure Time Raw parameter value can range from 1 to 10000000 So if the value is set to 100 for example the exposure time will be 100 x 20 us or 2000 us Settings for Obtaining the Max
400. tion to easily set the parameters 9 10 5 Camera Events Certain camera events allow you to get informed about the current camera acquisition status AcquisitionStartEventData event An acquisition start trigger has occurred FrameStartEventData event A frame start trigger has occurred ExposureEndEventData event The end of an exposure has occurred For more information about camera events and event reporting see Section 12 17 on page 308 150 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Image Acquisition Control 9 11 Acquisition Timing Chart Figure 51 shows a timing chart for image acquisition and transmission The chart assumes that exposure is triggered by an ExTrig signal with rising edge activation and that the camera is set for the timed exposure mode The ExTrig signal will be an externally triggered frame start trigger signal when using image acquisition control in standard mode The ExTrig signal will be an externally triggered acquisition start trigger signal when using image acquisition control in legacy mode As Figure 51 shows there is a slight delay between the rise of the ExTrig signal and the start of exposure After the exposure time for an image acquisition is complete the camera begins reading out the acquired image data from the sensor into a buffer in the camera When the camera has determined that a sufficient amount of image data has accumulated in the buffer it will begin transmitting the data from the camera to the host PC
401. tness value Y of each pixel according to the following formula y E Y uncorrected Y xY corrected Y max max The formula uses uncorrected and corrected pixel brightnesses that are normalized by the maximum pixel brightness The maximum pixel brightness equals 255 for 8 bit output and 4095 for 12 bit output The user gamma correction value can be set in a range from 0 to 3 99998 When the user gamma correction value is set to 1 the output pixel brightness will not be corrected A user gamma correction value between 0 and 1 will result in increased overall brightness and a gamma correction value greater than 1 will result in decreased overall brightness In all cases black output pixel brightness equals 0 and white output pixel brightness equals 255 at 8 bit output and 4095 at 12 bit output will not be corrected Enabling and Setting Gamma Correction You can enable or disable the gamma correction feature by setting the value of the Gamma Enable parameter You can use the Gamma Selector to select either SRGB or user gamma correction If you select user gamma correction you can use the Gamma parameter to set the gamma correction value You can set the Gamma Enable parameter use the Gamma Selector and set Gamma parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values for sRGB type correction Enable the Gamma f
402. to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the trigger input counter information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Trigger Input Counter parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the trigger input counter chunk run the parser and retrieve the trigger input counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Trigger Input Counter chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector Triggerinputcounter Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true 300 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features retrieve data from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64 t triggerinputCounter Camera ChunkTriggerinputcounter GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide a
403. to the YUV color model The conversion algorithm uses the following formulas Y 0 30 R 0 59 G 0 11B U 0 17R 0 33G 0 50 B V 0 50R 0 41G 0 09B Once the conversion to a YUV color model is complete the pixel data is transmitted to the host PC For complete details of the YUV data output formats see Section 11 3 on page 187 Mono Format Cameras equipped with a Bayer pattern color filter can output pixel data in the Mono 8 format Basler pilot 161 Color Creation and Enhancement AW00015119000 When a color camera is set for Mono 8 the pixel values in each captured image are first demosaiced and converted to the YUV color model as described above The camera then transmits the 8 bit Y value for each pixel to the host PC In the YUV color model the Y component for each pixel represents a brightness value This brightness value can be considered as equivalent to the value that would be sent from a pixel in a monochrome camera So in essence when a color camera is set for Mono 8 it outputs an 8 bit monochrome image This type of output is sometimes referred to as Y Mono 8 For complete details of the Mono 8 format see Section 11 3 on page 187 162 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 2 Integrated IR Cut Filter All Color Models Color models of the camera that have a C mount lens adapter are equipped with an IR cut filter as standard equipment The filter is mounted inside of the lens ada
404. to the order of YUV 4 2 2 Packed output from a color camera For more information about the YUV 4 2 2 Packed format on color cameras see Section 11 3 7 on page 199 11 2 5 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format When a monochrome camera is set for the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed pixel data format the camera transmits Y U and V values in a fashion that mimics the output from a color camera set for YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed The Y value transmitted for each pixel is an actual 8 bit brightness value similar to the pixel data transmitted when a monochrome camera is set for Mono 8 The U and V values transmitted will always be zero With this format a Y value is transmitted for each pixel but the U and V values are only transmitted for every second pixel The order of the pixel data for a received frame in the image buffer in your PC is similar to the order of YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed output from a color camera For more information about the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed format on color cameras see Section 11 3 8 on page 201 186 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 Pixel Data Formats for Color Cameras 11 3 1 Bayer GB 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 When a color camera is set for the Bayer GB 8 pixel data format it outputs 8 bits of data per pixel and the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens you get 8 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens you get 8
405. tomatic adjustments for Gain Raw Tap 1 and Gain Raw Tap 2 are not available The gain auto function uses Auto Function AOI1 and can be operated in the once and continuous modes of operation If Auto Function AOI1 does not overlap the Image AOI see the Auto Function AOI section the pixel data from Auto Function AOI1 will not be used to control the image brightness Instead the current manual setting of the Gain Raw parameter value will control the image brightness When the gain auto function is used the exposure auto function can be used at the same time In this case however you must also set the auto function profile feature For more information about gain see Section 12 1 on page 207 For more information about the auto function profile feature see Section 12 10 5 on page 282 To use the gain auto function perform the following steps Select Auto Function AOI1 Set the postion and size of Auto Function AOI1 Set the lower and upper limits for the Gain Raw All parameter value Set the target average gray value If necessary set the auto function profile Q OV Oe NS Enable the gain auto function by setting it to once or continuous You must choose the continuous setting when using the auto function profile The currently settable limits for the Auto Gain Raw parameter value depend on the current pixel data format on the current settings for binning and on whether or not the Gain Raw parameter limits for the
406. tput As mentioned above when the camera is set for a pixel format where it outputs 12 effective bits the lookup table is used to perform a 12 bit to 12 bit conversion But the lookup table can also be used in 12 bit to 8 bit fashion To use the table in 12 bit to 8 bit fashion you enter 12 bit values into the table and enable the table as you normally would But instead of setting the camera for a pixel format that results in 12 bit camera output you set the camera for a pixel format that results in 8 bit output such as Mono 8 or YUV 4 2 2 Packed In this situation the camera will first use the values in the table to do a 12 bit to 12 bit conversion It will then truncate the lowest 4 bits of the converted value and will report out the remaining 8 highest bits Changing the Values in the Luminance Lookup Table and Enabling the Table You can change the values in the luminance lookup table LUT and enable the use of the lookup table by doing the following Use the LUT Selector to select a lookup table Currently there is only one lookup table available i e the luminance lookup table described above Use the LUT Index parameter to select a value in the lookup table The LUT Index parameter selects the value in the table to change The index number for the first value in the table is 0 for the second value in the table is 1 for the third value in the table is 2 and so on Use the LUT Value parameter to set the selected value in the
407. ual adjustment will not allow reaching a target value for an image property the auto function will try to reach the target value for a maximum of 30 images and will then be set to off If an auto function is set to the once operation mode and if the circumstances Some auto functions also provide a continuous mode of operation where the parameter value is adjusted repeatedly while images are acquired Depending on the current frame rate the automatic adjustments will usually be carried out for every or every other image The repeated automatic adjustment will proceed until the once mode of operation is used or until the auto function is set to off in which case the parameter value resulting from the latest automatic adjustment will operate unless the parameter is manually adjusted When an auto function is set to off the parameter value resulting from the latest automatic adjustment will operate unless the parameter is manually adjusted You can enable auto functions and change their settings while the camera is capturing images on the fly Basler pilot 271 Features AW00015119000 the camera was continuously capturing images the auto function will become effective with a short delay and the first few images may not be affected by the auto function If you have set an auto function to once or continuous operation mode while 12 10 1 2 Auto Function AOI A
408. ue in a range from 4 0 to 3 96875 As an alternative you can use the Color Adjustment Hue Raw parameter to set the hue as an integer value on a scale ranging from 128 to 127 This integer range maps linearly to the floating point range with 256 being equivalent to 4 0 32 being equivalent to 1 0 and 255 being equivalent to 3 96875 You can use the Color Adjustment Saturation parameter to set the saturation for the selected color as a floating point value in a range from 0 0 to 1 99219 As an alternative you can use the Color Adjustment Saturation Raw parameter to set the saturation as an integer value on a scale ranging from 0 to 255 This integer range maps linearly to the floating point range with 0 being equivalent to 0 0 128 being equivalent to 1 0 and 255 being equivalent to 1 99219 Enabling and Setting Color Adjustment You can set the Processed Raw Enable Color Adjustment Enable Color Adjustment Selector Color Adjustment Hue Color Adjustment Hue Raw Color Adjustment Saturation and Color Adjustment Saturation Raw parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API In this example we assume that you want to set your camera for Bayer BG 8 output and therefore you must set the Processed Raw Enable parameter value to enabled The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values II Set the camera for Bayer BG8 pixel data output format Camera PixelFormat
409. ult When the image and appended chunks pass through the parser the parser calculates a CRC checksum based on the received image and chunk information It then compares the calculated CRC checksum with the CRC checksum contained in the CRC checksum chunk If the two match the result will indicate that the image data is OK If the two do not match the result will indicate that the image is corrupted You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the time stamp chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data Make chunk mode active and enable CRC chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector PayloadCRC16 Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true Basler pilot 305 Features AW00015119000 Check the CRC checksum of an grabbed image IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize if ChunkParser HasCRC amp amp ChunkParser CheckCRC cerr lt lt Image corrupted lt lt endl For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programm
410. unt of the specific pre selected light source The vector consisting of the R G or B component for each pixel in the image is multiplied by a matrix containing a set of correction values Matrix Color Transformation Parameters The initial parameter that you must consider when working with the matrix color transformation feature is the Processed Raw Enable parameter If the camera is set to output pixel data in one of the Bayer formats then the Processed Raw Enable parameter must be set to enabled to allow color enhancements to be performed Setting this parameter to enabled will allow the camera to perform color enhancements on the raw RGB data from the sensor and still be able to output the pixel data in one of the Bayer formats If the camera is set for one of the Bayer pixel data output formats and the Processed Raw Enable parameter is not set to enabled the matrix color transformation feature and the color adjustment feature will have no effect on camera operation The Processed Raw Enable parameter is not relevant if the camera is set to a color pixel data output format other than a Bayer format e g to a YUV output format The first parameter associated with the matrix color transformation feature is the Color Transfor mation Selector parameter This parameter is used to select the type of transformation that will be performed before color correction for a specific light source is performed addressed by the second parameter For camera
411. up of packets arrives If the packet or group does not arrive within the specified period the driver will send a resend request for the missing packet or group of packets The parameters associated with the filter driver are described below Enable Resend Enables or disables the packet resend mechanism If packet resend is disabled and the filter driver detects that a packet has been lost during transmission the grab result for the returned buffer holding the image will indicate that the grab failed and the image will be incomplete If packet resend is enabled and the driver detects that a packet has been lost during transmission the driver will send a resend request to the camera If the camera still has the packet in its buffer it will resend the packet If there are several lost packets in a row the resend requests will be combined Packet Timeout The Packet Timeout parameter defines how long in milliseconds the filter driver will wait for the next expected packet before it initiates a resend request Ensure the Packet Timeout parameter is set to a longer time interval than the time interval set for the inter packet delay Frame Retention The Frame Retention parameter sets the timeout in milliseconds for the frame retention timer Whenever the filter driver detects the leader for a frame the frame retention timer starts The timer resets after each packet in the frame is received and will timeout after the last packet is received
412. urationRaw SetValue 100 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Changing the Duration Time Base By default the Timer Duration Time Base is fixed at 1 us and the timer duration is normally adjusted by setting the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter However if you require a duration time that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter alone the Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the duration time base The Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter value sets the duration time base in us The default is 1 us and it can be changed in 1 us increments Note that there is only one timer duration time base and it is used by all four of the available timers You can set the Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera TimerDurationTimebaseAbs SetValue 5 Basler pilot 87 1 O Control AW00015119000 Setting the Duration with an Absolute Value You can also set the Timer duration by using an absolute value This is accomplished by setting the Timer Duration Abs parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in incr
413. ure start delay for each camera model Basler pilot 151 Image Acquisition Control AW00015119000 Camera Model Exposure Start Delay piA640 210gm gc 23 64 us piA1000 48 gm gc 48 78 us piA1000 60gm gc 40 13 us piA1600 35 gm gc 65 98 us piA1900 32 gm gc 101 45 us piA2400 17 gm gc 32 06 us Table 11 Exposure Start Delays Note that if the debouncer feature is used the debouncer setting for the input line must be added to the exposure start delays shown in Table 11 to determine the total start delay For example assume that you are using an piA640 210 camera and that you have set the cameras for hardware triggering Also assume that you have selected input line 1 to accept the hardware trigger signal and that you have set the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter for input line 1 to 5 us In this case Total Start Delay Start Delay from Table 11 Debouncer Setting Total Start Delay 23 64 us 5 us Total Start Delay 28 64 us TrigRdy Signal ExTrig Signal Exposure Start Delay Exposure Start Delay lt Exposure Exposure Exposure E Frame N Frame N 1 Frame N 2 xposure a ai a Frame Frame N Readout to the Image Buffer Frame N 1 Readout to the Image Buffer Readout Transmission Start Delay t a Transmission Start Delay lt a w a Frame Frame N Transmission to Host PC Frame N 1 Transmission to Host PC Transmission Timing charts are not drawn to scale
414. using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector If you want to select the Standard Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector Standard If you want to select the High Gain Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector HighGain If you want to select the Auto Functions Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector AutoFunctions If you want to select the Color Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector Color You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the selector camera is idle i e when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not have Selecting which factory setup will serve as the default set is only allowed when the a single image acquisition pending Selecting the standard factory setup as the default set and then loading the default set into the active set is a good course of action if you have grossly misadjusted the settings in the camera and you are not sure how to recover The standard factory setup is optimized for use in typical situations and will provide good camera performance in most cases 318 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 20 3 Loading a Saved Set or the Default Set into the Active Set If you have saved a configuration set into the camera s
415. utput signals or to user settable This will set the source signal for the selected line By default the Exposure Active signal is assigned to Output Line 1 and the Trigger Ready Signal is assigned to Output Line 2 You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Outl Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource ExposureActive Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Out2 Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource TriggerReady For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 For more information about setting the state of user settable output signals see Section 8 2 2 on page 82 Basler pilot 81 1 O Control AW00015119000 For more information about working with the timer output signals see Section 8 2 4 on page 84 For more information about the exposure active signal see Section 9 10 4 on page 148 For more information about the trigger ready signal see Section 9 10 3 on page 146 8 2 2 Setting the State of User Settable Output Lin
416. v v v v v v v 4 1 10 10 v v v 10 10 10 eS E Ee ee M Time Fig 63 Sequencer in Controlled Sequence Advance Mode with Disabled as the Sequence Control Source and Asynchronous Advance and Restart Basler pilot 247 Features AW00015119000 Operating the Sequencer Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for operating the sequencer in Controlled sequence advance mode from within your application software The following code snippet illustrates enabling and disabling the sequencer The example assumes that sequence sets were previously configured and are currently available in the camera s memory Enable the sequencer featur Camera SequenceEnable SetValue true Disable the sequencer featur Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 12 5 2 4 Configuration Configuring Sequence Sets and Advance Control Use the following procedure for populating sequence sets and setting the sources for sequence set advance and sequence cycle restart Make sure that the sequencer feature is disabled Set the Sequence Advance mode to Controlled Set the Sequence Set Total Number parameter The maximum number is 64 Set the Sequence Control Selector parameter to Advance to configure sequence set advance Set the Sequence Control Source parameter to specify the source that will control
417. values of sequence set 3 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be high and therefore the sequence cycle is restarted Input line 1 is found to be high but this has no significance Synchronous restart has priority over the secquence set advance control The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition Another sequence set cycle has started When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be low and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition 242 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features Use Case Operation in controlled sequence advance mode with Line 1 asthe sequence control source Cycling through the sequence set cycles according to the states of input line
418. virtual sensor columns And when you set the Y Offset and the Height for the AOI you will be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor lines For more informtion about the area of interest AOI feature see Section 12 4 on page 219 Basler pilot 259 Features AW00015119000 Binning s Effect on the Sensor Readout and Frame Rate Formulas In several areas of the manual formulas appear for sensor readout time and for calculating the maximum frame rate In several of these formulas you must enter the current height of the area of interest AOI If you are not using binning you would enter the height of the AOI in physical sensor lines If binning is enabled however you must use the concept of a virtual sensor as described above and the height of the AOI that you use in the formulas would be in terms of virtual sensor lines The affected formulas appear on page 152 and on page 155 260 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Features 12 7 Reverse X The reverse X feature is a horizontal mirror image feature When the reverse X feature is enabled the pixel values for each line in a captured image will be swapped end for end about the line s cen ter This means that for each line the value of the first pixel in the line will be swapped with the value of the last pixel the value of the second pixel in the line will be swapped with the value of the next to last pixel and so on Figure 67 shows a normal image on the left and an image c
419. x with a pre selected set of values that will make appropriate corrections for images captured with daylight lighting that has a color temperature of about 6500K When you select this setting the camera will also adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they are appropriate for a daylight light source with a color temperature of about 6500K Custom The user can set the values in the matrix as desired When you select this setting the camera will also adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they have neutral values that do not change the appearance of the colors In almost all cases selecting one of the settings that populate the matrix with pre selected values will give you excellent results with regard to correcting the colors for the light source you are using The custom setting should only be used by someone who is thoroughly familiar with matrix color transformations Instructions for using the custom setting appear in the next section The third parameter associated with matrix color transformation is the Color Transformation Matrix Factor parameter This parameter determines how strong an effect the matrix correction function will have on the colors output by the camera The parameter setting is a floating point value that can range from 0 to 1 When the parameter value is set to 0 matrix correction will have no effect When the value is set to 1 matrix correction will
420. xel values from the sensor takes place In regard to this image acquisition process there are two common ways for the camera to operate with non overlapped exposure and with overlapped exposure In the non overlapped mode of operation each time an image is acquired the camera completes the entire exposure readout process before acquisition of the next image is started This situation is illustrated in Figure 46 Image Acquisition N Image Acquisition N 1 Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Time Fig 46 Non overlapped Exposure While operating in a non overlapped fashion is perfectly normal and is appropriate for many situations it is not the most efficient way to operate the camera in terms of acquisition frame rate On this camera however it is allowable to begin exposing a new image while a previously acquired image is being read out This situation is illustrated in Figure 47 and is known as operating the camera with overlapped exposure As you can see running the camera with readout and exposure overlapped can allow higher acquisition frame rates because the camera is performing two processes at once Image Acquisition N Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 1 Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 3 Exposure Readout Time Fig 47 Ove
421. ximum efficiency and that resend requests will be sent for all missing packets With the default parameter values the resend request threshold is located very close to the front end of the receive window Accordingly there will be only a minimum delay between detecting a missing packet and sending a resend request for it In this case a delay according to the Resend Timeout parameter will not occur see Figure 18 In addition resend request batching will not occur DIAGRAM IS NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 1 2 3 5 7 9 10 11 T oy lt 995 996 997 998 999 1000 az 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 101 996 2997 2998 r nnr E 4 6 8 12 gt Fi g 18 Combination of Threshold Resend Mechanism and Timeout Resend Mechanism 1 Stream of packets Gray indicates that the status was checked as the packet entered the receive window White indicates that the status has not yet been checked 2 Receive window of the performance driver 3 Threshold for sending resend requests resend request threshold The first resend request for packet 1002 is sent to the camera The camera does not respond with a resend iN Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 5 The Resend Timeout interval expires and the second resend request for packet 1002 is se
422. y forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 22 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 7 Avoiding EMI and ESD Problems The cameras are frequently installed in industrial environments Thes
423. y modified at any time during the cycling a restart starts a new sequence set cycle before the previous cycle is completed The restart can be controlled by the states of an input line controlled sequence advance only or by a software command a non cyclical advance allows to skip a sequence set and will advance to the sequence set after the next The non cyclical advance can be controlled by a software command Advance or restart controlled by an input line are also called sychronous advance and sychronous restart because the checking of the states of an input line is always linked to a frame trigger signal Advance or restart controlled by a software command are also called asychronous advance and asychronous restart because they are not linked to a frame start trigger signal Basler pilot 225 Features AW00015119000 sequencer feature and should generally be used Asynchronous advance and Synchronous advance and restart are part of the standard operation of the restart are not suitable for standard operation because of the associated delays The delay between sending a software command and it becoming effective will depend on the specific installation and the current load on the network Accordingly the number of image acquisitions that may occur between sending the software command and it becoming effective can not be predicted Asynchronous advance and restart are therefore not suitable for real time applications
424. yer Color Filter Integrated IR Cut Filter White Balance Gamma Included white balance reset in Section 10 3 1 on page 164 Included sRGB gamma correction in Section 10 3 2 on page 166 Added Section 12 5 on page 222 describing the sequencer feature Added a note that averaging will not work when the sequencer is enabled in Section 12 8 on page 264 Added a note that auto functions will not work when the sequencer is enabled in Section 12 10 on page 270 Added Section 12 16 8 on page 307 describing the sequence set index chunk and modified Section 12 16 2 on page 294 accordingly Added the color factory setup in Section 12 20 on page 316 332 Basler pilot AW00015119000 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00015119000 08 Mar 2013 Minor corrections throughout the manual Inserted new Basler logo on the front page Updated the mail addresses on the back of the front page Removed information about the piA2400 12gm gc throughout the manual Indicated Basler AG as bearer of the copyright on the back of the front page Updated the power consumption values for the different pilot cameras in Section 1 2 on page 2 Entered RoHS in the specifications tables in Section 1 2 Changed the minimum voltage value from 11 3 to 10 8 VDC throughout the manual Updated the IR cut filter note in Section 1 4 on page 11 Updated Figure 23 in Section 7 2 3 on page 65 Added a current limiter to Figure
425. yncRestart command has not yet become effective because of the assumed associated delay When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used The AsyncRestart command has not yet become effective because of the assumed associated delay When the AsyncRestart command becomes effective the camera happens to be in waiting for frame start trigger status The parameter values of sequence set 0 are loaded into the active set Note that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while the parameter values of sequence set 1 are loaded into the active set see also Figure 63 sequence set are loaded into the active set During this period the camera will Make sure not to send a frame start trigger while the parameter values of a not wait for a frame start trigger and any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame start trigger status see the Acquisition Monitoring Tools section Basler pilot 245 Features AW00015119000 246 When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used Anot
426. you view and change most of the camera s parameter settings via a GUI based interface The viewer also lets you acquire images display them and save them Using the pylon Viewer software is a very convenient way to get your camera up and running quickly when you are doing your initial camera evaluation or doing a camera design in for a new project The pylon Viewer is included in Basler s pylon Driver Package You can obtain the pylon package from the Downloads section of our website www baslerweb com For more information about using the viewer see the installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 You can download the guide from the Basler website www baslerweb com 3 2 The IP Configuration Tool The Basler IP Configuration Tool is a standalone application that lets you change the IP configuration of the camera via a GUI The tool will detect all Basler GigE cameras attached to your network and let you make changes to a selected camera The IP Configuration Tool is included in Basler s pylon Driver Package You can obtain the pylon package from the Downloads section of our website www baslerweb com For more information about using IP Configuration Tool see the installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611xx000 You can download the guide from the Basler website www baslerweb com Basler pilot 31 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters AW00015119000
427. your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Enable reverse X Camera ReverseX SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameter For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 on page 31 Basler pilot 263 Features AW00015119000 12 8 Averaging The averaging feature will not work if the sequencer feature is enabled For more information about the sequencer feature see Section 12 5 on page 222 The avaraging feature lets you obtain an image that is the average of a set number of consecutively acquired individual images You can average up to 256 individual images When averaging is active the pixel values for each pixel will be summed and the total for each pixel will be divided by the number of the individual images acquired Decimals of the resulting average pixel values will be truncated and the averaged pixel values will be transmitted as integers You can use averaging for all modes of image acquisition You can obtain averaged images when the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame and to continuous and when the camera ac quires images continuously free run or when triggers are used Each individual image must be trigge

pilot User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents